WO2006015452A1 - Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host’s differential gene expression upon infection - Google Patents

Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host’s differential gene expression upon infection Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2006015452A1
WO2006015452A1 PCT/AU2005/001222 AU2005001222W WO2006015452A1 WO 2006015452 A1 WO2006015452 A1 WO 2006015452A1 AU 2005001222 W AU2005001222 W AU 2005001222W WO 2006015452 A1 WO2006015452 A1 WO 2006015452A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sequence
polynucleotide
level
polypeptide
hvi
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/AU2005/001222
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Richard Bruce Brandon
Mervyn Rees Thomas
Original Assignee
Athlomics Pty Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from AU2004904578A external-priority patent/AU2004904578A0/en
Application filed by Athlomics Pty Ltd filed Critical Athlomics Pty Ltd
Priority to NZ553225A priority Critical patent/NZ553225A/en
Priority to EP05771876.9A priority patent/EP1786934B1/en
Priority to US11/573,677 priority patent/US8071305B2/en
Priority to CA2576295A priority patent/CA2576295C/en
Priority to AU2005270667A priority patent/AU2005270667B2/en
Priority to CN2005800323153A priority patent/CN101065502B/en
Publication of WO2006015452A1 publication Critical patent/WO2006015452A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/70Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving virus or bacteriophage
    • C12Q1/701Specific hybridization probes
    • C12Q1/705Specific hybridization probes for herpetoviridae, e.g. herpes simplex, varicella zoster
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/20Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • A61P31/22Antivirals for DNA viruses for herpes viruses
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/569Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for microorganisms, e.g. protozoa, bacteria, viruses
    • G01N33/56983Viruses
    • G01N33/56994Herpetoviridae, e.g. cytomegalovirus, Epstein-Barr virus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/005Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from viruses
    • G01N2333/01DNA viruses
    • G01N2333/03Herpetoviridae, e.g. pseudorabies virus
    • G01N2333/035Herpes simplex virus I or II
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2469/00Immunoassays for the detection of microorganisms
    • G01N2469/10Detection of antigens from microorganism in sample from host

Definitions

  • Microarray-mediated diagnosis of Herpes Virus infection by monitoring host's differential gene expression upon infection.
  • This invention relates generally to methods and systems for the diagnosis, detection of host response, monitoring, treatment and management of herpes virus infections in mammals.
  • the invention has practical use in the early diagnosis of infection, in the detection of specific immune responses to herpes virus infection (with or without clinical signs), and in enabling better treatment and management decisions to be made in clinically and sub-clinically affected animals.
  • the invention also has practical use in monitoring mammals at risk of developing herpes-related sequelae or relapse of clinical signs following viral latency.
  • Such mammals include, but not be limited to, animals that are immunocompromised (through other disease or administration of therapeutic agents), suffering from chronic fatigue syndrome, stressed, or under athletic training regimens.
  • herpes viruses represent a large virus family causing widespread disease in man and in domestic and wild animals. There are more than 80 known types of herpes virus, but only eight are known to cause disease in humans. These are divided into three sub-families as shown below.
  • VZV Varicella-Zoster virus
  • Beta herpes virinae human herpes virus 5 (HHV-5) cytomegalovirus (CMV) human herpes virus 6 (HHV-6) roseolovirus human herpes virus 7 (HHV-7)
  • Herpes virus infections are widespread and cause diseases of serious economic importance. In fact, most species of mammals become infected with at least one strain of herpes virus early in life. Infection is permanent, and there are no known cures. Anti-viral agents are available as a treatment but are usually applied and/or taken after symptoms develop (when they are least useful) and do not lend themselves for use as a prophylactic due to side effects and cost. Their use is therefore usually restricted to humans.
  • Current antibody detection-based diagnostic methods only detect antibody well after clinical signs appear and after the patient is infective to other animals. Other methods of detection involve polymerase chain reaction amplification of viral transcripts or viral DNA, virus isolation in tissue culture and/or virus neutralization assays.
  • All herpes virus infections are permanent. After a primary infection the virus enters a period of latency. Disease can be reactivated when the patient is immunocompromised or stressed or in advanced athletic training programs. Reactivation of the virus can result in recurrence of symptoms, or general malaise, or decreased exercise tolerance or performance, or it may be asymptomatic.
  • Herpes viruses cause several clinical manifestations in both normal and immunocompromised hosts. Most episodes of herpes virus infections are asymptomatic and most instances in which herpes is transmitted are from people who are unaware, or remain undiagnosed at the time of an outbreak.
  • HSV-I human simplex virus type 1
  • HSV-2 human simplex virus type 2
  • Prevalence is greater in lower socio-economic groups and in sexually promiscuous individuals.
  • HSV-I is usually associated with primary infections of the orofacial area and latent infection of the trigeminal ganglion
  • HSV-2 is usually associated with genital infections and latent infection in sacral ganglia.
  • primary and recurrent infections are usually self-limited, HSV can cause serious diseases such as neonatal disseminated herpes, viral encephalitis, and blinding keratitis.
  • HSV During acute primary infection, HSV becomes permanently latent in the nerve root ganglia that correspond to the cutaneous or mucous membrane site of inoculation. In orolabial infection, HSV develops latency in the trigeminal ganglia, whereas latency develops in sacral ganglia after genital or anorectal infection.
  • stimuli such as ultraviolet light and trauma to the sensory nerve, may reactivate latent HSV. Recurrent lesions occur at or close to the primary site of infection.
  • Recurrence seems to be related to factors which in some way decrease an individual's disease resistance, such as colds or upper respiratory infections, high levels of physical exercise, sun exposure, stress, menses in women, and in some individuals, trigger foods, particularly large quantities of chocolate or peanuts.
  • HSV replication occurs within the ganglia, and progeny virions travel peripherally along sensory nerves to the mucosal or epithelial surface innervated by the reactivated ganglion. Active virus replication at the cutaneous surface then produces the clinical signs and lesions typical of recurrent HSV infection (just as is the case with recurrent cold sores in humans infected with HSV).
  • EBV Epstein-Barr virus
  • HHV-4 HHV-4 is associated with infectious mononucleosis, also known as "glandular fever,” as well with oncogenesis (e.g., in Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeocarcinoma).
  • oncogenesis e.g., in Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeocarcinoma.
  • EBV is found in immune-suppressed patients and in patients suffering from Hodgkin's disease. EBV occurs worldwide, and most people become infected with EBV sometime during their lives. In the United States, as many as 95% of adults have been infected by the time they are 35-40 years of age. Infants become susceptible to EBV as soon as maternal antibody protection (present at birth) disappears.
  • EBV symptoms for infectious mononucleosis include fever, sore throat, and swollen lymph glands. Sometimes, a swollen spleen or liver involvement may develop. Heart problems or involvement of the central nervous system occurs only rarely, and infectious mononucleosis is almost never fatal. Most individuals exposed to people with infectious mononucleosis have previously been infected with EBV and are not at risk for infectious mononucleosis. In addition, transmission of EBV requires intimate contact with the saliva (found in the mouth) of an infected person. Transmission of this virus through the air or blood does not normally occur. The incubation period, or the time from infection to appearance of symptoms, ranges from 4 to 6 weeks.
  • Epstein-Barr virus Although the symptoms of infectious mononucleosis usually resolve in 1 or 2 months, Epstein-Barr virus remains dormant or latent in a few cells in the throat and blood for the rest of the person's life. Periodically, the virus can reactivate and is commonly found in the saliva of infected persons. This reactivation usually occurs without overt symptoms of illness but there may be non-specific symptoms such as malaise or poor athletic performance. EBV also establishes a lifelong dormant infection in some cells of the body's immune system. A late event in a very few carriers of this virus is the emergence of Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeal carcinoma, two rare cancers that are not normally found in the United States. EBV appears to play an important role in these malignancies, but is probably not the sole cause of disease.
  • Cytomegalovirus (CMV) or HHV-5 is found universally throughout all geographic locations and socio-economic groups, and infects between 50% and 85% of adults in the United States by 40 years of age. CMV causes infections in the lungs of immune-suppressed persons. In addition, both CMV and EBV are believed to be associated with chronic-fatigue syndrome, a malady that may afflict as many as in six out of every 100,000 people. Infectious CMV may be shed in the bodily fluids of any previously infected person, and thus may be found in urine, saliva, blood, tears, semen, and breast milk. The shedding of virus may take place intermittently, without any detectable signs, and without causing symptoms. Transmission of CMV occurs from person to person.
  • CMV can be sexually transmitted and can also be transmitted via breast milk, transplanted organs, and rarely from blood transfusions.
  • the virus is not highly contagious, it has been shown to spread in households and among young children. Transmission of the virus is often preventable because it is most often transmitted through infected bodily fluids that come in contact with hands and then are absorbed through the nose or mouth of a susceptible person. Hence, care should be taken when handling children and items like diapers. Simple hand washing with soap and water is effective in removing the virus from the hands.
  • CMV which may have fewer symptoms than EBV, is always followed by a prolonged, unapparent infection during which the virus resides in cells without causing detectable damage or clinical illness. Severe impairment of the body's immune system by medication or disease consistently reactivates the virus from the latent or dormant state. CMV infection without symptoms is common in infants and young children; therefore, it is unjustified and unnecessary to exclude from school or an institution a child known to be infected. Similarly, hospitalized patients do not need separate or elaborate isolation precautions. Screening children and patients for CMV is of questionable value. The cost and management of such procedures are impractical. Children known to have CMV infection should not be singled out for exclusion, isolation, or special handling.
  • VZV Varicella-Zoster virus
  • HHV-3 causes chickenpox, typically in children, and is acquired by inhaling virus-containing particles, trapped in tiny droplets released into the air from the nose or throat of an infected person. The virus enters the body by infecting cells in the respiratory tract. From here, it spreads to many other parts of the body, including the skin, where it causes the characteristic rash. Each lesion (spot) progresses through a series of characteristic stages over about a week.
  • Papules and vesicles develop into pustules, which then crust over prior to healing.
  • a prominent feature of chickenpox is the development of several crops of spots, such that at the peak of the illness, 3-4 days after first appearance of the rash, there are lesions at all stages of development, from new vesicles through to crusts.
  • VZV very contagious. Virus excretion from the airways begins in the latter part of the incubation period and continues until all the spots have crusted over. Although the skin vesicles contain virus particles, they are not a major source of contagion. Scabs are not infectious. Time-honored interventions designed to minimize fever and discomfort (i.e., antipyretic medicines, cool baths . and soothing lotions) are the mainstay of management.
  • Chickenpox is a clinical manifestation of primary infection with VZV. After recovery from primary infection, VZV is not eliminated from the body but rather, the virus lies dormant (latent), often for decades, in the roots of sensory nerves, in the spinal cord. When the infection is reactivated, it causes pain and a rash in the area supplied by the affected sensory nerves. Latent infection may result is an episode of shingles. This usually happens in o ⁇ der people, perhaps because, with advancing age, the immune system fails to keep the virus in check. The rash of shingles contains VZV particles, just like the rash of chickenpox. Shingles, therefore, carries a small risk of transmitting chickenpox to someone who has not had chickenpox before.
  • Roseolovirus or HHV-6 is associated with "roseola” and “infantum” infections in children and with immunocompromised patients.
  • AIDS patients exhibit HHV-6 infection, although the significance of the HHV-6 infection is unclear.
  • HHV-6 is susceptible to antiviral drugs. It is unclear, however, how antiviral drugs work against HHV-6 or how resistance to such drugs develops.
  • a significant aspect of HHV-6 infection is its putative tie-in with multiple sclerosis and chronic fatigue syndrome, respectively.
  • HHV-7 and HHV-8 rhadinovirus
  • Herpes viruses are regarded as an important cause of wastage in the horse industry and a cause of serious compromise to athletic ability. Veterinarians, trainers and owners tend to manage horses with respiratory disease on experience alone because of the lack of clinical guides and laboratory procedures, and because there is little understanding of the relationship between viral and secondary bacterial infection and duration of disease.
  • Alternative diagnosis or assessment procedures are often complex, invasive, inconvenient, expensive, time consuming, may expose an animal to risk of injury from the procedure, and often require transport of the animal to a diagnostic center.
  • herpes viruses could be isolated from the blood of 48% of horses with respiratory problems or poor performance. However, herpes viruses could also be isolated from blood of 54% of horses without clinical signs, leading to the conclusion that the presence of the virus in blood cells is not a determinant of disease. Virus isolation from nasal swabs is more indicative of respiratory infection but can only be isolated in 50% of clinical cases. It has been reported that up to 75% of horses in England carry the virus.
  • Equine rhinopneumonitis and equine abortion are commonly recognized diseases of horses caused by two distinct but antigenically-related viruses that are designated equine herpes virus type 4 (EHV-4) and equine herpes virus type 1 (EHV-I).
  • EHV-I is a cause of epidemic abortion, perinatal mortality, respiratory disease and, occasionally, neurological signs in horses. Abortion is the most dramatic and frightening outcome of EHV-I infection and can be financially disastrous for breeders, with loss of clients and large insurance pay-outs. Respiratory illness caused by EHV-I, or the closely related EHV-4, can adversely affect racing performance.
  • EHV-I is a DNA alphaherpes virus with a predilection for epithelial cells of the respiratory tract.
  • the virus can be spread around the body to other organs by cells of the immune system. Because the viruses are related antigenically it has not been possible to date by serological examination (blood test), to determine whether a horse has been infected with either or both EHV-4 or EHV-I . For example, if a horse had been infected with EHV-4 as a foal it would develop antibodies in its serum that would react not only to EHV-4 but EHV-I as well, so one would not know that such a foal had been infected with only EHV-4.
  • EHV-4 has only been demonstrated to cause respiratory illness, whereas EHV-I also causes neurological and reproductive disorders (Wilcox and Raidal, 2000, "Role of viruses in respiratory disease” RIRDC Publication No 00/146, RIRDC Project No UMU-22A; Dunowska et al, 2002, New Zealand Veterinary Journal 50(4): 132-139; Dunowska et al, 2002, New Zealand Veterinary Journal 50(4):140-147).
  • EHV-I has been shown to have a persistent, lifelong latent, infection where reactivation causes further spells of respiratory disease in the horse.
  • index case a far more serious consequence for other horses infected by contact with the first horse (index case) occurs on breeding farms when a pregnant mare in a paddock reactivates the virus and transmits it to other in-contact pregnant mares.
  • the index case mare may herself abort or cause abortion in one or more in contact mares.
  • An aborted fetus and the fetal membranes and fluids are heavily infected with EHV-I and contaminate the site where abortion occurs.
  • Other mares in the paddock being naturally curious, come to the site of abortion and sniff the fetus and membranes.
  • Herpes viruses induce a strong humoral antibody response, although the effectiveness of this response in protecting the host is questionable. Protection ultimately is afforded through cell-mediated mechanisms, such as cytotoxic lymphocytes and natural killer cells.
  • cell-mediated mechanisms such as cytotoxic lymphocytes and natural killer cells.
  • One of the key features of herpes virus infection is life-long persistent infection and latency. The virus remains in the cell nucleus and can be isolated from many organs long after clinical signs have abated. Thus, where a patient presents with non-descript clinical signs, such as poor performance or malaise, virus can be isolated from tissues but it is not clear that activation of the virus is the cause of the symptoms. Stress or other factors can lead to activation of the dormant virus and concomitant clinical signs (Walker et al, 1999, Veterinary Microbiology 68:3-13).
  • HSV-I or HSV-2 induces cell-mediated immunity and the production of type-common and type-specific antibodies. Although these immune mechanisms apparently do not affect the development of HSV latency or the frequency of recurrences, they may modulate the severity of clinical recurrences and reduce HSV replication once reactivation occurs.
  • HSV-I or HSV-2 infection appears to provide partial protection against subsequent infection with HSV, as resistance to autologous infection is usually observed in HSV-infected individuals. Additionally, persons with HSV infection usually have a more mild clinical illness when infected with the alternate HSV type as compared with persons with no prior HSV infection.
  • HSV is the most frequently detected virus in diagnostic laboratories. Diagnosis can be made by virus isolation, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (Espy et al, 2000, J Clin Microbiol. 38(2):795-799) and histopathology. None of these methods are useful in the control and monitoring of the disease.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • Blood tests can be used when a person has no visible symptoms but has concerns about having herpes. Blood tests do not actually detect the virus; instead, they look for antibodies (the body's immune response) but 50 to 90% of humans have positive antibodies in the blood. There are currently two blood tests available that can give accurate results for herpes. Like any blood test, these tests cannot determine whether the site of infection is oral or genital. However, since most cases of genital herpes are caused by HSV-2, a positive result for type-2 antibodies most likely indicates genital herpes. For the most accurate result; it is recommended to wait at least 12 - 16 weeks from the last possible exposure to herpes to allow enough time for antibodies to develop.
  • Clinical diagnosis of CMV is by the enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (or ELISA), a serologic test for measuring antibodies. The result can be used to determine if acute infection, prior infection, or passively acquired maternal antibody in an infant is present. Other tests include various fluorescence assays, indirect hemagglutination, and latex agglutination.
  • EHV Diagnosis of EHV is based on respiratory symptoms i.e. cough or nasal discharge. However, it is important to distinguish between respiratory bacterial or viral infections; exercise induced pulmonary hemorrhage and allergy. Cost of misdiagnosis is large. Costs to owners to diagnose the condition include transport, veterinary advice and pathology tests. Respiratory disease can kill quickly, create life-long disability, impede performance or require long periods of rest. Horses in an active carrier state can re-infect other animals.
  • EHV-I infections are difficult to diagnose and treat, and any useful information on how to manage horses with the disease would be welcomed by the industry.
  • EHV-I or EHV-4 antibodies in polyclonal serum cannot be differentiated because of the extensive antigenic cross-reactivity between the two viruses.
  • the availability of such a specific serological test would also have profound implications in the control, perhaps eradication, of EHV-I and in the selection of candidate horses for vaccination.
  • Oral anti-viral medications such as acyclovir, famcyclovir, or valacyclovir have been developed to effectively treat herpes infections. These medications can be used to treat an outbreak or can be used for suppressing herpes recurrences. Lower doses may be helpful in reducing the number of herpes attacks in people with frequent outbreaks.
  • Gancyclovir, penciclovir and acyclovir are effective inhibitors of herpes simplex virus types 1 (HSV-I) and 2 (HSV-2). This antiviral therapy is expensive and needs to be given upon onset of the earliest clinical signs.
  • These antiviral therapies are based on the use of suicide genes, such as the thymidine kinase gene.
  • HSVTK herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase
  • Chickenpox is not usually treated with a specific antiviral compound owing to its short duration and generally mild, uncomplicated nature. Some doctors believe that antiviral medication may be appropriate for older patients, in whom the disease tends to be more severe.
  • a vaccine for chicken pox (varicella vaccine) has been available since 1995. Studies show that the varicella vaccine is 85% effective in preventing disease. The vaccine may be beneficial to non-immune adults, in particular those at high risk, for example child care and health workers. Because most adults are immune, checking serological status before vaccination is recommended.
  • EHV-I infection Early identification of EHV-I infection, especially viral abortion, is important in managing horses so that cyclic re-infection of susceptible horses and relapse do not occur.
  • the cost of EHV infection to the horse industry is large through lost training days, re ⁇ infection and recurrent illness, abortions and poor performance.
  • Treatment largely depends on accurate diagnosis.
  • Vaccines are available that elicit strong humoral immune responses, but these are not fully protective. Breakthrough infections commonly occur in vaccinated animals. Despite the availability of vaccines it is generally known that they afford little protection, and breakthrough infections commonly occur in vaccinated animals. Antibiotic treatment only prevents secondary bacterial infection.
  • U.S. Patent 6,506,553 describes an assay for diagnosis of EBV and associated diseases by detecting antigen antibodies in a blood sample.
  • the assay detects IgG and IgM antibodies to the diffuse (EA-D) and restricted (EA-R) components of the early antigen of EBV in blood, and more specifically in serum.
  • This assay can be used for diagnosis of EBV-associated disease; such as infectious mononucleosis (IM) for example, and can also be utilized to distinguish between individuals in the acute versus the convalescent phase of disease.
  • IM infectious mononucleosis
  • this patent describes a method for the detection of early antigen antibodies, not virus or immune reaction to the virus.
  • U.S. Patent 6,537,555 describes a composition and method for the diagnosis and treatment of HSV infection based on the detection of HSV antigens. This patent, however, does not describe a method for the detection of virus or immune reaction to the virus.
  • International Publication WO 99/45155 describes a method for gene expression and molecular diagnostic approaches for the amplification and detection of EBV nucleic acid, in particular RNA-specific sequences.
  • This method is specifically suited for the detection of late stage infection of EBV gene expression in circulating peripheral blood cells, in human (tumour) tissue samples and thin sections thereof using "in solution” amplification or “in situ” amplification techniques and in other biological samples potentially containing EBV- infected cells.
  • this method only detects viral transcripts and is most suitable for late stage disease diagnosis. It also does not detect the immune reaction to viral infection, which causes the earliest symptoms of malaise, fever and swollen lymph nodes.
  • U.S. Patent Application Publication 20040072147 discloses the use of a probe oligonucleotide and at least two primer oligonucleotides for selectively directing the amplification of the target segment of a particular herpes virus type or strain including: HSV-I, drug resistant HSV-I, HSV-2, drug resistant HSV-2, VZV, EBV (HHV-4a and HHV-4b), CMV, lymphocryptovirus (HHV-6a, HHV-6b), HHV-7, and rhadinovirus (HHV-8).
  • HSV-I drug resistant HSV-I
  • HSV-2 drug resistant HSV-2
  • VZV EBV
  • EBV HHV-4a and HHV-4b
  • CMV lymphocryptovirus
  • HHV-6a, HHV-6b HHV-7
  • rhadinovirus HHV-8
  • U.S. Patent 6,193,983 describes a method for detecting EHV-4 and EHV-I type-specific glycoproteins for clinical applications associated with the characterization of such glycoproteins. This method detects specific antibodies to EHV-I and EHV-4 but it is well known that most horses are exposed to these viruses at an early age and antibody titres persist for some time. Thus, this method provides no insight into the stage of disease or when the animal was infected, or whether the disease is active.
  • herpes virus infection with various strains of herpes virus is a widespread phenomenon in the community and causes disease of serious economic importance. Most humans and domestic animals become infected with at least one strain of herpes virus at an early age and the infection is life-long. Herpes viruses enter a stage of latency and can be reactivated causing a recurrence of symptoms. Often reactivation of the virus can be asymptomatic, but can manifest as malaise or as non-specific symptoms such as low grade fever, lethargy, chronic fatigue, poor exercise tolerance, or poor athletic performance.
  • Physiological stress such as heavy exercise, concurrent disease, mental stress
  • HTV infection immunosuppressive therapy
  • HTV infection immunosuppressive therapy
  • Physiological stress can lead to reactivation of herpes viruses leading to chronic symptoms of infection.
  • Current antibody-based diagnostic methods do not lend themselves to monitoring herpes virus infections because they measure serum antibodies that become elevated 7-14 days following infection and remain elevated due to viral latency.
  • Other current diagnostic methods such as virus isolation and PCR, do not lend themselves to monitoring as they are laborious or the viral genome is not consistently present in blood cells. Results derived from current diagnostic methods do not correlate with the timing of onset of clinical signs.
  • antibodies can first be detected 10-14 days following initial infection and persist for long periods. A single antibody measurement does not indicate when infection occurred or the level of disease activity and measuring viral transcripts or viral proteins also does not indicate the level of disease activity.
  • the immune system of the host is ultimately responsible for protection from viral invasion. It is the immune response, rather than the virus itself, that is responsible for clinical signs of disease.
  • a more appropriate monitoring tool for herpes virus infection would be one that measured specific host immune reactions to infection.
  • the present invention discloses methods and systems for detecting herpes virus infections, especially active herpes virus infections.
  • a predictive set of genes in cells of the immune system for herpes virus infection has been identified and is described. These genes and their gene products can be used in gene expression assays, protein expression assays, whole cell assays, and in the design and manufacture of therapies. They can also be used to determine infection in animals with or without clinical signs of disease. It is proposed that such assays, when used frequently as an indicator of response to viral activity, will lead to better management decisions and treatment regimes including use with elite athletes or immunocompromised patients.
  • the present invention represents a significant advance over current technologies for the management of affected animals.
  • it relies upon measuring the level of certain markers in cells, especially circulating leukocytes, of the host rather than detecting viral products or anti-viral antibodies.
  • these methods are suitable for widespread screening of symptomatic and asymptomatic animals.
  • the detection of a host response to herpes virus infection, especially infection with EHV is feasible at very early stages of its progression, before herpes virus-specific antibodies can be detected in serum.
  • the present invention addresses the problem of diagnosing herpes virus infection by detecting a host response to herpes virus that may be measured in host cells.
  • Advantageous embodiments involve monitoring the expression of certain genes in peripheral leukocytes of the immune system, which may be reflected in changing patterns of RNA levels or protein production that correlate with the presence of herpes virus infection.
  • the present invention provides methods for diagnosing the presence of a herpes virus infection, particularly an active herpes virus infection, in a test subject, especially in an equine test subject. These methods generally comprise detecting in the test subject aberrant expression of at least one gene (also referred to herein as an "herpes virus infection marker gene” or an "HVI marker gene”) selected from the group consisting of: (a) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75,
  • these HVI marker genes are aberrantly expressed in animals with a herpes virus infection or a condition related to herpes virus infection, illustrative examples of which include immune suppression, stress, intense athletic training, concurrent infections and idiopathic conditions.
  • polynucleotide expression products of HVI marker genes are referred to herein as “herpes virus infection marker polynucleotides” or “HVI marker polynucleotides.”
  • Polypeptide expression products of HVI marker genes are referred to herein as "herpes virus infection marker” or "HVI marker polypeptides.”
  • the methods comprise detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 , or a complement
  • the methods comprise detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker polypeptide selected from the group consisting of: (i) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (ii) a polypeptide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74
  • such aberrant expression is detected by: (1) measuring in a biological sample obtained from the test subject the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least one HVI marker gene and (2) comparing the measured level or functional activity of each expression product to the level or functional activity of a corresponding expression product in a reference sample obtained from one or more normal subjects or from one or more subjects lacking disease (e.g., subjects lacking active infection), wherein a difference in the level or functional activity of the expression product in the biological sample as compared to the level or functional activity of the corresponding expression product in the reference sample is indicative of the presence of an herpes virus infection or related condition in the test subject.
  • the methods further comprise diagnosing the presence, stage or degree of an herpes virus infection or related condition in the test subject when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is different than the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product.
  • the difference typically represents an at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%, or even an at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000% increase, or an at least about 10%, 20%, 30% 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even an at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999% decrease in the level or functional activity of an individual expression product as compared to the level or functional activity of an individual corresponding expression product., which is hereafter referred to as "aberrant expression.”
  • the presence of an herpes virus infection or related condition is determined by detecting an increase in the level or functional activity of at least one HVI marker polynucleotide selected from (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 13, 15, 17, 21, 23, 26, 27, 31, 39, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 55, 59, 67, 69, 71, 75, 76, 79, 81, 85, 87, 91, 98, 99109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 14, 16, 18, 22, 28, 32, 40, 44, 46,
  • the method further comprises diagnosing the absence of an herpes virus infection or related condition when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is the same as or similar to the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product.
  • the measured level or functional activity of an individual expression product varies from the measured level or functional activity of an individual corresponding expression product by no more than about 20%, 18%, 16%, 14%, 12%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1% or 0.1%, which is hereafter referred to as "normal expression.”
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77 or 78 HVI marker polynucleotides.
  • the methods may comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an HVI marker polynucleotide either alone or in combination with as much as 77, 76, 75, 74, 73, 72, 71, 70, 69, 68, 67, 66, 65, 64, 63, 62, 61, 60, 59, 58, 57, 56, 55, 54, 53, 52, 51, 50, 49, 48, 47, 46, 45, 44, 43, 42, 41, 40, 39, 38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 other HVI marker polynucleotide(s).
  • the methods may comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an HVI marker polypeptide either alone or in combination with as much as 77, 76, 75, 74, 73, 72, 71, 70, 69, 68, 67, 66, 65, 64, 63, 62, 61, 60, 59, 58, 57, 56, 55, 54, 53, 52, 51, 50, 49, 48, 47, 46, 45, 44, 43, 42, 41, 40, 39, 38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, 29, 28,
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 or 17 HVI marker genes that have a very high correlation (p ⁇ 0.00001)with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level one correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25 or 26, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 20 or 21 HVI marker genes that have a high correlation
  • level two correlation HVI marker genes representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61 or 63, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62 or 64; (c) a polynucleotide comprising
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15 HVI marker genes that have a medium correlation (p ⁇ 0.0003) with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level three correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85 or 87, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 or 17 herpes virus infection marker genes that have a moderate correlation (p ⁇ 0.06) with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level four correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a poly
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level three correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker gene.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level three correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level four correlation HVI marker genes. [0071] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level five correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level five correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level five correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level five correlation BTVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level five correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level five correlation HVI marker genes. [0072] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 6 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
  • the biological sample comprises blood, especially peripheral blood, which suitably includes leukocytes.
  • the expression product is selected from a RNA molecule or a polypeptide.
  • the expression product is the same as the corresponding expression product.
  • the expression product is a variant (e.g., an allelic variant) of the corresponding expression product.
  • the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target RNA (e.g., mRNA) or a DNA copy of the target RNA whose level is measured using at least one nucleic acid probe that hybridizts under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions to the target RNA or to the DNA copy, wherein the nucleic acid probe comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of an HVI marker polynucleotide.
  • the measured level or abundance of the target RNA or its DNA copy is normalized to the level or abundance of a reference RNA or a DNA copy of the reference RNA that is present in the same sample.
  • the nucleic acid probe is immobilized on a solid or semi-solid support.
  • the nucleic acid probe forms part of a spatial array of nucleic acid probes.
  • the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by hybridization (e.g., using a nucleic acid array).
  • the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by nucleic acid amplification (e.g., using a polymerase chain reaction (PCR)).
  • the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by nuclease protection assay.
  • the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target polypeptide whose level is measured using at least one antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with the target polypeptide.
  • the measured level of the target polypeptide is normalized to the level of a reference polypeptide that is present in the same sample.
  • the antigen-binding molecule is immobilized on a solid or semi-solid support.
  • the antigen-binding molecule forms part of a spatial array of antigen-binding molecule.
  • the level of antigen-binding molecule that is bound to the target polypeptide is measured by immunoassay (e.g., using an ELISA).
  • the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target polypeptide whose level is measured using at least one substrate for the target polypeptide with which it reacts to produce a reaction product.
  • the measured functional activity of the target polypeptide is normalized to the functional activity of a reference polypeptide that is present in the same sample.
  • a system is used to perform the diagnostic methods as broadly described above, which suitably comprises at least one end station coupled to a base station.
  • the base station is suitably caused (a) to receive subject data from the end station via a communications network, wherein the subject data represents parameter values corresponding to the measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one expression product in the biological sample, and (b) to compare the subject data with predetermined data representing the measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one corresponding expression product in the reference sample to thereby determine any difference in the level or functional activity of the expression product in the biological sample as compared to the level or functional activity of the corresponding expression product in the reference sample.
  • the base station is further caused to provide a diagnosis for the presence, absence or degree of Herpes virus infection-related conditions.
  • the base station may be further caused to transfer an indication of the diagnosis to the end station via the communications network.
  • the invention contemplates use of the methods broadly described above in the monitoring, treatment and management of animals with conditions that can lead to Herpes virus infection, illustrative examples of which include immunosuppression, new-boras, stress or intensive athletic training regimens.
  • the diagnostic methods of the invention are typically used at a frequency that is effective to monitor the early development of an herpes virus infection or related condition to thereby enable early therapeutic intervention and treatment of that condition.
  • the present invention provides methods for treating, preventing or inhibiting the development of an herpes virus infection or related condition in a subject. These methods generally comprise detecting aberrant expression of at least one HVI marker gene in the subject, and administering to the subject an effective amount of an agent that treats or ameliorates the symptoms or reverses or inhibits the development of the infection or related condition in the subject.
  • treatments or agents include but are not limited to, antibiotics, steroids and anti-inflammatory drugs, intravenous fluids, vasoactives, palliative support for damaged or distressed organs (e.g. oxygen for respiratory distress, fluids for hypovolemia) and close monitoring of vital organs.
  • the present invention provides isolated polynucleotides, referred to herein as "HVI marker polynucleotides,” which are generally selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof, wherein the
  • the present invention provides a nucleic acid construct comprising a polynucleotide as broadly described above in operable connection with a regulatory element, which is operable in a host cell.
  • the construct is in the form of a vector, especially an expression vector.
  • the present invention provides isolated host cells containing a nucleic acid construct or vector as broadly described above.
  • the host cells are selected from bacterial cells, yeast cells and insect cells.
  • the present invention provides probes for interrogating nucleic acid for the presence of a polynucleotide as broadly described above.
  • These probes generally comprise a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under at least low stringency conditions to a polynucleotide as broadly described above.
  • the probes consist essentially of a nucleic acid sequence which corresponds or is complementary to at least a portion of a nucleotide sequence encoding the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length.
  • the probes comprise a nucleotide sequence which is capable of hybridizing to at least a portion of a nucleotide sequence encoding the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 under at least low, medium or high stringency conditions, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length.
  • the probes comprise a nucleotide sequence that is capable of hybridizing to at least a portion of any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 under at least low, medium or high stringency conditions, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length.
  • Representative probes for detecting the HVI marker polynucleotides according to the resent invention are set forth in SEQ ID NO: 145 - 2150 (
  • the invention provides a solid or semi-solid support comprising at least one nucleic acid probe as broadly described above immobilized thereon.
  • the solid or semi-solid support comprises a spatial array of nucleic acid probes immobilized thereon.
  • HVI marker polypeptides which are generally selected from: (i) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with a polypeptide expression product of an HVI marker gene as broadly described above, for example, especially an HVI marker gene that comprises a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83,
  • Still a further aspect of the present invention provides an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polypeptide as broadly described above.
  • the invention provides a solid or semi-solid support comprising at least one antigen-binding molecule as broadly described above immobilized thereon.
  • the solid or semi-solid support comprises a spatial array of antigen-binding molecules immobilized thereon.
  • Still another aspect of the invention provides the use of one or more HVI marker polynucleotides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more probes as broadly described above, or the use of one or more HVI marker polypeptides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more antigen-binding molecules as broadly described above, in the manufacture of a kit for diagnosing the presence of an Herpes virus infection-related condition in a subject.
  • the aspects of the invention are directed to the use of the diagnostic methods as broadly described above, or one or more HVI marker polynucleotides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more probes as broadly described above, or the use of one or more HVI marker polypeptides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more antigen-binding molecules as broadly described above, for diagnosing an Herpes virus infection-related condition animals (vertebrates), mammals, non-human mammals, animals, such as horses involved in load bearing or athletic activities (e.g., races) and pets (e.g., dogs and cats).
  • Herpes virus infection-related condition animals vertebrates
  • mammals non-human mammals
  • animals such as horses involved in load bearing or athletic activities (e.g., races) and pets (e.g., dogs and cats).
  • the aspects of the invention are directed to animals (vertebrates), mammals, non-human mammals, animals, such as horses involved in load bearing or athletic activities (e.g., races) and pets (e.g., dogs and cats).
  • Figure 1 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve for inoculated animals in Group 1, comparing gene expression at Days 2, 4 and 6 with the other days. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent with an area under the curve in excess of 0.9.
  • Figure 2 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using the selected genes for clinically affected animals. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent.
  • Figure 3 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using the selected genes for animals deemed to have active viral infection. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent.
  • Figure 4 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using all of the genes for clinically affected animals. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is good.
  • Figure 5 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using the selected genes for animals deemed to have active viral infection. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is good.
  • Figure 7 is a graphical representation of a principal components analysis for Group 1 foals. Components are plotted by days after inoculation.
  • HYI marker gene refers to the overexpression or underexpression of an HVI marker gene relative to the level of expression of the HVI marker gene or variant thereof in cells obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject that is not infected with the herpes virus, and/or to a higher or lower level of an HVI marker gene product (e.g., transcript or polypeptide) in a tissue sample or body fluid obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject without the herpes virus.
  • an HVI marker gene product e.g., transcript or polypeptide
  • an HVI marker gene is aberrantly expressed if its level of expression is higher by at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%, or even an at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000%, or lower by at least about 10%, 20%, 30% 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even an at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999% than its level of expression in a cell, tissue or body fluid sample obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject without the herpes virus.
  • HVI marker polynucleotide refers to the over-expression or under-expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide relative to the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide or variant thereof in cells obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection related disease (e.g., lacking active herpes virus infection), and/or to a higher or lower level of an HVI marker polynucleotide product (e.g., transcript or polypeptide) in a tissue sample or body fluid obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection disease.
  • herpes virus infection related disease e.g., lacking active herpes virus infection
  • an HVI marker polynucleotide product e.g., transcript or polypeptide
  • an HVI marker polynucleotide is aberrantly expressed if the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide is higher by at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%, or even an at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000%, or lower by at least about 10%, 20%, 30% 40%, 01222
  • the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide by cells obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection disease, and/or relative to the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide in a tissue sample or body fluid obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection disease.
  • aberrant gene expression in cells of the immune system is deduced from two consecutive steps: (1) discovery of aberrantly expressed genes for diagnosis, prognosis and condition assessment; and (2) clinical validation of aberrantly expressed genes.
  • Aberrant gene expression in discovery is defined by those genes that are significantly up or down regulated (p ⁇ 0.06) when comparing groups of cell or tissue samples (e.g., cells of the immune system such as but not limited to white blood cells) following (a) normalization to invariant genes, whose expression remains constant under normal and diseased conditions, and (b) the use of a statistical method that protects against false positives (e.g., Holm and FDR adjustment) to account for false positive discovery inherent in multivariate data such as microarray data.
  • groups of cell or tissue samples e.g., cells of the immune system such as but not limited to white blood cells
  • a statistical method that protects against false positives e.g., Holm and FDR adjustment
  • the cell or tissue samples are typically obtained from a group representing true negative cell or tissue samples for the condition of interest and from a group representing true positive cell or tissue samples for that condition.
  • all other parameters or variables in the groups need to be controlled, such as age, geographical location, sex, athletic fitness and other normal biological variation, suitably by use of the same animal and induction of the condition of interest in that animal.
  • the cell or tissue samples are typically obtained from a group representing true negative cell or tissue samples for the condition of interest and from the same group that subsequently (over time) represents true positive cell or tissue samples for that condition.
  • all other parameters or variables in the groups need to be controlled, such as age, geographical location, sex, athletic fitness and other normal biological variation, typically by use of the same animals, induction of the condition of interest in those animals and samples taken from the same animal over time.
  • the cell or tissue samples are generally obtained from a group representing one end of a spectrum of measurable clinical parameters relating to the condition of interest and from groups representing various points along that spectrum of measurable clinical parameters.
  • all other parameters or variables in the groups generally need to be controlled, such as age, geographical location, sex, athletic fitness and other normal biological variation, suitably by use of the same animal and induction of the condition of interest in that animal.
  • ROC receiver operator curves
  • Those skilled in the art of gene expression data analyzes will recognize that other methods of normalization (for example MAS 5, Robust multi chip averaging, GC Robust multi chip averaging or the Li Wong algorithm) may be substituted for invariant gene normalization without materially affecting the nature of the invention.
  • those skilled in the art of gene expression data analysis will recognize that many methods may be used to determine which genes are "significantly up or down regulated”.
  • active infection refers to an infectious state in which a host's immune system is activated against an infectious agent.
  • amplicon refers to a target sequence for amplification, and/or the amplification products of a target sequence for amplification.
  • an "amplicon” may include the sequence of probes or primers used in amplification.
  • antigen-binding molecule a molecule that has binding affinity for a target antigen. It will be understood that this term extends to immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin fragments and non-immunoglobulin derived protein frameworks that exhibit antigen-binding activity.
  • binding specifically As used herein, the term “binds specifically,” “specifically immuno- interactive” and the like when referring to an antigen-binding molecule refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of an antigen in the presence of a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologies.
  • the specified antigen-binding molecules bind to a particular antigen and do not bind in a significant amount to other proteins or antigens present in the sample.
  • Specific binding to an antigen under such conditions may require an antigen-binding molecule that is selected for its specificity for a particular antigen.
  • antigen-binding molecules can be raised to a selected protein antigen, which bind to that antigen but not to other proteins present in a sample.
  • a variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antigen-binding molecules specifically immuno- interactive with a particular protein.
  • solid-phase ELISA immunoassays are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immuno-interactive with a protein. See Harlow and Lane (1988) Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Publications, New York, for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity.
  • biologically active portion is meant a portion of a full-length parent peptide or polypeptide which portion retains an activity of the parent molecule.
  • biologically active portion includes deletion mutants and peptides, for example of at least about 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 150, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 contiguous amino acids, which comprise an activity of a parent molecule. Portions of this type may be obtained through the application of standard recombinant nucleic acid techniques or synthesized using conventional liquid or solid phase synthesis techniques.
  • peptides can be produced by digestion of a peptide or polypeptide of the invention with proteinases such as endoLys-C, endoArg-C, endoGlu-C and staphylococcus V8- protease.
  • the digested fragments can be purified by, for example, high performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC) techniques. Recombinant nucleic acid techniques can also be used to produce such portions.
  • biological sample refers to a sample that may be extracted, untreated, treated, diluted or concentrated from an animal.
  • the biological sample may include a biological fluid such as whole blood, serum, plasma, saliva, urine, sweat, ascitic fluid, peritoneal fluid, synovial fluid, amniotic fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, tissue biopsy, and the like.
  • the biological sample is blood, especially peripheral blood.
  • cw-acting sequence As used herein, the term "cw-acting sequence", "ezs-acting element” or “ci$- regulatory region” or “regulatory region” or similar term shall be taken to mean any sequence of nucleotides, which when positioned appropriately relative to an expressible genetic sequence, is capable of regulating, at least in part, the expression of the genetic sequence.
  • a c ⁇ -regulatory region may be capable of activating, silencing, enhancing, repressing or otherwise altering the level of expression and/or cell-type-specif ⁇ city and/or developmental specificity of a gene sequence at the transcriptional or post-transcriptional level.
  • the czs-acting sequence is an activator sequence that enhances or stimulates the expression of an expressible genetic sequence.
  • a polynucleotide (a) having a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical or complementary to all or a portion of a reference polynucleotide sequence or (b) encoding an amino acid sequence identical to an amino acid sequence in a peptide or protein.
  • This phrase also includes within its scope a peptide or polypeptide having an amino acid sequence that is substantially identical to a sequence of amino acids in a reference peptide or protein.
  • an effective amount in the context of treating or preventing a condition, is meant the administration of that amount of active to an individual in need of such treatment or prophylaxis, either in a single dose or as part of a series, that is effective for the prevention of incurring a symptom, holding in check such symptoms, and/or treating existing symptoms, of that condition.
  • the effective amount will vary depending upon the health and physical condition of the individual to be treated, the taxonomic group of individual to be treated, the formulation of the composition, the assessment of the medical situation, and other relevant factors. It is expected that the amount will fall in a relatively broad range that can be determined through routine trials.
  • RNA message or translation of RNA message into proteins or polypeptides. Detection of either types of gene expression in use of any of the methods described herein are part of the invention.
  • expression vector any autonomous genetic element capable of directing the transcription of a polynucleotide contained within the vector and suitably the synthesis of a peptide or polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide.
  • expression vectors are known to practitioners in the art.
  • the term "gene” as used herein refers to any and all discrete coding regions of the cell's genome, as well as associated non-coding and regulatory regions. The gene is also intended to mean the open reading frame encoding specific polypeptides, introns, and adjacent 5' and 3' non-coding nucleotide sequences involved in the regulation of expression.
  • the gene may further comprise control signals such as promoters, enhancers, termination and/or polyadenylation signals that are naturally associated with a given gene, or heterologous control signals.
  • the DNA sequences may be cDNA or genomic DNA or a fragment thereof.
  • the gene may be introduced into an appropriate vector for extrachromosomal maintenance or for integration into the host. [0119]
  • high density polynucleotide arrays and the like is meant those arrays that contain at least 400 different features per cm ⁇ .
  • high discrimination hybridization conditions refers to hybridization conditions in which single base mismatch may be determined.
  • Hybridization is used herein to denote the pairing of complementary nucleotide sequences to produce a DNA-DNA hybrid or a DNA-RNA hybrid.
  • Complementary base sequences are those sequences that are related by the base-pairing rules.
  • match and mismatch refer to the hybridization potential of paired nucleotides in complementary nucleic acid strands. Matched nucleotides hybridize efficiently, such as the classical A-T and G-C base pair mentioned above. Mismatches are other combinations of nucleotides that do not hybridize efficiently.
  • hybridizing specifically to refers to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular) DNA or RNA.
  • immuno-interactive includes reference to any interaction, reaction, or other form of association between molecules and in particular where one of the molecules is, or mimics, a component of the immune system.
  • Immuno function or “immunoreactivity” refers to the ability of the immune system to respond to foreign antigen as measured by standard assays well known in the art.
  • an "isolated” is meant material that is substantially or essentially free from components that normally accompany it in its native state.
  • an "isolated polynucleotide”, as used herein, refers to a polynucleotide, isolated from the sequences which flank it in a naturally-occurring state, e.g., a DNA fragment which has been removed from the sequences that are normally adjacent to the fragment.
  • an "isolated peptide” or an “isolated polypeptide” and the like, as used herein refer to in vitro isolation and/or purification of a peptide or polypeptide molecule from its natural cellular environment, and from association with other components of the cell.
  • an isolated polynucleotide, peptide, or polypeptide can refer to a native sequence that is isolated by purification or to a sequence that is produced by recombinant or synthetic means.
  • marker gene is meant a gene that imparts a distinct phenotype to cells expressing the marker gene and thus allows such transformed cells to be distinguished from cells that do not have the marker.
  • a selectable marker gene confers a trait for which one can 'select' based on resistance to a selective agent (e.g., a herbicide, antibiotic, radiation, heat, or other treatment damaging to untransformed cells).
  • a screenable marker gene confers a trait that one can identify through observation or testing, i.e., by 'screening' (e.g. ⁇ - glucuronidase, luciferase, or other enzyme activity not present in untransformed cells).
  • a "naturally-occurring" nucleic acid molecule refers to a RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature.
  • a naturally-occurring nucleic acid molecule can encode a protein that occurs in nature.
  • a sample such as, for example, a cell extract or nucleic acid or polypeptide extract is isolated from, or derived from, a particular source.
  • the extract may be isolated directly from biological fluid or tissue of the subject.
  • oligonucleotide refers to a polymer composed of a multiplicity of nucleotide residues (deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or related structural variants or synthetic analogues thereof, including nucleotides with modified or substituted sugar groups and the like) linked via phosphodiester bonds (or related structural variants or synthetic analogues thereof).
  • oligonucleotide typically refers to a nucleotide polymer in which the nucleotide residues and linkages between them are naturally-occurring
  • the term also includes within its scope various analogues including, but not restricted to, peptide nucleic acids (PNAs), phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phophoroselenoate, phosphorodiselenoate, phosphoroanilothioate, phosphoraniladate, phosphoroamidate, methyl phosphonates, 2-O-methyl ribonucleic acids, and the like.
  • PNAs peptide nucleic acids
  • phosphorothioate phosphorodithioate
  • phophoroselenoate phosphorodiselenoate
  • phosphoroanilothioate phosphoraniladate
  • phosphoroamidate methyl phosphonates
  • 2-O-methyl ribonucleic acids 2-O-methyl rib
  • Oligonucleotides are a polynucleotide subset with 200 bases or fewer in length. Preferably, oligonucleotides are 10 to 60 bases in length and most preferably 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 to 40 bases in length. Oligonucleotides are usually single stranded, e.g., for probes; although oligonucleotides may be double stranded, e.g., for use in the construction of a variant nucleic acid sequence. Oligonucleotides of the invention can be either sense or antisense oligonucleotides.
  • oligonucleotide array refers to a substrate having oligonucleotide probes with different known sequences deposited at discrete known locations associated with its surface.
  • the substrate can be in the form of a two dimensional substrate as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,424,186. Such substrate may be used to synthesize two- dimensional spatially addressed oligonucleotide (matrix) arrays.
  • the substrate may be characterized in that it forms a tubular array in which a two dimensional planar sheet is rolled into a three-dimensional tubular configuration.
  • the substrate may also be in the form of a microsphere or bead connected to the surface of an optic fiber as, for example, disclosed by Chee et al. in WO 00/39587.
  • Oligonucleotide arrays have at least two different features and a density of at least 400 features per cm 2 .
  • the arrays can have a density of about 500, at least one thousand, at least 10 thousand, at least 100 thousand, at least one million or at least 10 million features per cm 2 .
  • the substrate may be silicon or glass and can have the thickness of a glass microscope slide or a glass cover slip, or may be composed of other synthetic polymers. Substrates that are transparent to light are useful when the method of performing an assay on the substrate involves optical detection.
  • the term also refers to a probe array and the substrate to which it is attached that form part of a wafer.
  • operably connected means placing a structural gene under the regulatory control of a promoter, which then controls the transcription and optionally translation of the gene.
  • a regulatory sequence element with respect to a heterologous gene to be placed under its control is defined by the positioning of the element in its natural setting; i.e., the genes from which it is derived.
  • pathogen is used herein in its broadest sense to refer to an organism or infectious agent whose infection of cells of viable animal tissue elicits a disease response.
  • polynucleotide or "nucleic acid” as used herein designates mRNA, RNA, cRNA, cDNA or DNA.
  • the term typically refers to polymeric form of nucleotides of at least 10 bases in length, either ribonucleotides or deoxynucleotides or a modified form of either type of nucleotide.
  • the term includes single and double stranded forms ofDNA.
  • polynucleotide variant and “variant” refer to polynucleotides displaying substantial sequence identity with a reference polynucleotide sequence or polynucleotides that hybridize with a reference sequence under stringent conditions that are defined hereinafter. These terms also encompass polynucleotides in which one or more nucleotides have been added or deleted, or replaced with different nucleotides. In this regard, it is well understood in the art that certain alterations inclusive of mutations, additions, deletions and substitutions can be made to a reference polynucleotide whereby the altered polynucleotide retains a biological function or activity of the reference polynucleotide.
  • polynucleotide variant and “variant” also include naturally-occurring allelic variants.
  • Polypeptide “peptide” and “protein” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues and to variants and synthetic analogues of the same. Thus, these terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues is a synthetic non-naturally-occurring amino acid, such as a chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally-occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally-occurring amino acid polymers.
  • polypeptide variant refers to polypeptides which are distinguished from a reference polypeptide by the addition, deletion or substitution of at least one amino acid residue.
  • one or more amino acid residues of a reference polypeptide are replaced by different amino acids. It is well understood in the art that some amino acids may be changed to others with broadly similar properties without changing the nature of the activity of the polypeptide (conservative substitutions) as described hereinafter.
  • primer an oligonucleotide which, when paired with a strand of DNA, is capable of initiating the synthesis of a primer extension product in the presence of a suitable polymerizing agent.
  • the primer is preferably single-stranded for maximum efficiency in amplification but can alternatively be double-stranded.
  • a primer must be sufficiently long to prime the synthesis of extension products in the presence of the polymerization agent. The length of the primer depends on many factors, including application, temperature to be employed, template reaction conditions, other reagents, and source of primers.
  • the primer may be at least about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, to one base shorter in length than the template sequence at the 3' end of the primer to allow extension of a nucleic acid chain, though the 5' end of the primer may extend in length beyond the 3' end of the template sequence.
  • primers can be large polynucleotides, such as from about 35 nucleotides to several kilobases or more.
  • Primers can be selected to be “substantially complementary” to the sequence on the template to which it is designed to hybridize and serve as a site for the initiation of synthesis.
  • substantially complementary it is meant that the primer is sufficiently complementary to hybridize with a target polynucleotide.
  • the primer contains no mismatches with the template to which it is designed to hybridize but this is not essential.
  • non- complementary nucleotide residues can be attached to the 5' end of the primer, with the remainder of the primer sequence being complementary to the template.
  • non- complementary nucleotide residues or a stretch of non-complementary nucleotide residues can be interspersed into a primer, provided that the primer sequence has sufficient complementarity with the sequence of the template to hybridize therewith and thereby form a template for synthesis of the extension product of the primer.
  • Probe refers to a molecule that binds to a specific sequence or sub ⁇ sequence or other moiety of another molecule. Unless otherwise indicated, the term “probe” typically refers to a polynucleotide probe that binds to another polynucleotide, often called the "target polynucleotide", through complementary base pairing. Probes can bind target polynucleotides lacking complete sequence complementarity with the probe, depending on the stringency of the hybridization conditions. Probes can be labeled directly or indirectly and include primers within their scope.
  • recombinant polynucleotide refers to a polynucleotide formed in vitro by the manipulation of nucleic acid into a form not normally found in nature.
  • the recombinant polynucleotide may be in the form of an expression vector.
  • expression vectors include transcriptional and translational regulatory nucleic acid operably linked to the nucleotide sequence.
  • recombinant polypeptide is meant a polypeptide made using recombinant techniques, i.e., through the expression of a recombinant or synthetic polynucleotide.
  • regulatory element or “regulatory sequence” is meant nucleic acid sequences (e.g., DNA) necessary for expression of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular host cell.
  • the regulatory sequences that are suitable for prokaryotic cells for example, include a promoter, and optionally a cis-acting sequence such as an operator sequence and a ribosome binding site.
  • Control sequences that are suitable for eukaryotic cells include promoters, polyadenylation signals, transcriptional enhancers, translational enhancers, leader or trailing sequences that modulate mRNA stability, as well as targeting sequences that target a product encoded by a transcribed polynucleotide to an intracellular compartment within a cell or to the extracellular environment.
  • sequence identity refers to the extent that sequences are identical on a nucleotide-by-nucleotide basis or an amino acid-by-amino acid basis over a window of comparison.
  • a "percentage of sequence identity” is calculated by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over the window of comparison, determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base (e.g., A, T, C, G, I) or the identical amino acid residue (e.g., Ala, Pro, Ser, Thr, GIy, VaI, Leu, He, Phe, Tyr, Trp, Lys, Arg, His, Asp, GIu, Asn, GIn, Cys and Met) occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison (i.e., the window size), and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
  • sequence identity will be understood to mean the "match percentage” calculated by the DNASIS computer program (Version 2.5 for windows; available from Hitachi Software engineering Co., Ltd.,
  • Similarity refers to the percentage number of amino acids that are identical or constitute conservative substitutions as defined in Table 3. Similarity may be determined using sequence comparison programs such as GAP (Deveraux et al. 1984, Nucleic Acids
  • sequences of a similar or substantially different length to those cited herein might be compared by insertion of gaps into the alignment, such gaps being determined, for example, by the comparison algorithm used by GAP.
  • sequence identity is at least 12 but frequently 15 to 18 and often at least 25 monomer units, inclusive of nucleotides and amino acid residues, in length. Because two polynucleotides may each comprise (1) a sequence (i.e., only a portion of the complete polynucleotide sequence) that is similar between the two polynucleotides, and (2) a sequence that is divergent between the two polynucleotides, sequence comparisons between two (or more) polynucleotides are typically performed by comparing sequences of the two polynucleotides over a "comparison window" to identify and compare local regions of sequence similarity.
  • a “comparison window” refers to a conceptual segment of at least 6 contiguous positions, usually about 50 to about 100, more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence is compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned.
  • the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) of about 20% or less as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
  • Optimal alignment of sequences for aligning a comparison window may be conducted by computerized implementations of algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0,
  • Suitable vertebrate animals that fall within the scope of the invention include, but are not restricted to, primates, avians, livestock animals (e.g., sheep, cows, horses, donkeys, pigs), laboratory test animals (e.g., rabbits, mice, rats, guinea pigs, hamsters), companion animals (e.g., cats, dogs) and captive wild animals (e.g., foxes, deer, dingoes).
  • a preferred subject is an animal, especially an equine animal, in need of treatment or prophylaxis of a herpes virus infection or its associated symptoms. However, it will be understood that the aforementioned terms do not imply that symptoms are present.
  • substantially similar affinities refers herein to target sequences having similar strengths of detectable hybridization to their complementary or substantially complementary oligonucleotide probes under a chosen set of stringent conditions.
  • template refers to a nucleic acid that is used in the creation of a complementary nucleic acid strand to the "template” strand.
  • the template may be either RNA and/or DNA, and the complementary strand may also be RNA and/or DNA.
  • the complementary strand may comprise all or part of the complementary sequence to the "template,” and/or may include mutations so that it is not an exact, complementary strand to the "template”. Strands that are not exactly complementary to the template strand may hybridize specifically to the template strand in detection assays described here, as well as other assays known in the art, and such complementary strands that can be used in detection assays are part of the invention.
  • transformation means alteration of the genotype of an organism, for example a bacterium, yeast, mammal, avian, reptile, fish or plant, by the introduction of a foreign or endogenous nucleic acid.
  • treat is meant to include both therapeutic and prophylactic treatment.
  • vector is meant a polynucleotide molecule, suitably a DNA molecule derived, for example, from a plasmid, bacteriophage, yeast, virus, mammal, avian, reptile or fish into which a polynucleotide can be inserted or cloned.
  • a vector preferably contains one or more unique restriction sites and can be capable of autonomous replication in a defined host cell including a target cell or tissue or a progenitor cell or tissue thereof, or be integrable with the genome of the defined host such that the cloned sequence is reproducible.
  • the vector can be an autonomously replicating vector, i.e., a vector that exists as an extrachromosomal entity, the replication of which is independent of chromosomal replication, e.g., a linear or closed circular plasmid, an extrachromosomal element, a minichromosome, or an artificial chromosome.
  • the vector can contain any means for assuring self-replication.
  • the vector can be one which, when introduced into the host cell, is integrated into the genome and replicated together with the chromosome(s) into which it has been integrated.
  • a vector system can comprise a single vector or plasmid, two or more vectors or plasmids, which together contain the total DNA to be introduced into the genome of the host cell, or a transposon.
  • the choice of the vector will typically depend on the compatibility of the vector with the host cell into which the vector is to be introduced.
  • the vector can also include a selection marker such as an antibiotic resistance gene that can be used for selection of suitable transformants. Examples of such resistance genes are known to those of skill in the art.
  • wild-type and "normal” are used interchangeably to refer to the phenotype that is characteristic of most of the members of the species occurring naturally and contrast for example with the phenotype of a mutant.
  • the present invention concerns the early detection, diagnosis, monitoring, or prognosis of herpes virus infections, especially EHV infections, or conditions related thereto.
  • Surrogate markers of herpes virus infection in the form of KNA molecules of specified sequences, or polypeptides expressed from these RNA molecules in cells, especially in blood cells, and more especially in peripheral blood cells, of subjects with herpes virus infection are disclosed. These markers are indicators of herpes virus infection and, when differentially expressed, as compared to their expression in normal subjects or in subjects lacking herpes virus-related disease, are diagnostic for the presence or risk of development of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection, in tested subjects. Such markers provide considerable advantages over the prior art in this field. In certain advantageous embodiments where peripheral blood is used for the analysis, it is possible to diagnose herpes virus infection before serum antibodies are detected.
  • nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein will find utility in a variety of applications in herpes virus detection, diagnosis, prognosis and treatment.
  • applications within the scope of the present disclosure comprise amplification of HVI markers using specific primers, detection of HVI markers by hybridization with oligonucleotide probes, incorporation of isolated nucleic acids into vectors, expression of vector-incorporated nucleic acids as RNA and protein, and development of immunological reagents corresponding to marker encoded products.
  • the identified HVI markers may in turn be used to design specific oligonucleotide probes and primers.
  • Such probes and primers may be of any length that would specifically hybridize to the identified marker gene sequences and may be at least about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500 nucleotides in length and in the case of probes, up to the full length of the sequences of the marker genes identified herein. Probes may also include additional sequence at their 5' and/or 3' ends so that they extent beyond the target sequence with which they hybridize.
  • these probes and primers When used in combination with nucleic acid amplification procedures, these probes and primers enable the rapid analysis of biological samples (e.g., peripheral blood samples) for detecting marker genes or for detecting or quantifying marker gene transcripts.
  • biological samples e.g., peripheral blood samples
  • markers genes e.g., marker genes or for detecting or quantifying marker gene transcripts.
  • Such procedures include any method or technique known in the art or described herein for duplicating or increasing the number of copies or amount of a target nucleic acid or its complement.
  • the identified markers may also be used to identify and isolate full-length gene sequences, including regulatory elements for gene expression, from genomic DNA libraries, which are suitably but not exclusively of equine origin.
  • the cDNA sequences identified in the present disclosure may be used as hybridization probes to screen genomic DNA libraries by conventional techniques. Once partial genomic clones have been identified, full- length genes may be isolated by "chromosomal walking" (also called “overlap hybridization”) using, for example, the method disclosed by Chinault & Carbon (1979, Gene 5: 111-126).
  • a partial genomic clone Once a partial genomic clone has been isolated using a cDNA hybridization probe, non-repetitive segments at or near the ends of the partial genomic clone may be used as hybridization probes in further genomic library screening, ultimately allowing isolation of entire gene sequences for the HVI markers of interest.
  • full-length genes may be obtained using the full-length or partial cDNA sequences or short expressed sequence tags (ESTs) described in this disclosure using standard techniques as disclosed for example by Sambrook, et al. (MOLECULAR CLONING. A LABORATORY MANUAL (Cold Spring Harbor Press, 1989) and Ausubel et al. , (CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1994).
  • sequences may be used to identify and isolate full- length cDNA sequences using standard techniques as disclosed, for example, in the above- referenced texts. Sequences identified and isolated by such means may be useful in the detection of HVI marker polynucleotides using the detection methods described herein, and are part of the invention.
  • Marker gene sequences that are desirable for use in the invention are those set fort in SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113.
  • 63 markers of herpes virus i.e., 63 HVI marker genes
  • GeneChipTM analysis of blood obtained from normal horses and from horses with clinical evidence of EHV i.e., 63 marker genes
  • 44 have full-length or substantially full-length coding sequences and the remaining 21 have partial sequence information at one or both of their 5' and 3' ends.
  • the identified HVI marker genes include 21 previously uncharacterized equine genes.
  • the sequences of isolated nucleic acids disclosed herein find utility inter alia as hybridization probes or amplification primers. These nucleic acids may be used, for example, in diagnostic evaluation of biological samples or employed to clone full-length cDNAs or genomic clones corresponding thereto.
  • these probes and primers represent oligonucleotides, which are of sufficient length to provide specific hybridization to a RNA or DNA sample extracted from the biological sample.
  • the sequences typically will be about 10-20 nucleotides, but may be longer. Longer sequences, e.g., of about 30, 40, 50, 100, 500 and even up to full-length, are desirable for certain embodiments.
  • Molecules that are complementary to the above mentioned sequences and that bind to these sequences under high stringency conditions are also contemplated. These probes are useful in a variety of hybridization embodiments, such as Southern and northern blotting. In some cases, it is contemplated that probes may be used that hybridize to multiple target sequences without compromising their ability to effectively diagnose herpes virus infection. In general, it is contemplated that the hybridization probes described herein are useful both as reagents in solution hybridization, as in PCR, for detection of expression of corresponding genes, as well as in embodiments employing a solid phase.
  • probes and primers may be designed around the disclosed nucleotide sequences.
  • the sequences used to design probes and primers may include repetitive stretches of adenine nucleotides (poly-A tails) normally attached at the ends of the RNA for the identified marker genes.
  • probes and primers may be specifically designed to not include these or other segments from the identified marker genes, as one of ordinary skilled in the art may deem certain segments more suitable for use in the detection methods disclosed.
  • the choice of primer or probe sequences for a selected application is within the realm of the ordinary skilled practitioner. Illustrative probe sequences for detection of HVI marker polynucleotides are presented in Table 2.
  • Primers may be provided in double-stranded or single-stranded form, although the single-stranded form is desirable. Probes, while perhaps capable of priming, are designed to bind to a target DNA or RNA and need not be used in an amplification process.
  • the probes or primers are labeled with radioactive species 32 P, 14 C, 35 S, 3 H, or other label), with a fluorophore (e.g., rhodamine, fluorescein) or with a chemillumiscent label (e.g., luciferase).
  • a fluorophore e.g., rhodamine, fluorescein
  • chemillumiscent label e.g., luciferase
  • the present invention provides substantially full-length cDNA sequences as well as EST and partial cDNA sequences that are useful as markers of EHV. It will be understood, however, that the present disclosure is not limited to these disclosed sequences and is intended particularly to encompass at least isolated nucleic acids that are hybridizable to nucleic acids comprising the disclosed sequences or that are variants of these nucleic acids. For example, a nucleic acid of partial sequence may be used to identify a structurally-related gene or the full-length genomic or cDNA clone from which it is derived.
  • HVI marker polynucleotides RNA transcripts and polypeptides
  • the present invention encompasses isolated or substantially purified nucleic acid or protein compositions.
  • An "isolated” or “purified” nucleic acid molecule or protein, or biologically active portion thereof, is substantially or essentially free from components that normally accompany or interact with the nucleic acid molecule or protein as found in its naturally occurring environment.
  • an isolated or purified polynucleotide or polypeptide is substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • an "isolated" polynucleotide is free of sequences (especially protein encoding sequences) that naturally flank the polynucleotide (i.e., sequences located at the 5' and 3' ends of the polynucleotide) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the polynucleotide was derived.
  • an isolated HVI marker polynucleotide can contain less than about 5 kb, 4 kb, 3 kb, 2 kb, 1 kb, 0.5 kb, or 0.1 kb of nucleotide sequences that naturally flank the polynucleotide in genomic DNA of the cell from which the polynucleotide was derived.
  • a polypeptide that is substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of protein having less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, (by dry weight) of contaminating protein.
  • culture medium suitably represents less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or non-protein-of-interest chemicals.
  • the present invention also encompasses portions of the full-length or substantially full-length nucleotide sequences of the HVI marker polynucleotides or their transcripts or DNA copies of these transcripts.
  • Portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence may encode polypeptide portions or segments that retain the biological activity of the native polypeptide.
  • portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence that are useful as hybridization probes generally do not encode amino acid sequences retaining such biological activity.
  • portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence may range from at least about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 90, 100 nucleotides, or almost up to the full-length nucleotide sequence encoding the HVI marker polypeptides of the invention.
  • a portion of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence that encodes a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention may encode at least about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 150, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000, or even at least about 2000, 3000, 4000 or 5000 contiguous amino acid residues, or almost up to the total number of amino acids present in a full-length HVI marker polypeptide.
  • Portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence that are useful as hybridization probes or PCR primers generally need not encode a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide.
  • an HVI marker nucleotide sequence may encode a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide, or it may be a fragment that can be used as a hybridization probe or PCR primer using standard methods known in the art.
  • a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide can be prepared by isolating a portion of one of the HVI marker nucleotide sequences of the invention, expressing the encoded portion of the HVI marker polypeptide (e.g., by recombinant expression in vitro), and assessing the activity of the encoded portion of the HVI marker polypeptide.
  • Nucleic acid molecules that are portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence comprise at least about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, or 650 nucleotides, or almost up to the number of nucleotides present in a full-length HVI marker nucleotide sequence.
  • the invention also contemplates variants of the HVI marker nucleotide sequences.
  • Nucleic acid variants can be naturally-occurring, such as allelic variants (same locus), homologues (different locus), and orthologues (different organism) or can be non naturally- occurring.
  • Naturally occurring variants such as these can be identified with the use of well- known molecular biology techniques, as, for example, with polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and hybridization techniques as known in the art.
  • Non-naturally occurring variants can be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells, or organisms.
  • the variants can contain nucleotide substitutions, deletions, inversions and insertions.
  • Variation can occur in either or both the coding and non-coding regions.
  • the variations can produce both conservative and non-conservative amino acid substitutions (as compared in the encoded product).
  • conservative variants include those sequences that, because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, encode the amino acid sequence of one of the EHV marker polypeptides of the invention.
  • Variant nucleotide sequences also include synthetically derived nucleotide sequences, such as those generated, for example, by using site-directed mutagenesis but which still encode an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention.
  • variants of a particular nucleotide sequence of the invention will have at least about 30%, 40% 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, generally at least about 75%, 80%, 85%, desirably about 90% to 95% or more, and more suitably about 98% or more sequence identity to that particular nucleotide sequence as determined by sequence alignment programs described elsewhere herein using default parameters.
  • the HVI marker nucleotide sequences of the invention can be used to isolate corresponding sequences and alleles from other organisms, particularly other mammals, especially other equine species. Methods are readily available in the art for the hybridization of nucleic acid sequences. Coding sequences from other organisms may be isolated according to well known techniques based on their sequence identity with the coding sequences set forth herein. In these techniques all or part of the known coding sequence is used as a probe which selectively hybridizes to other HVI marker coding sequences present in a population of cloned genomic DNA fragments or cDNA fragments (i.e., genomic or cDNA libraries) from a chosen organism.
  • the present invention also contemplates polynucleotides that hybridize to the HVI marker polynucleotide nucleotide sequences, or to their complements, under stringency conditions described below.
  • stringency conditions described below.
  • the term “hybridizes under low stringency, medium stringency, high stringency, or very high stringency conditions” describes conditions for hybridization and washing.
  • Guidance for performing hybridization reactions can be found in Ausubel et al, (1998, supra), Sections 6.3.1-6.3.6. Aqueous and non-aqueous methods are described in that reference and either can be used.
  • Reference herein to low stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about 1% v/v to at least about 15% v/v formamide and from at least about 1 M to at least about 2 M salt for hybridization at 42° C, and at least about 1 M to at least about 2 M salt for washing at 42° C.
  • Low stringency conditions also may include 1% Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaHPO 4 (pH 7.2),
  • low stringency conditions includes hybridization in 6 x sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C, followed by two washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at least at 50° C (the temperature of the washes can be increased to 55° C for low stringency conditions).
  • SSC sodium chloride/sodium citrate
  • Medium stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about 16% v/v to at least about 30% v/v formamide and from at least about 0.5 M to at least about 0.9 M salt for hybridization at 42° C, and at least about 0.1 M to at least about 0.2 M salt for washing at 55° C.
  • Medium stringency conditions also may include 1% Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaHPO 4
  • medium stringency conditions includes hybridizing in 6 x SSC at about 45° C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at 60° C.
  • High stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about 31% v/v to at least about 50% v/v formamide and from about 0.01 M to about 0.15 M salt for hybridization at 42° C, and about 0.01 M to about 0.02 M salt for washing at 55° C.
  • High stringency conditions also may include 1% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 " M NaHPO 4 (pH 7.2), 7% SDS for hybridization at 65° C, and (i) 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS; or (ii) 0.5% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 40 mM NaHPO 4 (pH 7.2), 1% SDS for washing at a temperature in excess of 65° C.
  • One embodiment of high stringency conditions includes hybridizing in 6 x SSC at about 45° C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65° C.
  • an HVI marker polypeptide is encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to a disclosed nucleotide sequence under very high stringency conditions.
  • very high stringency conditions includes hybridizing 0.5 M sodium phosphate, 7% SDS at 65° C, followed by one or more washes at 0.2 x SSC, 1% SDS at 65 0 C.
  • T m 81.5 + 16.6 (log 10 M) + 0.41 (%G+C) - 0.63 (% formamide) - (600/length)
  • T m of a duplex DNA decreases by approximately I 0 C with every increase of 1% in the number of randomly mismatched base pairs. Washing is generally carried out at T m — 15° C for high stringency, or T m - 30° C for moderate stringency.
  • a membrane e.g., a nitrocellulose membrane or a nylon membrane
  • immobilized DNA is hybridized overnight at 42° C in a hybridization buffer (50% deionised formamide, 5 x SSC, 5 x Denhardt's solution (0.1% ficoll, 0.1% polyvinylpyrollidone and 0.1% bovine serum albumin), 0.1% SDS and 200 mg/mL denatured salmon sperm DNA) containing labeled probe.
  • a hybridization buffer 50% deionised formamide, 5 x SSC, 5 x Denhardt's solution (0.1% ficoll, 0.1% polyvinylpyrollidone and 0.1% bovine serum albumin), 0.1% SDS and 200 mg/mL denatured salmon sperm DNA
  • the membrane is then subjected to two sequential medium stringency washes (i.e., 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 45° C, followed by 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 50° C), followed by two sequential higher stringency washes (i.e., 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 12 min at 55° C followed by 0.2 x SSC and 0.1%SDS solution for 12 min at 65-68° C.
  • 2 x SSC 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 45° C
  • 2 x SSC 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 50° C
  • two sequential higher stringency washes i.e., 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 12 min at 55° C followed by 0.2 x SSC and 0.1%SDS solution for 12 min at 65-68° C.
  • the present invention also contemplates full-length polypeptides encoded by the HVI marker polynucleotides of the invention as well as the biologically active portions of those polypeptides, which are referred to. collectively herein as "herpes virus infection marker polynucleotide” or "HVI marker polypeptides” .
  • Biologically active portions of full-length HVI marker polypeptides include portions with immuno-interactive activity of at least about 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60 amino acid residues in length.
  • immuno- interactive fragments contemplated by the present invention are at least 6 and desirably at least 8 amino acid residues in length, which can elicit an immune response in an animal for the production of antigen-binding molecules that are immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention.
  • antigen-binding molecules can be used to screen other mammals, especially equine mammals, for structurally and/or functionally related HVI marker polypeptides.
  • portions of a full-length HVI marker polypeptide may participate in an interaction, for example, an intramolecular or an inter-molecular interaction.
  • An inter-molecular interaction can be a specific binding interaction or an enzymatic interaction (e.g., the interaction can be transient and a covalent bond is formed or broken).
  • Biologically active portions of a full- length HVI marker polypeptide include peptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently similar to or derived from the amino acid sequences of a (putative) full-length HVI marker polypeptide, for example, the amino acid sequences shown in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, which include less amino acids than a full- length HVI marker polypeptide, and exhibit at least one activity of that polypeptide.
  • biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of a full-length HVI marker polypeptide.
  • a biologically active portion of a full-length HVI marker polypeptide can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 150, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000, or even at least about 2000, 3000, 4000 or 5000, or more amino acid residues in length.
  • the portion is a "biologically-active portion" having no less than about 1%, 10%, 25% 50% of the activity of the full-length polypeptide from which it is derived.
  • variant HVI marker polypeptides include proteins derived from the native protein by deletion (so-called truncation) or addition of one or more amino acids to the N-terminal and/or C-terminal end of the native protein; deletion or addition of one or more amino acids at one or more sites in the native protein; or substitution of one or more amino acids at one or more sites in the native protein.
  • Variant proteins encompassed by the present invention are biologically active, that is, they continue to possess the desired biological activity of the native protein. Such variants may result from, for example, genetic polymorphism or from human manipulation.
  • Biologically active variants of a native HVI marker protein of the invention will have at least 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, generally at least 75%, 80%, 85%, preferably about 90% to 95% or more, and more preferably about 98% or more sequence similarity with the amino acid sequence for the native protein as determined by sequence alignment programs described elsewhere herein using default parameters.
  • a biologically active variant of a protein of the invention may differ from that protein generally by as much 1000, 500, 400, 300, 200, 100, 50 or 20 amino acid residues or suitably by as few as 1-15 amino acid residues, as few as 1-10, such as 6-10, as few as 5, as few as 4, 3, 2, or even 1 amino acid residue.
  • AN HVI marker polypeptide of the invention may be altered in various ways including amino acid substitutions, deletions, truncations, and insertions. Methods for such manipulations are generally known in the art. For example, amino acid sequence variants of an HVI marker protein can be prepared by mutations in the DNA. Methods for mutagenesis and nucleotide sequence alterations are well known in the art. See, for example, Kunkel (1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:488-492), Kunkel et al. (1987, Methods in Enzymol 154:367- 382), U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,192, Watson, J. D. et al.
  • HVI marker polypeptide variants can be used in combination with the screening assays to identify HVI marker polypeptide variants (Arkin and Yourvan (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:7811-7815; Delgrave et al. (1993) Protein Engineering 6:327- 331). Conservative substitutions, such as exchanging one amino acid with another having similar properties, may be desirable as discussed in more detail below.
  • Variant HVI marker polypeptides may contain conservative amino acid substitutions at various locations along their sequence, as compared to the parent HVI marker amino acid sequence.
  • a "conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art, which can be generally sub-classified as follows:
  • Acidic The residue has a negative charge due to loss of H ion at physiological pH and the residue is attracted by aqueous solution so as to seek the surface positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium at physiological pH.
  • Amino acids having an acidic side chain include glutamic acid and aspartic acid.
  • Basic The residue has a positive charge due to association with H ion at physiological pH or within one or two pH units thereof (e.g., histidine) and the residue is attracted by aqueous solution so as to seek the surface positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium at physiological pH.
  • Amino acids having a basic side chain include arginine, lysine and histidine.
  • [0183] Charged The residues are charged at physiological pH and, therefore, include amino acids having acidic or basic side chains (i.e., glutamic acid, aspartic acid, arginine, lysine and histidine).
  • Hydrophobic The residues are not charged at physiological pH and the residue is repelled by aqueous solution so as to seek the inner positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium.
  • Amino acids having a hydrophobic side chain include tyrosine, valine, isoleucine, leucine, methionine, phenylalanine and tryptophan.
  • Neutral/polar The residues are not charged at physiological pH, but the residue is not sufficiently repelled by aqueous solutions so that it would seek inner positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium.
  • Amino acids having a neutral/polar side chain include asparagine, glutamine, cysteine, histidine, serine and threonine.
  • This description also characterizes certain amino acids as "small” since their side chains are not sufficiently large, even if polar groups are lacking, to confer hydrophobicity. With the exception of proline, "small" amino acids are those with four carbons or less when at least one polar group is on the side chain and three carbons or less when not.
  • Amino acids having a small side chain include glycine, serine, alanine and threonine.
  • the gene-encoded secondary amino acid proline is a special case due to its known effects on the secondary conformation of peptide chains.
  • the structure of proline differs from all the other naturally- occurring amino acids in that its side chain is bonded to the nitrogen of the ⁇ -amino group, as well as the ⁇ -carbon.
  • Several amino acid similarity matrices e.g., PAM120 matrix and PAM250 matrix as disclosed for example by Dayhoff et al. (1978) A model of evolutionary change in proteins. Matrices for determining distance relationships In M. O. Dayhoff, (ed.), Atlas of protein sequence and structure, Vol. 5, pp.
  • proline in the same group as glycine, serine, alanine and threonine. Accordingly, for the purposes of the present invention, proline is classified as a "small" amino acid.
  • proline is classified as a "small" amino acid.
  • the degree of attraction or repulsion required for classification as polar or nonpolar is arbitrary and, therefore, amino acids specifically contemplated by the invention have been classified as one or the other. Most amino acids not specifically named can be classified on the basis of known behavior.
  • Amino acid residues can be further sub-classified as cyclic or noncyclic, and aromatic or nonaromatic, self-explanatory classifications with respect to the side-chain substituent groups of the residues, and as small or large.
  • the residue is considered small if it contains a total of four carbon atoms or less, inclusive of the carboxyl carbon, provided an additional polar substituent is present; three or less if not.
  • Small residues are, of course, always nonaromatic.
  • amino acid residues may fall in two or more classes. For the naturally-occurring protein amino acids, sub-classification according to the this scheme is presented in the Table 3.
  • Conservative amino acid substitution also includes groupings based on side chains.
  • a group of amino acids having aliphatic side chains is glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, and isoleucine; a group of amino acids having aliphatic-hydroxyl side chains is serine and threonine; a group of amino acids having amide-containing side chains is asparagine and glutamine; a group of amino acids having aromatic side chains is phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan; a group of amino acids having basic side chains is lysine, arginine, and histidine; and a group of amino acids having sulfur-containing side chains is cysteine and methionine.
  • Amino acid substitutions falling within the scope of the invention are, in general, accomplished by selecting substitutions that do not differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the peptide backbone in the area of the substitution, (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain. After the substitutions are introduced, the variants are screened for biological activity. [0190] Alternatively, similar amino acids for making conservative substitutions can be grouped into three categories based on the identity of the side chains.
  • the first group includes glutamic acid, aspartic acid, arginine, lysine, histidine, which all have charged side chains;
  • the second group includes glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, glutamine, asparagine;
  • the third group includes leucine, isoleucine, valine, alanine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, methionine, as described in Zubay, G., Biochemistry, third edition, Wm.C. Brown Publishers (1993).
  • a predicted non-essential amino acid residue in an HYI marker polypeptide is typically replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family.
  • mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of an HVI marker gene coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for an activity of the parent polypeptide to identify mutants which retain that activity.
  • the encoded peptide can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the peptide can be determined.
  • the present invention also contemplates variants of the naturally-occurring HVI marker polypeptide sequences or their biologically-active fragments, wherein the variants are distinguished from the naturally-occurring sequence by the addition, deletion, or substitution of one or more amino acid residues.
  • variants will display at least about 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 % similarity to a parent HVI marker polypeptide sequence as, for example, set forth in any one of SEQ IDNO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114.
  • variants will have at least 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 % sequence identity to a parent HVI marker polypeptide sequence as, for example, set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114.
  • HVI marker polypeptides also include polypeptides that are encoded by polynucleotides that hybridize under stringency conditions as defined herein, especially high stringency conditions, to the HVI marker polynucleotide sequences of the invention, or the non-coding strand thereof, as described above.
  • variant polypeptides differ from an BTVI marker sequence by at least one but by less than 50, 40, 30, 20, 15, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3 or 2 amino acid residue(s).
  • variant polypeptides differ from the corresponding sequence in any one of SEQ IDNO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 by at least 1% but less than 20%, 15%, 10% or 5% of the residues.
  • a "non-essential" amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence of an embodiment polypeptide without abolishing or substantially altering one or more of its activities.
  • the alteration does not substantially alter one of these activities, for example, the activity is at least 20%, 40%, 60%, 70% or 80% of wild-type.
  • An "essential" amino acid residue is a residue that, when altered from the wild-type sequence of an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention, results in abolition of an activity of the parent molecule such that less than 20% of the wild-type activity is present.
  • a variant polypeptide includes an amino acid sequence having at least about 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94% 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or more similarity to a corresponding sequence of an HVI marker polypeptide as, for example, set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 and has the activity of that HVI marker polypeptide.
  • HVI marker polypeptides of the invention may be prepared by any suitable procedure known to those of skill in the art.
  • the polypeptides may be prepared by a procedure including the steps of: (a) preparing a chimeric construct comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes at least a portion of an HVI marker polynucleotide and that is operably linked to a regulatory element; (b) introducing the chimeric construct into a host cell; (c) culturing the host cell to express the HVI marker polypeptide; and (d) isolating the HVI marker polypeptide from the host cell.
  • the nucleotide sequence encodes at least a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 or a variant thereof.
  • the chimeric construct is typically in the form of an expression vector, which is suitably selected from self-replicating extra-chromosomal vectors (e.g., plasmids) and vectors that integrate into a host genome.
  • the regulatory element will generally be appropriate for the host cell employed for expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide.
  • Numerous types of expression vectors and regulatory elements are known in the art for a variety of host cells.
  • Illustrative elements of this type include, but are not restricted to, promoter sequences (e.g., constitutive or inducible promoters which may be naturally occurring or combine elements of more than one promoter), leader or signal sequences, ribosomal binding sites, transcriptional start and stop sequences, translational start and termination sequences, and enhancer or activator sequences.
  • the expression vector comprises a selectable marker gene to permit the selection of transformed host cells.
  • selectable marker genes are well known in the art and will vary with the host cell employed.
  • the expression vector may also include a fusion partner (typically provided by the expression vector) so that the HVI marker polypeptide is produced as a fusion polypeptide with the fusion partner.
  • a fusion partner typically provided by the expression vector
  • the main advantage of fusion partners is that they assist identification and/or purification of the fusion polypeptide. In order to produce the fusion polypeptide, it is necessary to ligate the HVI marker polynucleotide into an expression vector so that the translational reading frames of the fusion partner and the HVI marker polynucleotide coincide.
  • fusion partners include, but are not limited to, glutathione-S- transferase (GST), Fc potion of human IgG, maltose binding protein (MBP) and hexahistidine (HIS 6 ), which are particularly useful for isolation of the fusion polypeptide by affinity chromatography.
  • GST glutathione-S- transferase
  • MBP maltose binding protein
  • HIS 6 hexahistidine
  • fusion polypeptides are purified by affinity chromatography using matrices to which the fusion partners bind such as but not limited to glutathione-, amylose-, and nickel- or cobalt-conjugated resins.
  • matrices are available in "kit” form, such as the QIAexpressTM system (Qiagen) useful with (HIS 6 ) fusion partners and the Pharmacia GST purification system.
  • QIAexpressTM system Qiagen
  • HIS 6 HIV 6
  • Other fusion partners known in the art are light-emitting proteins such as green fluorescent protein (GFP) and luciferase, which serve as fluorescent "tags” that permit the identification and/or isolation of fusion polypeptides by fluorescence microscopy or by flow cytometry.
  • Flow cytometric methods such as fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) are particularly useful in this latter application.
  • the fusion partners also possess protease cleavage sites, such as for Factor X a or Thrombin, which permit the relevant protease to partially digest the fusion polypeptide and thereby liberate the HVI marker polypeptide from the fusion construct. The liberated polypeptide can then be isolated from the fusion partner by subsequent chromatographic separation.
  • Fusion partners also include within their scope "epitope tags," which are usually short peptide sequences for which a specific antibody is available. Well known examples of epitope tags for which specific monoclonal antibodies are readily available include c-Myc, influenza virus, haemagglutinin and FLAG tags.
  • the chimeric constructs of the invention are introduced into a host by any suitable means including "transduction” and “transfection”, which are art recognized as meaning the introduction of a nucleic acid, for example, an expression vector, into a recipient cell by nucleic acid-mediated gene transfer.
  • "Transformation” refers to a process in which a host's genotype is changed as a result of the cellular uptake of exogenous DNA or RNA, and, for example, the transformed cell comprises the expression system of the invention.
  • Methods for introducing chimeric constructs into cells There are many methods for introducing chimeric constructs into cells. Typically, the method employed will depend on the choice of host cell. Technology for introduction of chimeric constructs into host cells is well known to those of skill in the art.
  • Recombinant HVI marker polypeptides may be produced by culturing a host cell transformed with a chimeric construct.
  • the conditions appropriate for expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide will vary with the choice of expression vector and the host cell and are easily ascertained by one skilled in the art through routine experimentation.
  • Suitable host cells for expression may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic.
  • An illustrative host cell for expression of a polypeptide of the invention is a bacterium.
  • the bacterium used may be Escherichia coli.
  • the host cell may be a yeast cell or an insect cell such as, for example, SF9 cells that may be utilized with a baculovirus expression system.
  • Recombinant HVI marker polypeptides can be conveniently prepared using standard protocols as described for example in Sambrook, et ah, (1989, supra), in particular
  • HVI marker polypeptides may be synthesized by chemical synthesis, e.g., using solution synthesis or solid phase synthesis as described, for example, in Chapter 9 of Atherton and Shephard ⁇ supra) and in Roberge et al (1995, Science 269: 202).
  • the invention also provides antigen-binding molecules that are specifically immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention.
  • the antigen-binding molecule comprise whole polyclonal antibodies.
  • Such antibodies may be prepared, for example, by injecting an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention into a production species, which may include mice or rabbits, to obtain polyclonal antisera.
  • Methods of producing polyclonal antibodies are well known to those skilled in the art. Exemplary protocols which may be used are described for example in Coligan et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN IMMUNOLOGY, (John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 1991), and Ausubel et al, (1994- 1998, supra), in particular Section III of Chapter 11.
  • monoclonal antibodies may be produced using the standard method as described, for example, by K ⁇ hler and Milstein (1975, Nature 256, 495-497), or by more recent modifications thereof as described, for example, in Coligan et al, (1991, supra) by immortalising spleen or other antibody producing cells derived from a production species which has been inoculated with one or more of the HVI marker polypeptides of the invention.
  • the invention also contemplates as antigen-binding molecules Fv, Fab, Fab' and F(ab') 2 immunoglobulin fragments.
  • the antigen-binding molecule may comprise a synthetic stabilized Fv fragment.
  • Exemplary fragments of this type include single chain Fv fragments (sFv, frequently termed scFv) in which a peptide linker is used to bridge the N terminus or C terminus of a Y H domain with the C terminus or N-terminus, respectively, of a ⁇ L domain.
  • sFv single chain Fv fragments
  • scFv single chain Fv fragments
  • ScFv lack all constant parts of whole antibodies and are not able to activate complement.
  • ScFvs may be prepared, for example, in accordance with methods outlined in Kreber et al (Kreber et al 1997, J. Immunol. Methods; 201(1): 35-55). Alternatively, they may be prepared by methods described in U.S. Patent No 5,091,513, European Patent No 239,400 or the articles by Winter and Milstein (1991, Nature 349:293) and Pl ⁇ ckthun et al (1996, In Antibody engineering: A practical approach. 203-252).
  • the synthetic stabilized Fv fragment comprises a disulfide stabilized Fv (dsFv) in which cysteine residues are introduced into the Y H and V L domains such that in the fully folded Fv molecule the two residues will form a disulfide bond between them.
  • dsFv disulfide stabilized Fv
  • Suitable methods of producing dsFv are described for example in (Glockscuther et al. Biochem. 29: 1363-1367; Reiter et al. 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 18327-18331; Reiter et al. 1994, Biochem. 33: 5451-5459; Reiter et al. 1994. Cancer Res. 54: 2714-2718; Webber et al. 1995, MoI. Immunol. 32: 249-258).
  • Phage display and combinatorial methods for generating anti-HVI marker polypeptide antigen-binding molecules are known in the art (as described in, e.g., Ladner et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409; Kang et al. International Publication No. WO 92/18619; Dower et al. International Publication No. WO 91/17271; Winter et al. International Publication WO 92/20791; Markland et al International Publication No. WO 92/15679; Breitling et al. International Publication WO 93/01288; McCafferty et al. International Publication No.
  • the antigen-binding molecules can be used to screen expression libraries for variant HVI marker polypeptides. They can also be used to detect and/or isolate the HVI marker polypeptides of the invention. Thus, the invention also contemplates the use of antigen-binding molecules to isolate HVI marker polypeptides using , for example, any suitable immunoaffmity based method including, but not limited to, immunochromatography and immunoprecipitation.
  • a suitable method utilizes solid phase adsorption in which anti-HVI marker polypeptide antigen-binding molecules are attached to a suitable resin, the resin is contacted with a sample suspected of containing an HVI marker polypeptide, and the HVI marker polypeptide, if any, is subsequently eluted from the resin.
  • Illustrative resins include: SepharoseTM (Pharmacia), PorosTM resins (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis),
  • the antigen-binding molecule can be coupled to a compound, e.g., a label such as a radioactive nucleus, or imaging agent, e.g. a radioactive, enzymatic, or other, e.g., imaging agent, e.g., a NMR contrast agent. Labels which produce detectable radioactive emissions or fluorescence are preferred.
  • An anti-HVI marker polypeptide antigen-binding molecule e.g., monoclonal antibody
  • HVI marker polypeptides e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant
  • such antigen-binding molecules can be used to monitor HVI marker polypeptides levels in biological samples (including whole cells and fluids) for diagnosing the presence, absence, , degree, of herpes virus infection or risk of development of disease as a consequences of herpes virus infection.
  • Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance (i.e., antibody labeling).
  • detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials.
  • suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, ⁇ -galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase;
  • suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin;
  • suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin;
  • an example of a luminescent material includes luminol;
  • examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include 125 I, 131 1, 35 S or 3 H.
  • the label may be selected from a group including a chromogen, a catalyst, an enzyme, a fluorophore, a chemiluminescent molecule, a lanthanide ion such as Europium (Eu 34 ), a radioisotope and a direct visual label.
  • a direct visual label use may be made of a colloidal metallic or non-metallic particle, a dye particle, an enzyme or a substrate, an organic polymer, a latex particle, a liposome, or other vesicle containing a signal producing substance and the like.
  • Enzyme labels useful in the present invention include alkaline phosphatase, horseradish peroxidase, luciferase, ⁇ - galactosidase, glucose oxidase, lysozyme, malate dehydrogenase and the like.
  • the enzyme label may be used alone or in combination with a second enzyme in solution.
  • the present invention is predicated in part on the discovery that horses infected with a herpes virus (especially EHV), and typically those with an active herpes virus infection, have aberrant expression of certain genes or certain alleles of genes, referred to herein as HVI marker genes, as compared to horses not infected with the herpes virus. It is proposed that aberrant expression of these genes or their homologues or orthologues will be found in other animals with herpes virus infection.
  • EHV herpes virus
  • the present invention features a method for assessing herpes virus infection or for diagnosing herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection, in a subject, which is suitably a mammal, by detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker gene in a biological sample obtained from the subject.
  • the herpes virus infection includes infection by a member of a herpes virus subfamily selected from alpha herpes virinae, beta herpes virinae and gamma herpes virinae.
  • herpes viruses from the alpha herpes virinae subfamily include HHV-I (HSV-I), HHV-2 (HSV-2), HHV-3 (VZV), and equine herpes viruses (e.g., EHV-I and EHV-4).
  • Herpes viruses from the beta herpes virinae subfamily include HHV-5 (CMV), HHV-6 (roseolovirus) and HHV-7.
  • herpes viruses from the gamma herpes virinae subfamily include, but are not limited to, HHV-4 (lymphocryptovirus, EBV), and HHV-8 (rhadinovirus).
  • the herpes virus is EHV, especially EHV-I and more especially active EHV-I.
  • EHV herpes virus
  • the presence, degree or stage of herpes virus infection or risk of development of herpes virus sequelae is diagnosed when an HVI marker gene product is present at a detectably higher level in the biological sample as compared to the level at which that gene is present in a reference sample obtained from normal subjects or from subjects not infected with herpes virus, especially not actively infected with herpes virus.
  • Such diagnoses are made when the level or functional activity of an HVI marker gene product in the biological sample varies from the level or functional activity of a corresponding HVI marker gene product in the reference sample by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even by at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999%, or even by at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000%.
  • Illustrative increases or decreases in the expression level of representative HVI marker genes are shown in Tables 5-7.
  • the corresponding gene product is generally selected from the same gene product that is present in the biological sample, a gene product expressed from a variant gene (e.g., an homologous or orthologous gene) including an allelic variant, or a splice variant or protein product thereof.
  • the method comprises measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 HVI marker genes.
  • the biological sample contains blood, especially peripheral blood, or a fraction or extract thereof.
  • the biological sample comprises blood cells such as mature, immature and developing leukocytes, including lymphocytes, polymorphonuclear leukocytes, neutrophils, monocytes, reticulocytes, basophils, coelomocytes, haemocytes, eosinophils, megakaryocytes, macrophages, dendritic cells natural killer cells, or fraction of etal
  • the biological sample comprises leukocytes including peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC).
  • PBMC peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • Nucleic acid used in polynucleotide-based assays can be isolated from cells contained in the biological sample, according to standard methodologies (Sambrook, et ah, 1989, supra; and Ausubel et ah, 1994, supra).
  • the nucleic acid is typically fractionated (e.g., poly A + RNA) or whole cell RNA. Where RNA is used as the subject of detection, it may be desired to convert the RNA to a complementary DNA.
  • the nucleic acid is amplified by a template-dependent nucleic acid amplification technique. A number of template dependent processes are available to amplify the HVI marker sequences present in a given template sample.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • the primers will bind to the marker and the polymerase will cause the primers to be extended along the marker sequence by adding on nucleotides. By raising and lowering the temperature of the reaction mixture, the extended primers will dissociate from the marker to form reaction products, excess primers will bind to the marker and to the reaction products and the process is repeated.
  • a reverse transcriptase PCR amplification procedure may be performed in order to quantify the amount of mRNA amplified. Methods of reverse transcribing RNA into cDNA are well known and described in Sambrook et ah, 1989, supra. Alternative methods for reverse transcription utilize thermostable, RNA-dependent DNA polymerases. These methods are described in WO 90/07641. Polymerase chain reaction methodologies are well known in the art.
  • the template-dependent amplification involves the quantification of transcripts in real-time.
  • RNA or DNA may be quantified using the Real-Time PCR technique (Higuchi, 1992, et ah, Biotechnology 10: 413- 417).
  • the concentration of the amplified products of the target DNA in PCR reactions that have completed the same number of cycles and are in their linear ranges, it is possible to determine the relative concentrations of the specific target sequence in the original DNA mixture. If the DNA mixtures are cDNAs synthesized from RNAs isolated from different tissues or cells, the relative abundance of the specific mRNA from which the target sequence was derived can be determined for the respective tissues or cells.
  • LCR ligase chain reaction
  • Q ⁇ Replicase described in PCT Application No. PCT/US87/00880, may also be used.
  • a replicative sequence of RNA that has a region complementary to that of a target is added to a sample in the presence of an RNA polymerase.
  • the polymerase will copy the replicative sequence that can then be detected.
  • An isothermal amplification method in which restriction endonucleases and ligases are used to achieve the amplification of target molecules that contain nucleotide 5' ⁇ -thio- triphosphates in one strand of a restriction site may also be useful in the amplification of nucleic acids in the present invention, Walker et at., (1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A 89: 392-396).
  • SDA Strand Displacement Amplification
  • RCR Repair Chain Reaction
  • CPR cyclic probe reaction
  • Still another amplification method described in GB Application No. 2 202 328, and in PCT Application No. PCT/US89/01025, may be used.
  • modified primers are used in a PCR-like, template- and enzyme-dependent synthesis.
  • the primers may be modified by labeling with a capture moiety (e.g., biotin) and/or a detector moiety (e.g., enzyme).
  • a capture moiety e.g., biotin
  • a detector moiety e.g., enzyme
  • an excess of labeled probes are added to a sample.
  • the probe binds and is cleaved catalytically. After cleavage, the target sequence is released intact to be bound by excess probe. Cleavage of the labeled probe signals the presence of the target sequence.
  • nucleic acid amplification procedures include transcription-based amplification systems (TAS), including nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA) and 3SR (Kwoh et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. Sd. U.S.A., 86: 1173; Gingeras et al, PCT
  • TAS transcription-based amplification systems
  • NASBA nucleic acid sequence based amplification
  • 3SR Zaoh et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. Sd. U.S.A., 86: 1173; Gingeras et al, PCT
  • the nucleic acids can be prepared for amplification by standard phenol/chloroform extraction, heat denaturation of a clinical sample, treatment with lysis buffer and minispin columns for isolation of DNA and RNA or guanidinium chloride extraction of RNA.
  • amplification techniques involve annealing a primer which has target specific sequences.
  • DNA/RNA hybrids are digested with RNase H while double stranded DNA molecules are heat denatured again. In either case the single stranded DNA is made fully double stranded by addition of second target specific primer, followed by polymerization.
  • the double-stranded DNA molecules are then multiply transcribed by an RNA polymerase such as T7 or SP6.
  • RNAs are reverse transcribed into single stranded DNA, which is then converted to double stranded DNA, and then transcribed once again with an RNA polymerase such as T7 or SP6.
  • an RNA polymerase such as T7 or SP6.
  • ssRNA single-stranded RNA
  • dsDNA double- stranded DNA
  • the ssRNA is a template for a first primer oligonucleotide, which is elongated by reverse transcriptase (RNA-dependent DNA polymerase).
  • RNA-dependent DNA polymerase reverse transcriptase
  • the RNA is then removed from the resulting DNA:RNA duplex by the action of ribonuclease H (RNase H, an RNase specific for RNA in duplex with either DNA or RNA).
  • RNase H ribonuclease H
  • the resultant ssDNA is a template for a second primer, which also includes the sequences of an RNA polymerase promoter (exemplified by T7 RNA polymerase) 5' to its homology to the template.
  • This primer is then extended by DNA polymerase (exemplified by the large "Klenow" fragment of E. coli DNA polymerase I), resulting in a double-stranded DNA (“dsDNA”) molecule, having a sequence identical to that of the original RNA between the primers and having additionally, at one end, a promoter sequence.
  • This promoter sequence can be used by the appropriate RNA polymerase to make many RNA copies of the DNA. These copies can then re-enter the cycle leading to very swift amplification.
  • the starting sequence can be chosen to be in the form of either DNA or RNA.
  • Miller et al in PCT Application WO 89/06700 disclose a nucleic acid sequence amplification scheme based on the hybridization of a promoter/primer sequence to a 22 target single-stranded DNA ("ssDNA") followed by transcription of many RNA copies of the sequence. This scheme is not cyclic, i.e., new templates are not produced from the resultant RNA transcripts.
  • Other amplification methods include "RACE” and "one-sided PCR” (Frohman, M. A., In: “PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications", Academic Press, N.Y., 1990; Ohara et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. ScI U.S.A., 86: 5673-567).
  • Methods based on ligation of two (or more) oligonucleotides in the presence of nucleic acid having the sequence of the resulting "di-oligonucleotide", thereby amplifying the di-oligonucleotide may also be used for amplifying target nucleic acid sequences. Wu et al, (1989, Genomics 4: 560).
  • the HVI marker nucleic acid of interest is identified in the sample directly using a template-dependent amplification as described, for example, above, or with a second, known nucleic acid following amplification. Next, the identified product is detected.
  • the detection may be performed by visual means (e.g., ethidium bromide staining of a gel).
  • the detection may involve indirect identification of the product via chemiluminescence, radioactive scintigraphy of radiolabel or fluorescent label or even via a system using electrical or thermal impulse signals (Affymax Technology; Bellus, 1994, J Macromol. Sci. Pure, Appl. Chem., A31(l): 1355-1376).
  • amplification products or "amplicons” are visualized in order to confirm amplification of the HVI marker sequences.
  • One typical visualization method involves staining of a gel with ethidium bromide and visualization under UV light.
  • the amplification products are integrally labeled with radio- or fluorometrically- labeled nucleotides
  • the amplification products can then be exposed to x-ray film or visualized under the appropriate stimulating spectra, following separation. In some embodiments, visualization is achieved indirectly.
  • a labeled nucleic acid probe is brought into contact with the amplified HVI marker sequence.
  • the probe is suitably conjugated to a chromophore but may be radiolabeled.
  • the probe is conjugated to a binding partner, such as an antigen-binding molecule, or biotin, and the other member of the binding pair carries a detectable moiety or reporter molecule.
  • chromophore or radiolabel probes or primers identify the target during or following amplification.
  • target nucleic acids are quantified using blotting techniques, which are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • Southern blotting involves the use of DNA as a target
  • Northern blotting involves the use of RNA as a target.
  • cDNA blotting is analogous, in many aspects, to blotting or KNA species.
  • a probe is used to target a DNA or RNA species that has been immobilized on a suitable matrix, often a filter of nitrocellulose. The different species should be spatially separated to facilitate analysis. This often is accomplished by gel electrophoresis of nucleic acid species followed by "blotting" on to the filter.
  • the blotted target is incubated with a probe (usually labeled) under conditions that promote denaturation and rehybridization. Because the probe is designed to base pair with the target, the probe will bind a portion of the target sequence under renaturing conditions. Unbound probe is then removed, and detection is accomplished as described above.
  • a probe usually labeled
  • genotyping methods and allelic discrimination methods and technologies such as those described by Kristensen et al. (Biotechniques 30(2): 318-322), including the use of single nucleotide polymorphism analysis, high performance liquid chromatography, TaqManTM, liquid chromatography, and mass spectrometry.
  • biochip-based technologies such as those described by Hacia et al. (1996, Nature Genetics 14: 441-447) and Shoemaker et al (1996, Nature Genetics 14: 450-456). Briefly, these techniques involve quantitative methods for analysing large numbers of genes rapidly and accurately. By tagging genes with oligonucleotides or using fixed probe arrays, one can employ biochip technology to segregate target molecules as high density arrays and screen these molecules on the basis of hybridization. See also Pease et al. (1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Set U.S.A. 91: 5022-5026); Fodor et al. (1991, Science 251: 767-773).
  • nucleic acid probes to HVI marker polynucleotides are made and attached to biochips to be used in screening and diagnostic methods, as outlined herein.
  • the nucleic acid probes attached to the biochip are designed to be substantially complementary to specific expressed HVI marker nucleic acids, i.e., the target sequence (either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, for example in sandwich assays), such that hybridization of the target sequence and the probes of the present invention occurs.
  • This complementarity need not be perfect; there may be any number of base pair mismatches which will interfere with hybridization between the target sequence and the nucleic acid probes of the present invention.
  • the sequence is not a complementary target sequence.
  • more than one probe per sequence is used, with either overlapping probes or probes to different sections of the target being used. That is, two, three, four or more probes, with three being desirable, are used to build in a redundancy for a particular target.
  • the probes can be overlapping (i.e. have some sequence in common), or separate.
  • nucleic acids can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support in a wide variety of ways.
  • immobilized and grammatical equivalents herein is meant the association or binding between the nucleic acid probe and the solid support is sufficient to be stable under the conditions of binding, washing, analysis, and removal as outlined below.
  • the binding can be covalent or non-covalent.
  • non- covalent binding and grammatical equivalents herein is meant one or more of either electrostatic, hydrophilic, and hydrophobic interactions.
  • non-covalent binding is the covalent attachment of a molecule, such as, streptavidin to the support and the non-covalent binding of the biotinylated probe to the streptavidin.
  • covalent binding and grammatical equivalents herein is meant that the two moieties, the solid support and the probe, are attached by at least one bond, including sigma bonds, pi bonds and coordination bonds.
  • Covalent bonds can be formed directly between the probe and the solid support or can be formed by a cross linker or by inclusion of a specific reactive group on either the solid support or the probe or both molecules. Immobilisation may also involve a combination of covalent and non-covalent interactions.
  • the probes are attached to the biochip in a wide variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art.
  • the nucleic acids can either be synthesized first, with subsequent attachment to the biochip, or can be directly synthesized on the biochip.
  • the biochip comprises a suitable solid or semi-solid substrate or solid support.
  • substrate or “solid support” is meant any material that can be modified to contain discrete individual sites appropriate for the attachment or association of the nucleic acid probes and is amenable to at least one detection method.
  • the number of possible substrates are very large, and include, but are not limited to, glass and modified or functionalized glass, plastics (including acrylics, polystyrene and copolymers of styrene and other materials, polypropylene, polyethylene, polybutylene, polyurethanes, TeflonTM, etc.), polysaccharides, nylon or nitrocellulose, resins, silica or silica-based materials including silicon and modified silicon, carbon, metals, inorganic glasses, plastics, etc.
  • the substrates allow optical detection and do not appreciably fluorescese.
  • the substrate is planar, although as will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, other configurations of substrates may be used as well.
  • the probes may be placed on the inside surface of a tube, for flow-through sample analysis to minimize sample volume.
  • the substrate may be flexible, such as a flexible foam, including closed cell foams made of particular plastics.
  • oligonucleotides probes are synthesized on the substrate, as is known in the art.
  • photoactivation techniques utilizing photopolymerization compounds and techniques can be used.
  • the nucleic acids are synthesized in situ, using well known photolithographic techniques, such as those described in WO 95/25116; WO 95/35505; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,700,637 and 5,445,934; and references cited within; these methods of attachment form the basis of the Affymetrix GeneChipTM technology.
  • oligonucleotide probes on the biochip are exposed to or contacted with a nucleic acid sample suspected of containing one or more herpes virus polynucleotides under conditions favouring specific hybridization.
  • Sample extracts of DNA or RNA may be prepared from fluid suspensions of biological materials, or by grinding biological materials, or following a cell lysis step which includes, but is not limited to, lysis effected by treatment with SDS (or other detergents), osmotic shock, guanidinium isothiocyanate and lysozyme.
  • Suitable DNA which may be used in the method of the invention, includes cDNA.
  • RNA may be prepared by any one of a number of commonly used protocols as for example described in Ausubel, et al., 1994, supra, and Sambrook, et al., et al, 1989, supra.
  • Suitable RNA which may be used in the method of the invention, includes messenger RNA, complementary RNA transcribed from DNA (cRNA) or genomic or subgenomic RNA.
  • cRNA complementary RNA transcribed from DNA
  • RNA may be prepared using standard protocols as for example described in the relevant sections of Ausubel, et al. 1994, supra and Sambrook, et al. 1989, supra).
  • cDNA may be fragmented, for example, by sonication or by treatment with restriction endonucleases.
  • cDNA is fragmented such that resultant DNA fragments are of a length greater than the length of the immobilized oligonucleotide probe(s) but small enough to allow rapid access thereto under suitable hybridization conditions.
  • fragments of cDNA may be selected and amplified using a suitable nucleotide amplification technique, as described for example above, involving appropriate random or specific primers.
  • the target HVI marker polynucleotides are detectably labeled so that their hybridization to individual probes can be determined.
  • the target polynucleotides are typically detectably labeled with a reporter molecule illustrative examples of which include chromogens, catalysts, enzymes, fluorochromes, chemiluminescent molecules, bioluminescent molecules, lanthanide ions (e.g., Eu 34 ), a radioisotope and a direct visual label.
  • a reporter molecule illustrative examples of which include chromogens, catalysts, enzymes, fluorochromes, chemiluminescent molecules, bioluminescent molecules, lanthanide ions (e.g., Eu 34 ), a radioisotope and a direct visual label.
  • a direct visual label use may be made of a colloidal metallic or non-metallic particle, a dye 01222 particle, an enzyme or a substrate, an organic polymer, a latex particle, a liposome, or other vesicle containing a signal producing substance and the like.
  • Illustrative labels of this type include large colloids, for example, metal colloids such as those from gold, selenium, silver, tin and titanium oxide.
  • an enzyme is used as a direct visual label
  • biotinylated bases are incorporated into a target polynucleotide. Hybridization is detected by incubation with streptavidin-reporter molecules.
  • Suitable fluorochromes include, but are not limited to, fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC), tetramethylrhodamine isothiocyanate (TRITC), R-Phycoerythrin (RPE), and Texas Red.
  • FITC fluorescein isothiocyanate
  • TRITC tetramethylrhodamine isothiocyanate
  • RPE R-Phycoerythrin
  • Texas Red Texas Red
  • Other exemplary fluorochromes include those discussed by Dower et al. (International Publication WO 93/06121). Reference also may be made to the fluorochromes described in U.S. Patents 5,573,909 (Singer et al), 5,326,692 (Brinkley et al). Alternatively, reference may be made to the fluorochromes described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • fluorescent labels include, for example, fluorescein phosphoramidites such as FluoreprimeTM (Pharmacia), FluorediteTM (Millipore) and FAM (Applied Biosystems International)
  • Radioactive reporter molecules include, for example, 32 P, which can be detected by an X-ray or phosphoimager techniques.
  • the hybrid-forming step can be performed under suitable conditions for hybridizing oligonucleotide probes to test nucleic acid including DNA or RNA.
  • suitable conditions for hybridizing oligonucleotide probes to test nucleic acid including DNA or RNA.
  • whether hybridization takes place is influenced by the length of the oligonucleotide probe and the polynucleotide sequence under test, the pH, the temperature, the concentration of mono- and divalent cations, the proportion of G and C nucleotides in the hybrid-forming region, the viscosity of the medium and the possible presence of denaturants.
  • a hybridization reaction can be performed in the presence of a hybridization buffer that optionally includes a hybridization optimising agent, such as an isostabilising agent, a denaturing agent and/or a renaturation accelerant.
  • a hybridization optimising agent such as an isostabilising agent, a denaturing agent and/or a renaturation accelerant.
  • isostabilising agents include, but are not restricted to, betaines and lower tetraalkyl ammonium salts.
  • Denaturing agents are compositions that lower the melting temperature of double stranded nucleic acid molecules by interfering with hydrogen bonding between bases in a double stranded nucleic acid or the hydration of nucleic acid molecules.
  • Denaturing agents include, but are not restricted to, formamide, formaldehyde, dimethylsulphoxide, tetraethyl acetate, urea, guanidium isothiocyanate, glycerol and chaotropic salts.
  • Hybridization accelerants include heterogeneous nuclear ribonucleoprotein (hnRP) Al and cationic detergents such as cetyltrimethylammonium bromide (CTAB) and dodecyl trimethylammonium bromide (DTAB), polylysine, spermine, spermidine, single stranded binding protein (SSB), phage T4 gene 32 protein and a mixture of ammonium acetate and ethanol.
  • CAB cetyltrimethylammonium bromide
  • DTAB dodecyl trimethylammonium bromide
  • polylysine polylysine
  • spermine spermine
  • spermidine single stranded binding protein
  • SSB single
  • Hybridization buffers may include target polynucleotides at a concentration between about 0.005 nM and about 50 nM, preferably between about 0.5 nM and 5 nM, more preferably between about 1 nM and 2 nM.
  • a hybridization mixture containing the target HVI marker polynucleotides is placed in contact with the array of probes and incubated at a temperature and for a time appropriate to permit hybridization between the target sequences in the target polynucleotides and any complementary probes.
  • Contact can take place in any suitable container, for example, a dish or a cell designed to hold the solid support on which the probes are bound.
  • incubation will be at temperatures normally used for hybridization of nucleic acids, for example, between about 20° C and about 75° C, example, about 25° C, about 30° C, about 35° C, about 40° C, about 45° C, about 50° C, about 55° C, about 60° C, or about 65° C.
  • a sample of target polynucleotides is incubated with the probes for a time sufficient to allow the desired level of hybridization between the target sequences in the target polynucleotides and any complementary probes.
  • the hybridization may be carried out at about 45° C +/-10° C in formamide for 1-2 days.
  • the probes are washed to remove any unbound nucleic acid with a hybridization buffer, which can typically comprise a hybridization optimising agent in the same range of concentrations as for the hybridization step. This washing step leaves only bound target polynucleotides. The probes are then examined to identify which probes have hybridized to a target polynucleotide.
  • a hybridization buffer which can typically comprise a hybridization optimising agent in the same range of concentrations as for the hybridization step. This washing step leaves only bound target polynucleotides.
  • the probes are then examined to identify which probes have hybridized to a target polynucleotide.
  • a signal may be instrumentally detected by irradiating a fluorescent label with light and detecting fluorescence in a fluorimeter; by providing for an enzyme system to produce a dye which could be detected using a spectrophotometer; or detection of a dye particle or a colored colloidal metallic or non metallic • particle using a reflectometer; in the case of using a radioactive label or chemiluminescent molecule employing a radiation counter or autoradiography.
  • a detection means may be adapted to detect or scan light associated with the label which light may include fluorescent, luminescent, focussed beam or laser light.
  • a charge couple device (CCD) or a photocell can be used to scan for emission of light from a probe :target polynucleotide hybrid from each location in the micro-array and record the data directly in a digital computer.
  • electronic detection of the signal may not be necessary. For example, with enzymatically generated color spots associated with nucleic acid array format, visual examination of the array will allow interpretation of the pattern on the array.
  • the detection means is suitably interfaced with pattern recognition software to convert the pattern of signals from the array into a plain language genetic profile.
  • oligonucleotide probes specific for different HVI marker gene products are in the form of a nucleic acid array and detection of a signal generated from a reporter molecule on the array is performed using a 'chip reader'.
  • a detection system that can be used by a 'chip reader' is described for example by Pirrung et al (U.S. Patent No. 5,143,854).
  • the chip reader will typically also incorporate some signal processing to determine whether the signal at a particular array position or feature is a true positive or maybe a spurious signal.
  • Exemplary chip readers are described for example by Fodor et al (U.S. Patent No. 5,925,525).
  • the reaction may be detected using flow cytometry.
  • HVI marker protein levels in biological samples can be assayed using any suitable method known in the art.
  • an HVI marker protein is an enzyme
  • the protein can be quantified based upon its catalytic activity or based upon the number of molecules of the protein contained in a sample.
  • Antibody-based techniques may be employed, such as, for example, immunohisto logical and immunohistochemical methods for measuring the level of a protein of interest in a tissue sample.
  • a primary antibody polyclonal or monoclonal
  • a secondary detection system is used to detect presence (or binding) of the primary antibody.
  • Detectable labels can be conjugated to the secondary antibody, such as a fluorescent label, a radiolabel, or an enzyme (e.g., alkaline phosphatase, horseradish peroxidase) which produces a quantifiable, e.g., colored, product.
  • the primary antibody itself can be detectably labeled.
  • immunohistological labeling of a tissue section is provided.
  • a protein extract is produced from a biological sample (e.g., tissue, cells) for analysis.
  • Such an extract e.g., a detergent extract
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • a protein-specific monoclonal antibody can be used both as an immunoadsorbent and as an enzyme-labeled probe to detect and quantify an HVI marker protein of interest.
  • the amount of such protein present in a sample can be calculated by reference to the amount present in a standard preparation using a linear regression computer algorithm (see Lacobilli et al, 1988, Breast Cancer Research and Treatment 11 : 19-30).
  • two different monoclonal antibodies to the protein of interest can be employed, one as the immunoadsorbent and the other as an enzyme-labeled probe.
  • Protein capture arrays typically comprise a plurality of protein-capture agents each of which defines a spatially distinct feature of the array.
  • the protein-capture agent can be any molecule or complex of molecules which has the ability to bind a protein and immobilise it to the site of the protein-capture agent on the array.
  • the protein-capture agent may be a protein whose natural function in a cell is to specifically bind another protein, such as an antibody or a receptor.
  • the protein-capture agent may instead be a partially or wholly synthetic or recombinant protein which specifically binds a protein.
  • the protein-capture agent may be a protein which has been selected in vitro from a mutagenized, randomized, or completely random and synthetic library by its binding affinity to a specific protein or peptide target.
  • the selection method used may optionally have been a display method such as ribosome display or phage display, as known in the art.
  • the protein- capture agent obtained via in vitro selection may be a DNA or RNA aptamer which specifically binds a protein target (see, e.g., Potyrailo et al, 1998 Anal. Chem. 70:3419-3425; Cohen et at, 1998, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • aptamers are selected from libraries of oligonucleotides by the SelexTM process and their interaction with protein can be enhanced by covalent attachment, through incorporation of brominated deoxyuridine and UV-activated crosslinking (photoaptamers). Aptamers have the advantages of ease of production by automated oligonucleotide synthesis and the stability and robustness of DNA; universal fluorescent protein stains can be used to detect binding.
  • the in vitro selected protein-capture agent may be a polypeptide (e.g., an antigen) (see, e.g., Roberts and Szostak, 1997 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 94:12297-12302).
  • a polypeptide e.g., an antigen
  • An alternative to an array of capture molecules is one made through 'molecular imprinting' technology, in which peptides (e.g., from the C-terminal regions of proteins) are used as templates to generate structurally complementary, sequence-specific cavities in a polymerizable matrix; the cavities can then specifically capture (denatured) proteins which have the appropriate primary amino acid sequence (e.g., available from ProteinPrintTM and Aspira Biosystems).
  • peptides e.g., from the C-terminal regions of proteins
  • the cavities can then specifically capture (denatured) proteins which have the appropriate primary amino acid sequence (e.g., available from ProteinPrintTM and Aspira Biosystems).
  • Exemplary protein capture arrays include arrays comprising spatially addressed antigen-binding molecules, commonly referred to as antibody arrays, which can facilitate extensive parallel analysis of numerous proteins defining a proteome or subproteome.
  • Antibody arrays have been shown to have the required properties of specificity and acceptable background, and some are available commercially (e.g., BD Biosciences, Clontech, BioRad and Sigma).
  • Various methods for the preparation of antibody arrays have been reported (see, e.g., Lopez et al., 2003 J. Chromatogr. B 787:19-27; Cahill, 2000 Trends in Biotechnology 7:47-51; U.S. Pat. App. Pub. 2002/0055186; U.S. Pat. App. Pub.
  • the antigen-binding molecules of such arrays may recognise at least a subset of proteins expressed by a cell or population of cells, illustrative examples of which include growth factor receptors, hormone receptors, neurotransmitter receptors, catecholamine receptors, amino acid derivative receptors, cytokine receptors, extracellular matrix receptors, antibodies, lectins, cytokines, serpins, proteases, kinases, phosphatases, ras-like GTPases, hydrolases, steroid hormone receptors, transcription factors, heat-shock transcription factors, DNA-binding proteins, zinc-finger proteins, leucine-zipper proteins, homeodomain proteins, intracellular signal transduction modulators and effectors, apoptosis-related factors, DNA synthesis factors, DNA repair factors, DNA recombination factors, cell-surface antigens, hepatitis C virus (HCV) proteases and HTV proteases.
  • HCV hepatitis C virus
  • Antigen-binding molecules for antibody arrays are made either by conventional immunisation (e.g., polyclonal sera and hybridomas), or as recombinant fragments, usually expressed in E. coli, after selection from phage display or ribosome display libraries (e.g., available from Cambridge Antibody Technology, Biolnvent, Affitech and Biosite).
  • immunisation e.g., polyclonal sera and hybridomas
  • recombinant fragments usually expressed in E. coli
  • phage display or ribosome display libraries e.g., available from Cambridge Antibody Technology, Biolnvent, Affitech and Biosite.
  • 'combibodies' comprising non-covalent associations of VH and VL domains, can be produced in a matrix format created from combinations of diabody-producing bacterial clones (e.g., available from Domantis).
  • antigen-binding molecules for use as protein-capture agents include monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, Fv, Fab, Fab' and F(ab') 2 immunoglobulin fragments, synthetic stabilized Fv fragments, e.g., single chain Fv fragments (scFv), disulfide stabilized Fv fragments (dsFv), single variable region domains (dAbs) minibodies, combibodies and multivalent antibodies such as diabodies and multi-scFv, single domains from camelids or engineered human equivalents.
  • scFv single chain Fv fragments
  • dsFv disulfide stabilized Fv fragments
  • dAbs single variable region domains minibodies
  • combibodies and multivalent antibodies such as diabodies and multi-scFv, single domains from camelids or engineered human equivalents.
  • Individual spatially distinct protein-capture agents are typically attached to a support surface, which is generally planar or contoured.
  • Common physical supports include glass slides, silicon, microwells, nitrocellulose or PVDF membranes, and magnetic and other microbeads.
  • microdrops of protein delivered onto planar surfaces are widely used, related alternative architectures include CD centrifugation devices based on developments in microfluidics (e.g., available from Gyros) and specialized chip designs, such as engineered microchannels in a plate (e.g., The Living ChipTM, available from Biotrove) and tiny 3D posts on a silicon surface (e.g., available from Zyomyx).
  • microfluidics e.g., available from Gyros
  • chip designs such as engineered microchannels in a plate (e.g., The Living ChipTM, available from Biotrove) and tiny 3D posts on a silicon surface (e.g., available from Zyomyx).
  • Particles in suspension can also be used as the basis of arrays, providing they are coded for identification; systems include color coding for microbeads (e.g., available from Luminex, Bio-Rad and Nanomics Biosystems) and semiconductor nanocrystals (e.g., QDotsTM, available from Quantum Dots), and barcoding for beads (UltraPlexTM, available from Smartbeads) and multimetal microrods (NanobarcodesTM particles, available from Surromed). Beads can also be assembled into planar arrays on semiconductor chips (e.g., available from LEAPS technology and BioArray Solutions).
  • color coding for microbeads e.g., available from Luminex, Bio-Rad and Nanomics Biosystems
  • semiconductor nanocrystals e.g., QDotsTM, available from Quantum Dots
  • barcoding for beads UltraPlexTM, available from Smartbeads
  • NanobarcodesTM particles available
  • individual protein- capture agents are typically attached to an individual particle to provide the spatial definition or separation of the array.
  • the particles may then be assayed separately, but in parallel, in a compartmentalized way, for example in the wells of a microtitre plate or in separate test tubes.
  • a protein sample which is optionally fragmented to form peptide fragments (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. App. Pub. 2002/0055186), is delivered to a protein- capture array under conditions suitable for protein or peptide binding, and the array is washed to remove unbound or non-specifically bound components of the sample from the array.
  • the presence or amount of protein or peptide bound to each feature of the array is detected using a suitable detection system.
  • the amount of protein bound to a feature of the array may be determined relative to the amount of a second protein bound to a second feature of the array. In certain embodiments, the amount of the second protein in the sample is already known or known to be invariant.
  • a protein sample of a first cell or population of cells is delivered to the array under conditions suitable for protein binding.
  • a protein sample of a second cell or population of cells to a second array is delivered to a second array which is identical to the first array. Both arrays are then washed to remove unbound or non-specifically bound components of the sample from the arrays.
  • the amounts of protein remaining bound to the features of the first array are compared to the amounts of protein remaining bound to the corresponding features of the second array.
  • the amount of protein bound to individual features of the first array is subtracted from the amount of protein bound to the corresponding features of the second array.
  • fluorescence labeling can be used for detecting protein bound to the array.
  • the same instrumentation as used for reading DNA microarrays is applicable to protein-capture arrays.
  • capture arrays e.g. antibody arrays
  • fluorescently labeled proteins from two different cell states, in which cell lysates are labeled with different fluorophores (e.g., Cy-3 and Cy-5) and mixed, such that the color acts as a readout for changes in target abundance.
  • Fluorescent readout sensitivity can be amplified 10-100 fold by tyramide signal amplification (TSA) (e.g., available from PerkinElmer Lifesciences).
  • TSA tyramide signal amplification
  • Planar waveguide technology e.g., available from Zeptosens
  • High sensitivity can also be achieved with suspension beads and particles, using phycoerythrin as label (e.g., available from Luminex) or the properties of semiconductor nanocrystals (e.g., available from Quantum Dot).
  • Fluorescence resonance energy transfer has been adapted to detect binding of unlabeled ligands, which may be useful on arrays (e.g., available from Affibody).
  • the techniques used for detection of HVI marker expression products will include internal or external standards to permit quantitative or semi- quantitative determination of those products, to thereby enable a valid comparison of the level or functional activity of these expression products in a biological sample with the corresponding expression products in a reference sample or samples.
  • standards can be determined by the skilled practitioner using standard protocols.
  • absolute values for the level or functional activity of individual expression products are determined.
  • the diagnostic method is implemented using a system as disclosed, for example, in International Publication No. WO 02/090579 and in copending PCT Application No. PCT/AU03/01517 filed November 14, 2003, comprising at least one end station coupled to a base station.
  • the base station is typically coupled to one or more databases comprising predetermined data from a number of individuals representing the level or functional activity of HVI marker expression products, together with indications of the actual status of the individuals (e.g., presence, absence, degree, stage of herpes virus infection or risk of development of herpes virus sequelae) when the predetermined data was collected.
  • the base station is adapted to receive from the end station, typically via a communications network, subject data representing a measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one expression product in a biological sample obtained from a test subject and to compare the subject data to the predetermined data stored in the database(s). Comparing the subject and predetermined data allows the base station to determine the status of the subject in accordance with the results of the comparison.
  • the base station attempts to identify individuals having similar parameter values to the test subject and once the status has been determined on the basis of that identification, the base station provides an indication of the diagnosis to the end station.
  • kits may also optionally include appropriate reagents for detection of labels, positive and negative controls, washing solutions, blotting membranes, microtitre plates dilution buffers and the like.
  • a nucleic acid-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polynucleotide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) a primer or probe that specifically hybridizes to an HVI marker polynucleotide.
  • kits may include enzymes suitable for amplifying nucleic acids including various polymerases (Reverse Transcriptase, Taq, SequenaseTM DNA ligase etc. depending on the nucleic acid amplification technique employed), deoxynucleotides and buffers to provide the necessary reaction mixture for amplification.
  • enzymes suitable for amplifying nucleic acids including various polymerases (Reverse Transcriptase, Taq, SequenaseTM DNA ligase etc. depending on the nucleic acid amplification technique employed), deoxynucleotides and buffers to provide the necessary reaction mixture for amplification.
  • kits also generally will comprise, in suitable means, distinct containers for each individual reagent and enzyme as well as for each primer or probe.
  • a protein-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polypeptide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polynucleotide.
  • kits may optionally include appropriate reagents for detection of labels, positive and negative controls, washing solutions, blotting membranes, microtitre plates dilution buffers and the like.
  • a nucleic acid-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polynucleotide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) a primer or probe that specifically hybridizes to an HVI marker polynucleotide. Also included may be enzymes suitable for amplifying nucleic acids including various polymerases (Reverse Transcriptase, Taq, SequenaseTM DNA ligase etc.
  • kits also generally will comprise, in suitable means, distinct containers for each individual reagent and enzyme as well as for each primer or probe.
  • a protein-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polypeptide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polynucleotide.
  • the kit can also feature various devices and reagents for performing one of the assays described herein; and/or printed instructions for using the kit to quantify the expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide.
  • the present invention also extends to the treatment or prevention of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection, in subjects following positive diagnosis for the risk of development of herpes virus sequelae in the subjects.
  • the treatment will include administering to a positively diagnosed subject an effective amount of an agent or therapy that ameliorates the symptoms or reverses the development of herpes virus infection, or that reduces the potential of the subject to developing herpes virus sequelae.
  • Current agents suitable for treating herpes virus infections include, but are not limited to, acyclovir, famcyclovir, valacyclovir, gancyclovir, pencyclovir, azidothymidine, cytidine arabinoside, ribavirin, amantadine, iododeoxyuridine, poscarnet, trifluoridine, methizazone, vidarabine, levanisole 4-amino- ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethyl-2-ethoxymethy 1- 1 H-imidazo [4, 5 -c] quinoline- 1 -ethanol as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
  • 20020147210 hydroxylated tolans as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20020103262, cyclopropanated carbocyclic 2'-deoxynucleosides as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,840,728, thymidine-analogous antiherpetic drugs as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 6,048,843, Foscarnet (PFA, FoscavirTM from Astra, Sodertlje, Sweden), 5-(E)-bromovinyl uracil analogues and related pyrimidine nucleosides as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
  • 20040053891 l-aryl-4-oxo-l,4-dihydro-3-quinolinecarboxarnides as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20040024209, and spermidine catecholamide iron chelators as disclosed, for example, by Raymond et al. (1984, Biochem. Bioph. Res. Comm., 121(3): 848-854).
  • the subject may be treated using an apparatus, as described for example in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20020099426, which delivers electrical stimulation to an infected skin or mucosa of a patient.
  • the electrical stimulation is applied as a series of electrical pulses having different electrical characteristics.
  • herpes virus infection-relieving agents will be administered in pharmaceutical (or veterinary) compositions together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and in an effective amount to achieve their intended purpose.
  • the dose of active compounds administered to a subject should be sufficient to achieve a beneficial response in the subject over time such as a reduction in, or relief from, the symptoms of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection.
  • the quantity of the pharmaceutically active compounds(s) to be administered may depend on the subject to be treated inclusive of the age, sex, weight and general health condition thereof. In this regard, precise amounts of the active compound(s) for administration will depend on the judgement of the practitioner. In determining the effective amount of the active compound(s) to be administered in the treatment or prevention of herpes virus infection, the physician or veterinarian may evaluate severity of any symptom associated with the presence of herpes virus infection including symptoms related to herpes virus sequelae as mentioned above. In any event, those of skill in the art may readily determine suitable dosages of the herpes virus infection-relieving agents and suitable treatment regimens without undue experimentation.
  • the present invention extends to the management of EHV infection, management of relapse of EHV infection, or prevention of further infection of EHV in subjects following positive diagnosis for the presence, or stage of EHV in the subjects.
  • the management includes isolation to prevent further infection, palliative therapies, and rest to avoid long-term damage.
  • the present invention permits more effective quarantine and management decisions to be made at a time when the animal is infective - veterinarians, owners and trainers armed with this information would be able to isolate these animals until viral shedding had stopped to prevent infection of other horses, especially other pregnant mares.
  • prior art methods merely enable the diagnosis of EHV only after the infectious stage has passed - and are therefore not useful for quarantine decisions.
  • Equine Herpes Virus 1 (EHV-I) infection was induced in thirteen (13) foals in two groups at separate times. Six foals were followed for 20 days and infected (experimentally inoculated) on day 0 (Group 1). Seven (7) foals were followed for 42 days and experimentally inoculated on day 21 (Group 2). AU foals were infected with in vitro cultured EHV-I using nasopharyngeal aerosol. Blood samples from Group 1 were taken at eight time points - Days 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 13 and 20. Blood samples from Group 2 were taken at 16 time points, days 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 13, 20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 31, 34 and 41. The sample at Day 0 acted as a control for each horse.
  • RNA level in the sample from the expression of at least one and desirably at least two HVI marker genes representative transcript sequences of which are set forth in 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113.
  • This provides a level of specificity and sensitivity both equal to 94%.
  • any combination of at least two polynucleotides with any of the other 61 HVI marker polynucleotides listed in Table 1 provides strong diagnostic capacity.
  • RNA is collected from a horse (in a non-agitated state) for the purpose of extraction of high quality RNA or protein.
  • Suitable blood collection tubes for the collection, preservation, transport and isolation of RNA include PAXgeneTM tubes (PreAnalytix Inc., Valencia, CA, USA).
  • blood can be collected into tubes containing solutions designed for the preservation of nucleic acids (available from Roche, Ambion, Invitrogen and ABI).
  • nucleic acids available from Roche, Ambion, Invitrogen and ABI.
  • 50 mL of blood is prevented from clotting by collection into a tube containing 4 mL of 4% sodium citrate.
  • White blood cells and plasma are isolated and stored frozen for later analysis and detection of specific proteins.
  • PAXgene tubes can be kept at room temperature prior to RNA extraction. Clinical signs are recorded in a standard format.
  • a kit available from Qiagen Inc has the reagents and instructions for the isolation of total RNA from 2.5 mL blood collected in the PAXgene Blood RNA Tube. Isolation begins with a centrifugation step to pellet nucleic acids in the PAXgene blood RNA tube. The pellet is washed and resuspended and incubated in optimized buffers together with Proteinase K to bring about protein digestion. An additional centrifugation is carried out to remove residual cell debris and the supernatant is transferred to a fresh microcentrifuge tube. Ethanol is added to adjust binding conditions, and the lysate is applied to the PAXgene RNA spin column. During brief centrifugation, RNA is selectively bound to the silica-gel membrane as contaminants pass through. Remaining contaminants are removed in three efficient wash steps and RNA is then eluted in Buffer BR5.
  • RNA quantity and quality are necessary prior to proceeding and can be achieved using an Agilent Bioanalyzer and Absorbance 260/280 ratio using a spectrophotometer.
  • a kit available from Qiagen Inc has the reagents and instructions for the isolation of total DNA from 8.5 mL blood collected in the PAXgene Blood DNA Tube. Isolation begins with the addition of additional lysis solution followed by a centrifugation step. The pellet is washed and resuspended and incubated in optimized buffers together with Proteinase K to bring about protein digestion. DNA is precipitated using alcohol and an additional centrifugation is carried out to pellet the nucleic acid. Remaining contaminants are removed in a wash step and the DNA is then resuspended in Buffer BG4. [0286] Determination of DNA quantity and quality is necessary prior to proceeding and can be achieved using a spectrophotometer or agarose gel electrophoresis.
  • RNA levels in a tissue sample can be achieved using a variety of technologies. Two common and readily available technologies that are well known in the art are:
  • GeneChipsTM quantitate RNA by detection of labeled cRNA hybridized to short oligonucleotides built on a silicon substrate. Details on the technology and methodology can be found at www.affymetrix.com.
  • RT-PCR Real-Time Polymerase Chain Reaction quantitates RNA using two PCR primers, a labeled probe and a thermostable DNA polymerase. As PCR product is generated a dye is released into solution and detected. Internal controls such as 18S RNA probes are often used to determine starting levels of total RNA in the sample. Each gene and the internal control are run separately. Details on the technology and methods can be found at www.appliedbiosytems.com or www.qiagen.com or www.biorad..com. Applied Biosystems offer a service whereby the customer provides DNA sequence information and payment and is supplied in return all of the reagents required to perform RT-PCR analysis on individual genes.
  • GeneChipTM analysis has the advantage of being able to analyze thousands of genes at a time. However it is expensive and takes over 3 days to perform a single assay. RT- PCR generally only analyzes one gene at a time, but is inexpensive and can be completed within a single day. [0294] RT-PCR is the method of choice for gene expression analysis if the number , of specific genes to be analyzed is less than 20. GeneChipTM or other gene expression analysis technologies (such as Illumina Bead Arrays) are the method of choice when many genes need to be analyzed simultaneously. [0295] The methodology for GeneChipTM data generation and analysis and Real
  • RNA is generated and labeled using biotinylated Uracil (dUTP).
  • biotin-labeled cRNA is cleaned and the quantity determined using a spectrophotometer and MOPS gel analysis.
  • RNA quantity is determined on an Agilent "Lab-on-a-Chip" system (Agilent Technologies).
  • a hybridization cocktail is prepared containing 0.05 ⁇ g/ ⁇ L of labeled and fragmented cRNA, spike-in positive hybridization controls, and the Affymetrix oligonucleotides B2, bioB, bioC, bioD and ere.
  • the dye on the probe array is 'excited' by laser and the image captured by a CCD camera using an Affymetrix Scanner (manufactured by Agilent).
  • the scanner and MAS 5 software generates an image file from a single GeneChip D called a .DAT file (see figure overleaf).
  • the .DAT file is then pre-processed prior to any statistical analysis.
  • Data pre-processing steps include:
  • the .DAT file is an image. The image is inspected manually for artifacts
  • the B2 oligonucleotide hybridization performance is easily identified by an alternating pattern of intensities creating a border and array name.
  • the MAS 5 software used the B2 oligonucleotide border to align a grid over the image so that each square of oligonucleotides was centered and identified.
  • the other spiked hybridization controls are used to evaluate sample hybridization efficiency by reading "present" gene detection calls with increasing signal values, reflecting their relative concentrations.
  • bioB, bioC, bioD and ere are used to evaluate sample hybridization efficiency by reading "present" gene detection calls with increasing signal values, reflecting their relative concentrations.
  • .DAT file is of suitable quality it is converted to an intensity data file (.CEL file) by Affymetrix MAS 5 software).
  • .CEL File Generation [0323] The .CEL files generated by the MAS 5 software from .DAT files contain calculated raw intensities for the probe sets. Gene expression data is obtained by subtracting a calculated background from each cell value. To eliminate negative intensity values, a noise correction fraction based from a local noise value from the standard deviation of the lowest 2% of the background is applied.
  • Some metrics are routinely recommended by Affymetrix and can be determined from Affymetrix internal controls provided as part of the GeneChipTM. Other metrics are based on experience and the processing of many GeneChipsTM.
  • RMA Robust Multi-chip Analysis
  • Affymetrix MAS 5 Algorithm [0331] .CEL files are used by Affymetrix MAS 5 software to normalize or scale the data. Scaled data from one chip are compared to similarly scaled data from other chips.
  • Affymetrix MAS 5 normalization is achieved by applying the default "Global Scaling" option of the MAS 5 algorithm to the .CEL files. This procedure subtracts a robust estimate of the center of the distribution of probe values, and divides by a robust estimate of the probe variability. This produces a set of chips with common location and scale at the probe level.
  • probe weights and target quantiles are established using a long term library of chip .eel files, and are not re-calculated for these specific chips. Again, normalization occurs at the probe level.
  • Real-Time PCR Data Generation Background information for conducting Real-time PCR may be obtained, for example, at http://dorakmt.tripod.com/genetics/realtime.html and in a review by Bustin SA (2000, J MoI Endocrinol 25:169-193).
  • the Primer ExpressTM (ABI) software designs primers with a melting temperature (Tm) of 58-60 D C, and probes with a Tm value of 10° C higher. The Tm of both primers should be equal;
  • the G+C content should ideally be 30-80%. If a higher G+C content is unavoidable, the use of high annealing and melting temperatures, cosolvents such as glycerol, DMSO, or 7-deaza-dGTP may be necessary;
  • the total number of Gs and Cs in the last five nucleotides at the 3' end of the primer should not exceed two (the newer version of the software has an option to do this automatically). This helps to introduce relative instability to the 3' end of primers to reduce non ⁇ specific priming.
  • the primer conditions are the same for SYBR Green assays;
  • the probes should not have runs of identical nucleotides (especially four or more consecutive Gs), G+C content should be 30-80%, there should be more Cs than Gs, and not a G at the 5' end. The higher number of Cs produces a higher ⁇ Rn. The choice of probe should be made first;
  • RNA to cDNA should be done with random hexamers (not with oligo-dT). If oligo-dT has to be used long mRNA transcripts or amplicons greater than two kilobases upstream should be avoided, and 18S RNA cannot be used as normalizer; [0351] 2. Multiplex PCR will only work properly if the control primers are limiting
  • the range of target cDNA used is 10 ng to 1 Dg. IfDNA is used (mainly for allelic discrimination studies), the optimum amount is 100 ng to 1 Dg;
  • the TaqManTM probes ordered from ABI at midi-scale arrive already resuspended at 100 ⁇ M. If a 1/20 dilution is made, this gives a 5 ⁇ M solution. This stock solution should be aliquoted, frozen and kept in the dark. Using 1 ⁇ L of this in a 50 ⁇ L reaction gives the recommended 100 nM final concentration.
  • the primers arrive lyophilized with the amount given on the tube in pmols (such as 150.000 pmol which is equal to 150 nmol). IfX nmol of primer is resuspended in X ⁇ L Of H 2 O, the resulting solution is 1 niM. It is best to freeze this stock solution in aliquots. When the 1 mM stock solution is diluted 1/100, the resulting working solution will be 10 ⁇ M. To get the recommended 50 - 900 nM final primer concentration in 50 ⁇ L reaction volume, 0.25 - 4.50 DL should be used per reaction (2.5 ⁇ L for 500 nM final concentration).
  • the PDAR primers and probes are supplied as a mix in one tube. They have to be used 2.5 ⁇ L in a 50 ⁇ L reaction volume.
  • One-step real-time PCR uses RNA (as opposed to cDNA) as a template. This is the preferred method if the RNA solution has a low concentration but only if singleplex reactions are run. The disadvantage is that RNA carryover prevention enzyme AmpErase cannot be used in one-step reaction format. In this method, both reverse transcriptase and real-time PCR take place in the same tube. The downstream PCR primer also acts as the primer for reverse transcriptase (random hexamers or oligo-dT cannot be used for reverse transcription in one-step RT-PCR).
  • One-step reaction requires higher dNTP concentration (greater than or equal to 300 mM vs 200 mM) as it combines two reactions needing dNTPs in one.
  • a typical reaction mix for one-step PCR by Gold RT-PCR kit is as follows:
  • 10 pg - 100 ng RNA should be used in this reaction. Note that decreasing the amount of template from 100 ng to 50 ng will increase the CT value by 1. To decrease a CT value by 3, the initial amount of template should be increased 8-fold. ABI claims that 2 picograms of RNA can be detected by this system and the maximum amount of RNA that can be used is 1 microgram. For routine analysis, 10 pg - 100 ng RNA and 100 pg - 1 ⁇ g genomic DNA can be used.
  • PCR denaturation 95° C for 15 sec and annealing/extension 60° C for 1 min (repeated 40 times) (On ABI 7700, minimum holding time is 15 seconds.)
  • the recently introduced EZ one-stepTM RT-PCR kit allows the use of UNG as the incubation time for reverse transcription is 60° C thanks to the use of a thermostable reverse transcriptase. This temperature also a better option to avoid primer dimers and non ⁇ specific bindings at 48° C.
  • Rn+ is the Rn value of a reaction containing all components
  • Rn- is the Rn value of an unreacted sample (baseline value or the value detected in NTC).
  • ⁇ Rn is the difference between Rn+ and Rn-. It is an indicator of the magnitude of the signal generated by the PCR.
  • Absolute standard method In this method, a known amount of standard such as in vitro translated RNA (cRNA) is used;
  • cRNA in vitro translated RNA
  • Comparative CT method uses no known amount of standard but compares the relative amount of the target sequence to any of the reference values chosen and the result is given as relative to the reference value (such as the expression level of resting lymphocytes or a standard cell line).
  • AACT Comparative CT Method
  • This method enables relative quantitation of template and increases sample throughput by eliminating the need for standard curves when looking at expression levels relative to an active reference control (normalizer).
  • the dynamic range of both the target and reference should be similar.
  • a sensitive method to control this is to look at how ⁇ CT (the difference between the two CT values of two PCRs for the same initial template amount) varies with template dilution. If the efficiencies of the two amplicons are approximately equal, the plot of log input amount versus ⁇ CT will have a nearly horizontal line (a slope of ⁇ 0.10). This means that both PCRs perform equally efficiently across the range of initial template amounts. If the plot shows unequal efficiency, the standard curve method should be used for quantitation of gene expression.
  • the dynamic range should be determined for both (1) minimum and maximum concentrations of the targets for which the results are accurate and (2) minimum and maximum ratios of two gene quantities for which the results are accurate.
  • the dynamic range is limited to a target-to-competitor ratio of about 10: 1 to 1:10 (the best accuracy is obtained for 1 : 1 ratio).
  • the real-time PCR is able to achieve a much wider dynamic range.
  • the comparative CT method is the most practical method. It is expected that the normalizer will have a higher expression level than the target (thus, a smaller CT value).
  • the calculations for the quantitation start with getting the difference ( ⁇ CT) between the CT values of the target and the normalizer:
  • ⁇ CT CT (target) - CT (normalizer)
  • This value is calculated for each sample to be quantitated (unless, the target is expressed at a higher level than the normalizer, this should be a positive value. It is no harm if it is negative).
  • One of these samples should be chosen as the reference (baseline) for each comparison to be made.
  • the comparative ⁇ CT calculation involves finding the difference between each sample's ⁇ CT and the baseline's ⁇ CT. If the baseline value is representing the minimum level of expression, the ⁇ CT values are expected to be negative (because the ⁇ CT for the baseline sample will be the largest as it will have the greatest CT value). If the expression is increased in some samples and decreased in others, the ⁇ CT values will be a mixture of negative and positive ones. The last step in quantitation is to transform these values to absolute values. The formula for this is:
  • i Magnesium chloride concentration should be between 4 and 7 mM. It is optimized as 5.5 mM for the primers/probes designed using the Primer Express software; [0394] ii. Concentrations of dNTPs should be balanced with the exception of dUTP (if used). Substitution of dUTP for dTTP for control of PCR product carryover requires twice dUTP that of other dNTPs. While the optimal range for dNTPs is 500 ⁇ M to 1 mM (for one-step RT-PCR), for a typical TaqMan reaction (PCR only), 200 ⁇ M of each dNTP (400 ⁇ M of dUTP) is used; [0395] iii.
  • each primer pair should be optimized at three different temperatures (58, 60 and 620 C for TaqMan primers) and at each combination of three concentrations (50, 300, 900 nM).
  • a typical TaqMan reaction consists of 2 min at 50° C for UNG (see below) incubation, 10 min at 95° C for Polymerase activation, and 40 cycles of 15 sec at 95° C (denaturation) and 1 min at 60° C (annealing and extension).
  • a typical reverse transcription cycle (for cDNA synthesis), which should precede the TaqMan reaction if the starting material is total RNA, consists of 10 min at 25°0 C (primer incubation), 30 min at 48° C (reverse transcription with conventional reverse transcriptase) and 5 min at 95° C (reverse transcriptase inactivation);
  • UNG AmpErase uracil-N-glycosylase
  • NAC No Template Controls
  • the passive reference is a dye (ROX) included in the reaction (present in the TaqMan universal PCR master mix). It does not participate in the 5' nuclease reaction. It provides an internal reference for background fluorescence emission. This is used to normalize the reporter-dye signal. This normalization is for non-PCR-related fluorescence fluctuations occurring well-to-well (concentration or volume differences) or over time and different from the normalization for the amount of cDNA or efficiency of the PCR. Normalization is achieved by dividing the emission intensity of reporter dye by the emission intensity of the passive reference. This gives the ratio defined as Rn;
  • TaqMan Universal PCR master mix should be stored at 2 to 8° C (not at -20 0 C);
  • the GAPDH probe supplied with the TaqMan Gold RT-PCR kit is labeled with a JOE reporter dye, the same probe provided within the Pre-Developed TaqManTM Assay Reagents (PDAR) kit is labeled with VIC. Primers for these human GAPDH assays are designed not to amplify genomic DNA; [0405] 12.
  • the carryover prevention enzyme, AmpErase UNG cannot be used with one-step RT-PCR which requires incubation at 48° C but may be used with the EZ RT-PCR kit;
  • RT-PCR can only be used for singleplex reactions, and the only choice for reverse transcription is the downstream primer (not random hexamers or oligo-dT);
  • ABI 7700 can be used not only for quantitative RT-PCR but also end- point PCR. The latter includes presence/absence assays or allelic discrimination assays (such as SNP typing); [0411] 18. Shifting Rn values during the early cycles (cycle 0-5) of PCR means initial disequilibrium of the reaction components and does not affect the final results as long as the lower value of baseline range is reset;
  • the SDS software for ABI 7700 have conflicts with the Macintosh Operating System version 8.1. The data should not be analyzed on such computers; [0417] 24.
  • the ABI 7700 should not be deactivated for extended periods of time. If it has ever been shutdown, it should be allowed to warm up for at least one hour before a run. Leaving the instrument on all times is recommended and is beneficial for the laser. If the machine has been switched on just before a run, an error box stating a firmware version conflict may appear. If this happens, choose the "Auto Download" option; [0418] 25.
  • the ABI 7700 is only one of the real-time PCR systems available, others include systems from BioRad, Cepheid, Corbett Research, Roche and Stratagene.
  • Upstream and downstream PCR primers specific for particular alleles can be designed using freely available computer programs, such as Primer3
  • PCR amplicon is designed to have a restriction enzyme site in one allele but not the other. Primers are generally 18-25 base pairs in length with similar melting temperatures.
  • PCR reactions The composition of PCR reactions has been described elsewhere (Clinical Applications of PCR, Dennis Lo (Editor), Blackwell Publishing, 1998). Briefly, a reaction contains primers, DNA, buffers and a thermostable polymerase enzyme. The reaction is cycled (up to 50 times) through temperature steps of denaturation, hybridization and DNA extension on a thermocycler such as the MJ Research Thermocycler model PTC-96V.
  • a thermocycler such as the MJ Research Thermocycler model PTC-96V.
  • PCR products can be analyzed using a variety of methods including size differentiation using mass spectrometry, capillary gel electrophoresis and agarose gel electrophoresis. If the PCR amplicons have been designed to contain differential restriction enzyme sites, the DNA in the PCR reaction is purified using DNA-binding columns or precipitation and re-suspended in water, and then restricted using the appropriate restriction enzyme. The restricted DNA can then be run on an agarose gel where DNA is separated by size using electric current. Various alleles of a gene will have different sizes depending on whether they contain restriction sites.
  • Table 5 shows genes significantly different following these analyzes ranked according to p value. Again this analysis is based on a two-group comparison with p Values adjusted using Holm's method.
  • the "effect size" (M) in these Tables represents a log value, indicating the fold change of gene expression compared to control. Negative values represent down regulation and positive values indicate up regulation.
  • the t statistic and p value are significance values as described herein.
  • the B statistic is a Bayesian posterior log odds of differential expression.
  • Table 6 shows genes significantly different following these analyzes ranked according to T value. Sign indicates which genes are up and down regulated (negative or positive "Difference" and t values) and the magnitude of the response is indicated by "Difference". Again this analysis is based on a two-group comparison with p Values adjusted using Holm's method.
  • the receiver operator curve was calculated by moving a critical threshold along the axis of the discriminant function scores. Both raw empirical ROCs were calculated, and smoothed ROCs using Lloyd's method (Lloyd, CJ. 1998, Journal of the American Statistical Association 93: 1356-1364). Curves were calculated for the comparison of clinically negative and clinically positive animals. Separate curves were calculated, using gene expression at each day post-infection. The area under the receiver operator curve was calculated by the trapezoidal rule, applied to both the empirical ROC and the smoothed ROC.
  • the ROC provides a useful summary of the diagnostic potential of an assay.
  • a perfect diagnostic assay has a ROC which is a horizontal line passing through the point with sensitivity and specificity both equal to one. The area under the ROC for such a perfect diagnostic is 1.
  • a useless diagnostic assay has a ROC which is given by a 45 degree line through the origin. The area for such an uninformative diagnostic is 0.5.
  • Sensitivity, and selectivity and the areas under the ROC are shown in Table 8, for samples taken 2, 4, 13 and 20 days after infection for Group 1 foals. From these results, there is evidence of strong diagnostic potential at 2 and 4 days after infection (coinciding with the period of maximum clinical signs), but very little evidence of diagnostic potential at 13 or at 20 days.
  • Receiver Operator curves calculated in this way based on shrinkage estimates over the entire set of genes on the chip are conservative - that is, they tend to underestimate the diagnostic potential. Better diagnostic performance should be obtained in operational diagnostics, based on a selected subset of the genes.
  • Group 1 foals were inoculated (experimentally infected) on 18 March 2003.
  • the changes in gene expression index correspond to the presence of clinical signs and precede the rise in specific serum anti-EHV-1 antibodies by 10-14 days.
  • This ability to diagnose herpes virus infection 10-14 days earlier than antibody-based tests, and during the period of demonstrable clinical signs, has practical significance in treatment and management. For example, it is during this period that current drugs are most efficacious, and for many herpes virus infections when animals are most infectious.
  • Figure 7 contains plots of the first four principal components using gene expression for all genes for Group 1 foals. Components are plotted by days after inoculation. It is clear from these plots that the major changes in gene expression are occurring during the 10- day period following inoculation with herpes virus. This period also corresponds to the presence of clinical signs (see Figure 2).
  • EHV-I Ab results it was determined that foal 362 was naturally infected on Day -1 - meaning that a signature ought to be able to be detected anywhere between Day -1 and Day 6. Using the gene classifier, positive (meaning 'infected') results were observed in this foal in Days 0, 2 and 6. No clinical signs were apparent in this animal. Foal 375 was infected around Day 6 on the basis of the serum EHV-I Ab results. Positive classifiers were observed on Days 2, 4 and 6, but again, no clinical signs were apparent. In Foal 366, using the serum EHV-I Ab results, it was determined that this animal was unlikely to be naturally infected until Day 14 - meaning that seroconversion occurred around Day 27 or 28.
  • Group 2 foals have shown that a preliminary classifier developed from Group 1 foals can identify early natural infection with EHV-I in the presence or absence of clinical signs (or any significant changes in hematology and biochemistry).
  • Table 10 shows the cross-validated classification success, sensitivity and specificity obtained from a linear discriminant analysis, based on two genes selected from the set of potential diagnostic genes. The pairs presented are those producing the highest prediction success, many other pairs of genes produce acceptable classification success. The identification of alternate pairs of genes would be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. Techniques for identifying pairs include (but are not limited to) forward variable selection (Venables W.N. and Ripley B.D. Modern Applied Statistics in S 4th Edition 2002. Springer), best subsets selection, backwards elimination (Venables W.N. and Ripley B.D., 2002, supra), stepwise selection (Venables W.N. and Ripley B.D., 2002, supra) and stochastic variable elimination (Figueirodo M.A. Adaptive Sparseness for Supervised Learning).
  • Table 11 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on three genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of three genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on three HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 12 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on four genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of four genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on four HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 13 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on five genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of five genes are presented.
  • Table 14 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on six genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of six genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on six HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 15 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on seven genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of seven genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on seven HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 16 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on eight genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of eight genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on eight HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 17 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on nine genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of nine genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on nine HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 18 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on ten genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets often genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on ten HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 19 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on 20 genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only 20 sets of twenty genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on twenty HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Table 20 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on 30 genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only 20 sets of twenty genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on twenty HVI marker genes can be made.
  • Herpes virus signature was examined by training a classifier on the trial data only and running the classifier over a large gene expression dataset of over 850 GeneChipsTM.
  • Gene expression results in the database were obtained from samples from horses with various diseases and conditions including; clinical, induced acute and chronic EPM, herpes virus infection, degenerative osteoarthritis, stress, Rhodococcus infection, endotoxaemia, laminitis, gastric ulcer syndrome, animals in athletic training and clinically normal animals.
  • Two classifiers were generated. Both were based on the comparison of active viral infection versus clinically normal horses. The first used all the genes on the GeneChipTM. The second used only those genes listed in Table 1.
  • HR heart rate
  • RR respiratory rate
  • Temp rectal temperature
  • PCV packed cell volume (blood)
  • TSP total serum protein
  • Fib fibrinogen
  • WCC white blood cell count
  • Neut neutrophils
  • Lymphs lymphocytes.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention discloses microarray-based methods for the diagnosis of Herpes Virus infection from peripheral blood samples. It discloses the expression of host’s disease-associated genes and their use in assays for diagnosis and assessment of animal with herpes virus infection. This invention allows monitoring of an infected animal’s immune response and thus enables better treatment and management decisions to be made in clinical and sub-clinically affected animals.

Description

Microarray-mediated diagnosis of Herpes Virus infection by monitoring host's differential gene expression upon infection.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
[0001] This invention relates generally to methods and systems for the diagnosis, detection of host response, monitoring, treatment and management of herpes virus infections in mammals. The invention has practical use in the early diagnosis of infection, in the detection of specific immune responses to herpes virus infection (with or without clinical signs), and in enabling better treatment and management decisions to be made in clinically and sub-clinically affected animals. The invention also has practical use in monitoring mammals at risk of developing herpes-related sequelae or relapse of clinical signs following viral latency. Such mammals include, but not be limited to, animals that are immunocompromised (through other disease or administration of therapeutic agents), suffering from chronic fatigue syndrome, stressed, or under athletic training regimens.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION [0002] The herpes viruses represent a large virus family causing widespread disease in man and in domestic and wild animals. There are more than 80 known types of herpes virus, but only eight are known to cause disease in humans. These are divided into three sub-families as shown below.
1. Alpha herpes virinae human herpes virus 1 (HHV-I) human simplex virus 1 (HSV-I) human herpes virus 2 (HHV-2) human simplex virus 2 (HSV-2) human herpes virus 3 (HHV-3) Varicella-Zoster virus (VZV)
2. Beta herpes virinae human herpes virus 5 (HHV-5) cytomegalovirus (CMV) human herpes virus 6 (HHV-6) roseolovirus human herpes virus 7 (HHV-7)
3. Gamma herpes virinae human herpes virus 4 (HHV-4) lymphocryptovirus human herpes virus 8 (HHV-8) rhadinovirus
[0003] Herpes virus infections are widespread and cause diseases of serious economic importance. In fact, most species of mammals become infected with at least one strain of herpes virus early in life. Infection is permanent, and there are no known cures. Anti-viral agents are available as a treatment but are usually applied and/or taken after symptoms develop (when they are least useful) and do not lend themselves for use as a prophylactic due to side effects and cost. Their use is therefore usually restricted to humans. [0004] Current antibody detection-based diagnostic methods only detect antibody well after clinical signs appear and after the patient is infective to other animals. Other methods of detection involve polymerase chain reaction amplification of viral transcripts or viral DNA, virus isolation in tissue culture and/or virus neutralization assays.
[0005] All herpes virus infections are permanent. After a primary infection the virus enters a period of latency. Disease can be reactivated when the patient is immunocompromised or stressed or in advanced athletic training programs. Reactivation of the virus can result in recurrence of symptoms, or general malaise, or decreased exercise tolerance or performance, or it may be asymptomatic.
[0006] Determination of the presence of viral antibodies, antigens, or transcripts does not necessarily correlate with the presence of disease or clinical signs.
[0007] There are few effective vaccines available.
[0008] Drugs are available for treatment but they are costly and for maximum efficacy they need to be given prior to the appearance of major clinical signs.
Epidemiology and clinical manifestations [0009] Herpes viruses cause several clinical manifestations in both normal and immunocompromised hosts. Most episodes of herpes virus infections are asymptomatic and most instances in which herpes is transmitted are from people who are unaware, or remain undiagnosed at the time of an outbreak.
[0010] Fifty to ninety percent of adult humans possess antibodies to HHV-I or human simplex virus type 1 (HSV-I); 20% - 30% of adults possess antibodies to HHV-2 or human simplex virus type 2 (HSV-2). Prevalence is greater in lower socio-economic groups and in sexually promiscuous individuals. HSV-I is usually associated with primary infections of the orofacial area and latent infection of the trigeminal ganglion, while HSV-2 is usually associated with genital infections and latent infection in sacral ganglia. Although both primary and recurrent infections are usually self-limited, HSV can cause serious diseases such as neonatal disseminated herpes, viral encephalitis, and blinding keratitis.
[0011] During acute primary infection, HSV becomes permanently latent in the nerve root ganglia that correspond to the cutaneous or mucous membrane site of inoculation. In orolabial infection, HSV develops latency in the trigeminal ganglia, whereas latency develops in sacral ganglia after genital or anorectal infection. A variety of stimuli, such as ultraviolet light and trauma to the sensory nerve, may reactivate latent HSV. Recurrent lesions occur at or close to the primary site of infection. Recurrence seems to be related to factors which in some way decrease an individual's disease resistance, such as colds or upper respiratory infections, high levels of physical exercise, sun exposure, stress, menses in women, and in some individuals, trigger foods, particularly large quantities of chocolate or peanuts.
[0012] During reactivation, HSV replication occurs within the ganglia, and progeny virions travel peripherally along sensory nerves to the mucosal or epithelial surface innervated by the reactivated ganglion. Active virus replication at the cutaneous surface then produces the clinical signs and lesions typical of recurrent HSV infection (just as is the case with recurrent cold sores in humans infected with HSV).
[0013] "Epstein-Barr virus" (EBV) or HHV-4 is associated with infectious mononucleosis, also known as "glandular fever," as well with oncogenesis (e.g., in Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeocarcinoma). Additionally, EBV is found in immune-suppressed patients and in patients suffering from Hodgkin's disease. EBV occurs worldwide, and most people become infected with EBV sometime during their lives. In the United States, as many as 95% of adults have been infected by the time they are 35-40 years of age. Infants become susceptible to EBV as soon as maternal antibody protection (present at birth) disappears.
[0014] EBV symptoms for infectious mononucleosis include fever, sore throat, and swollen lymph glands. Sometimes, a swollen spleen or liver involvement may develop. Heart problems or involvement of the central nervous system occurs only rarely, and infectious mononucleosis is almost never fatal. Most individuals exposed to people with infectious mononucleosis have previously been infected with EBV and are not at risk for infectious mononucleosis. In addition, transmission of EBV requires intimate contact with the saliva (found in the mouth) of an infected person. Transmission of this virus through the air or blood does not normally occur. The incubation period, or the time from infection to appearance of symptoms, ranges from 4 to 6 weeks. Persons with infectious mononucleosis may be able to spread the infection to others for a period of weeks. However, no special precautions or isolation procedures are recommended, since the virus is also found frequently in the saliva of healthy people. In fact, many healthy people can carry and spread the virus intermittently for life. These people are usually the primary reservoir for person-to-person transmission. For this reason, transmission of the virus is almost impossible to prevent.
[0015] Although the symptoms of infectious mononucleosis usually resolve in 1 or 2 months, Epstein-Barr virus remains dormant or latent in a few cells in the throat and blood for the rest of the person's life. Periodically, the virus can reactivate and is commonly found in the saliva of infected persons. This reactivation usually occurs without overt symptoms of illness but there may be non-specific symptoms such as malaise or poor athletic performance. EBV also establishes a lifelong dormant infection in some cells of the body's immune system. A late event in a very few carriers of this virus is the emergence of Burkitt's lymphoma and nasopharyngeal carcinoma, two rare cancers that are not normally found in the United States. EBV appears to play an important role in these malignancies, but is probably not the sole cause of disease.
[0016] Cytomegalovirus (CMV) or HHV-5 is found universally throughout all geographic locations and socio-economic groups, and infects between 50% and 85% of adults in the United States by 40 years of age. CMV causes infections in the lungs of immune-suppressed persons. In addition, both CMV and EBV are believed to be associated with chronic-fatigue syndrome, a malady that may afflict as many as in six out of every 100,000 people. Infectious CMV may be shed in the bodily fluids of any previously infected person, and thus may be found in urine, saliva, blood, tears, semen, and breast milk. The shedding of virus may take place intermittently, without any detectable signs, and without causing symptoms. Transmission of CMV occurs from person to person. CMV can be sexually transmitted and can also be transmitted via breast milk, transplanted organs, and rarely from blood transfusions. Although the virus is not highly contagious, it has been shown to spread in households and among young children. Transmission of the virus is often preventable because it is most often transmitted through infected bodily fluids that come in contact with hands and then are absorbed through the nose or mouth of a susceptible person. Hence, care should be taken when handling children and items like diapers. Simple hand washing with soap and water is effective in removing the virus from the hands.
[0017] CMV, which may have fewer symptoms than EBV, is always followed by a prolonged, unapparent infection during which the virus resides in cells without causing detectable damage or clinical illness. Severe impairment of the body's immune system by medication or disease consistently reactivates the virus from the latent or dormant state. CMV infection without symptoms is common in infants and young children; therefore, it is unjustified and unnecessary to exclude from school or an institution a child known to be infected. Similarly, hospitalized patients do not need separate or elaborate isolation precautions. Screening children and patients for CMV is of questionable value. The cost and management of such procedures are impractical. Children known to have CMV infection should not be singled out for exclusion, isolation, or special handling. Instead, staff education and effective hygiene practices are advised in caring for all children. Circumstances where CMV may be a problem is pregnancy, people who work with infants and children and those who are immunocompromised. [0018] Varicella-Zoster virus (VZV) or HHV-3 causes chickenpox, typically in children, and is acquired by inhaling virus-containing particles, trapped in tiny droplets released into the air from the nose or throat of an infected person. The virus enters the body by infecting cells in the respiratory tract. From here, it spreads to many other parts of the body, including the skin, where it causes the characteristic rash. Each lesion (spot) progresses through a series of characteristic stages over about a week. Papules and vesicles develop into pustules, which then crust over prior to healing. A prominent feature of chickenpox is the development of several crops of spots, such that at the peak of the illness, 3-4 days after first appearance of the rash, there are lesions at all stages of development, from new vesicles through to crusts.
[0019] The ability of VZV to spread in this way means that chickenpox is very contagious. Virus excretion from the airways begins in the latter part of the incubation period and continues until all the spots have crusted over. Although the skin vesicles contain virus particles, they are not a major source of contagion. Scabs are not infectious. Time-honored interventions designed to minimize fever and discomfort (i.e., antipyretic medicines, cool baths . and soothing lotions) are the mainstay of management.
[0020] Chickenpox is a clinical manifestation of primary infection with VZV. After recovery from primary infection, VZV is not eliminated from the body but rather, the virus lies dormant (latent), often for decades, in the roots of sensory nerves, in the spinal cord. When the infection is reactivated, it causes pain and a rash in the area supplied by the affected sensory nerves. Latent infection may result is an episode of shingles. This usually happens in o^der people, perhaps because, with advancing age, the immune system fails to keep the virus in check. The rash of shingles contains VZV particles, just like the rash of chickenpox. Shingles, therefore, carries a small risk of transmitting chickenpox to someone who has not had chickenpox before. Typically, an infant might acquire chickenpox by very close contact with a grandparent with shingles, but the risk of transmission is low, because VZV is not excreted from the throat during shingles. [0021] Roseolovirus or HHV-6 is associated with "roseola" and "infantum" infections in children and with immunocompromised patients. For example, AIDS patients exhibit HHV-6 infection, although the significance of the HHV-6 infection is unclear. HHV-6 is susceptible to antiviral drugs. It is unclear, however, how antiviral drugs work against HHV-6 or how resistance to such drugs develops. A significant aspect of HHV-6 infection is its putative tie-in with multiple sclerosis and chronic fatigue syndrome, respectively.
[0022] Less is known about HHV-7 and HHV-8 (rhadinovirus). No clear evidence for the direct involvement of HHV-7 in any human disease has been reported. Studies indicate, however, that HHV-7 may be associated with HHV-6-related infections. In a related vein, HHV-8 infection is believed to be associated with Karposi's sarcoma. [0023] In addition, herpes viruses are regarded as an important cause of wastage in the horse industry and a cause of serious compromise to athletic ability. Veterinarians, trainers and owners tend to manage horses with respiratory disease on experience alone because of the lack of clinical guides and laboratory procedures, and because there is little understanding of the relationship between viral and secondary bacterial infection and duration of disease. Alternative diagnosis or assessment procedures are often complex, invasive, inconvenient, expensive, time consuming, may expose an animal to risk of injury from the procedure, and often require transport of the animal to a diagnostic center.
[0024] In a study performed in Western Australia, herpes viruses could be isolated from the blood of 48% of horses with respiratory problems or poor performance. However, herpes viruses could also be isolated from blood of 54% of horses without clinical signs, leading to the conclusion that the presence of the virus in blood cells is not a determinant of disease. Virus isolation from nasal swabs is more indicative of respiratory infection but can only be isolated in 50% of clinical cases. It has been reported that up to 75% of horses in Britain carry the virus.
[0025] Equine rhinopneumonitis and equine abortion are commonly recognized diseases of horses caused by two distinct but antigenically-related viruses that are designated equine herpes virus type 4 (EHV-4) and equine herpes virus type 1 (EHV-I). EHV-I is a cause of epidemic abortion, perinatal mortality, respiratory disease and, occasionally, neurological signs in horses. Abortion is the most dramatic and frightening outcome of EHV-I infection and can be financially disastrous for breeders, with loss of clients and large insurance pay-outs. Respiratory illness caused by EHV-I, or the closely related EHV-4, can adversely affect racing performance.
[0026] The epidemiology of EHV-I infection within the horse industry has been demonstrated by studies performed on studs in the Hunter Valley, Australia where it was demonstrated that foals are often infected with EHV-I before 60 days of age. A separate study performed in the USA showed that 85% of foals had seroconverted by 6-8 months post- weaning. It is believed that foals become infected through exposure to respiratory droplets from mares or cohort foals.
[0027] EHV-I is a DNA alphaherpes virus with a predilection for epithelial cells of the respiratory tract. The virus can be spread around the body to other organs by cells of the immune system. Because the viruses are related antigenically it has not been possible to date by serological examination (blood test), to determine whether a horse has been infected with either or both EHV-4 or EHV-I . For example, if a horse had been infected with EHV-4 as a foal it would develop antibodies in its serum that would react not only to EHV-4 but EHV-I as well, so one would not know that such a foal had been infected with only EHV-4. EHV-4 has only been demonstrated to cause respiratory illness, whereas EHV-I also causes neurological and reproductive disorders (Wilcox and Raidal, 2000, "Role of viruses in respiratory disease" RIRDC Publication No 00/146, RIRDC Project No UMU-22A; Dunowska et al, 2002, New Zealand Veterinary Journal 50(4): 132-139; Dunowska et al, 2002, New Zealand Veterinary Journal 50(4):140-147).
[0028] EHV-I has been shown to have a persistent, lifelong latent, infection where reactivation causes further spells of respiratory disease in the horse. However, a far more serious consequence for other horses infected by contact with the first horse (index case) occurs on breeding farms when a pregnant mare in a paddock reactivates the virus and transmits it to other in-contact pregnant mares. The index case mare may herself abort or cause abortion in one or more in contact mares. An aborted fetus and the fetal membranes and fluids are heavily infected with EHV-I and contaminate the site where abortion occurs. Other mares in the paddock, being naturally curious, come to the site of abortion and sniff the fetus and membranes. In this way, often close to 100% of the mares in the paddock become infected and abort within 10 or 20 days causing what is commonly known as an "abortion storm". Such outbreaks of EHV-I abortion are of considerable economic importance to the equine, particularly Thoroughbred and Standardbred, industries worldwide.
Immunity and diagnosis
[0029] Herpes viruses induce a strong humoral antibody response, although the effectiveness of this response in protecting the host is questionable. Protection ultimately is afforded through cell-mediated mechanisms, such as cytotoxic lymphocytes and natural killer cells. One of the key features of herpes virus infection is life-long persistent infection and latency. The virus remains in the cell nucleus and can be isolated from many organs long after clinical signs have abated. Thus, where a patient presents with non-descript clinical signs, such as poor performance or malaise, virus can be isolated from tissues but it is not clear that activation of the virus is the cause of the symptoms. Stress or other factors can lead to activation of the dormant virus and concomitant clinical signs (Walker et al, 1999, Veterinary Microbiology 68:3-13).
[0030] Infection with HSV-I or HSV-2 induces cell-mediated immunity and the production of type-common and type-specific antibodies. Although these immune mechanisms apparently do not affect the development of HSV latency or the frequency of recurrences, they may modulate the severity of clinical recurrences and reduce HSV replication once reactivation occurs.
[0031] The host immune response elicited by HSV-I or HSV-2 infection appears to provide partial protection against subsequent infection with HSV, as resistance to autologous infection is usually observed in HSV-infected individuals. Additionally, persons with HSV infection usually have a more mild clinical illness when infected with the alternate HSV type as compared with persons with no prior HSV infection. [0032] HSV is the most frequently detected virus in diagnostic laboratories. Diagnosis can be made by virus isolation, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (Espy et al, 2000, J Clin Microbiol. 38(2):795-799) and histopathology. None of these methods are useful in the control and monitoring of the disease. Other laboratory tests available for diagnosis include specially treated scrapings that are examined under the microscope, and blood tests for antibodies. Some tests are only valid in the early stages, and more than one of these tests may be required to confirm the presence of herpes. Genital herpes can be mistaken for other diseases, including syphilis. High serum antibody levels are also an indication of a recent infection. If a person does experience visible symptoms, a culture test within the first 48 hours after symptoms appear is recommended. Beyond 48 hours, there is a risk of receiving a false negative test result because symptoms may have begun to heal and there is not enough virus left on the skin to culture.
[0033] Blood tests can be used when a person has no visible symptoms but has concerns about having herpes. Blood tests do not actually detect the virus; instead, they look for antibodies (the body's immune response) but 50 to 90% of humans have positive antibodies in the blood. There are currently two blood tests available that can give accurate results for herpes. Like any blood test, these tests cannot determine whether the site of infection is oral or genital. However, since most cases of genital herpes are caused by HSV-2, a positive result for type-2 antibodies most likely indicates genital herpes. For the most accurate result; it is recommended to wait at least 12 - 16 weeks from the last possible exposure to herpes to allow enough time for antibodies to develop.
[0034] The clinical diagnosis of EBV and infectious mononucleosis is suggested on the basis of the symptoms of fever, sore throat, swollen lymph glands, and the age of the patient. Usually, laboratory tests are needed for confirmation. Serologic results for persons with infectious mononucleosis include an elevated white blood cell count, an increased percentage of certain atypical white blood cells, and a positive reaction to a "mono spot" test.
[0035] Clinical diagnosis of CMV is by the enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (or ELISA), a serologic test for measuring antibodies. The result can be used to determine if acute infection, prior infection, or passively acquired maternal antibody in an infant is present. Other tests include various fluorescence assays, indirect hemagglutination, and latex agglutination.
[0036] Diagnosis of EHV is based on respiratory symptoms i.e. cough or nasal discharge. However, it is important to distinguish between respiratory bacterial or viral infections; exercise induced pulmonary hemorrhage and allergy. Cost of misdiagnosis is large. Costs to owners to diagnose the condition include transport, veterinary advice and pathology tests. Respiratory disease can kill quickly, create life-long disability, impede performance or require long periods of rest. Horses in an active carrier state can re-infect other animals.
[0037] Using the horse industry as an example, there is a need for accurate, type- specific serological surveillance of horses for the presence of EHV-4 and/or EHV-I antibodies to assist in our understanding of the epidemiology of these viruses, particularly EHV-I. EHV-I infections are difficult to diagnose and treat, and any useful information on how to manage horses with the disease would be welcomed by the industry. Presently, however, EHV-I or EHV-4 antibodies in polyclonal serum cannot be differentiated because of the extensive antigenic cross-reactivity between the two viruses. The availability of such a specific serological test would also have profound implications in the control, perhaps eradication, of EHV-I and in the selection of candidate horses for vaccination. Although there is a short lived period following infection when horses are protected against EHV-I there is generally not a sufficiently high level of long-term immunity to consistently protect against EHV-I disease. Horses can therefore be re-infected several times during their lifetime, and vaccination strategies are complicated by the ability of herpes viruses to establish a lifelong latent infection in the host animal.
[0038] There is no vaccine that prevents HSV disease from occurring. Although several protein subunit vaccines based on HSV-2 envelope glycoproteins have reached advanced-phase clinical trials. These antigens were chosen because they are the targets of neutralizing-antibody responses and because they elicit cellular immunity.
[0039] Oral anti-viral medications such as acyclovir, famcyclovir, or valacyclovir have been developed to effectively treat herpes infections. These medications can be used to treat an outbreak or can be used for suppressing herpes recurrences. Lower doses may be helpful in reducing the number of herpes attacks in people with frequent outbreaks. Gancyclovir, penciclovir and acyclovir are effective inhibitors of herpes simplex virus types 1 (HSV-I) and 2 (HSV-2). This antiviral therapy is expensive and needs to be given upon onset of the earliest clinical signs. These antiviral therapies are based on the use of suicide genes, such as the thymidine kinase gene. The efficacies of gancyclovir, pencyclovir and acyclovir in inducing cell death in the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (HSVTK) system have been compared (Shaw et al. 2001, Antivir Chem Chemother. 12(3):175-86.). All compounds delay growth or reduced viability of HSVTK-transformed cells.
[0040] There is no specific treatment for EBV and infectious mononucleosis, other than treating the symptoms. No antiviral drugs or vaccines are available. Some physicians have prescribed a 5-day course of steroids to control the swelling of the throat and tonsils. The use of steroids has also been reported to decrease the overall length and severity of illness, but these reports have not been published. Finally, even when EBV antibody tests, such as the early antigen test, suggest that reactivated infection is present, this result does not necessarily indicate that a patient's current medical condition is caused by EBV infection. A number of healthy people with no symptoms have antibodies to the EBV early antigen for years after their initial EBV infection. [0041] Currently, no treatment exists for CMV infection in the healthy individual.
Antiviral drug therapy is now being evaluated in infants. Gancyclovir treatment is used for patients with depressed immunity and who have either sight-related or life-threatening illnesses. Vaccines are still in the research and development stage.
[0042] Chickenpox is not usually treated with a specific antiviral compound owing to its short duration and generally mild, uncomplicated nature. Some doctors believe that antiviral medication may be appropriate for older patients, in whom the disease tends to be more severe. A vaccine for chicken pox (varicella vaccine) has been available since 1995. Studies show that the varicella vaccine is 85% effective in preventing disease. The vaccine may be beneficial to non-immune adults, in particular those at high risk, for example child care and health workers. Because most adults are immune, checking serological status before vaccination is recommended.
[0043] ' The principal challenge in the management of shingles is rapid resolution of pain. Four factors independently increase the risk of persistent pain: advancing age, severe or moderately severe pain at the time the rash appears (called acute pain), pain before the rash appears (called prodromal pain) and failure to obtain adequate antiviral treatment within three days of appearance of the rash. Pain, particularly persistent pain, is thought to be largely the result of virus-induced damage to the affected nerve. The rationale behind the use of antiviral agents is simple: by stopping virus replication as quickly as possible, nerve damage is minimized. Shingles does respond to oral anti-viral medications, namely acyclovir, famciclovir and valacyclovir.
[0044] Early identification of EHV-I infection, especially viral abortion, is important in managing horses so that cyclic re-infection of susceptible horses and relapse do not occur. The cost of EHV infection to the horse industry is large through lost training days, re¬ infection and recurrent illness, abortions and poor performance. Treatment largely depends on accurate diagnosis. Vaccines are available that elicit strong humoral immune responses, but these are not fully protective. Breakthrough infections commonly occur in vaccinated animals. Despite the availability of vaccines it is generally known that they afford little protection, and breakthrough infections commonly occur in vaccinated animals. Antibiotic treatment only prevents secondary bacterial infection. [0045] Currently, methods for diagnosing herpes virus and associated diseases in the blood are based on antibody-antigen quantitation or detection of viral genetic information (e.g., by polymerase chain reaction). For example, U.S. Patent 6,506,553 describes an assay for diagnosis of EBV and associated diseases by detecting antigen antibodies in a blood sample. The assay detects IgG and IgM antibodies to the diffuse (EA-D) and restricted (EA-R) components of the early antigen of EBV in blood, and more specifically in serum. This assay can be used for diagnosis of EBV-associated disease; such as infectious mononucleosis (IM) for example, and can also be utilized to distinguish between individuals in the acute versus the convalescent phase of disease. However this patent describes a method for the detection of early antigen antibodies, not virus or immune reaction to the virus.
[0046] U.S. Patent 6,537,555 describes a composition and method for the diagnosis and treatment of HSV infection based on the detection of HSV antigens. This patent, however, does not describe a method for the detection of virus or immune reaction to the virus.
[0047] International Publication WO 99/45155 describes a method for gene expression and molecular diagnostic approaches for the amplification and detection of EBV nucleic acid, in particular RNA-specific sequences. This method is specifically suited for the detection of late stage infection of EBV gene expression in circulating peripheral blood cells, in human (tumour) tissue samples and thin sections thereof using "in solution" amplification or "in situ" amplification techniques and in other biological samples potentially containing EBV- infected cells. However, this method only detects viral transcripts and is most suitable for late stage disease diagnosis. It also does not detect the immune reaction to viral infection, which causes the earliest symptoms of malaise, fever and swollen lymph nodes.
[0048] U.S. Patent Application Publication 20040072147 discloses the use of a probe oligonucleotide and at least two primer oligonucleotides for selectively directing the amplification of the target segment of a particular herpes virus type or strain including: HSV-I, drug resistant HSV-I, HSV-2, drug resistant HSV-2, VZV, EBV (HHV-4a and HHV-4b), CMV, lymphocryptovirus (HHV-6a, HHV-6b), HHV-7, and rhadinovirus (HHV-8). However, this method does not provide any insight into the stage of disease or when the animal was infected, or whether the disease is active.
[0049] U.S. Patent 6,193,983 describes a method for detecting EHV-4 and EHV-I type-specific glycoproteins for clinical applications associated with the characterization of such glycoproteins. This method detects specific antibodies to EHV-I and EHV-4 but it is well known that most horses are exposed to these viruses at an early age and antibody titres persist for some time. Thus, this method provides no insight into the stage of disease or when the animal was infected, or whether the disease is active.
[0050] In summary, infection with various strains of herpes virus is a widespread phenomenon in the community and causes disease of serious economic importance. Most humans and domestic animals become infected with at least one strain of herpes virus at an early age and the infection is life-long. Herpes viruses enter a stage of latency and can be reactivated causing a recurrence of symptoms. Often reactivation of the virus can be asymptomatic, but can manifest as malaise or as non-specific symptoms such as low grade fever, lethargy, chronic fatigue, poor exercise tolerance, or poor athletic performance. Physiological stress (such as heavy exercise, concurrent disease, mental stress), or where the immune system is compromised (for example HTV infection, immunosuppressive therapy) can lead to reactivation of herpes viruses leading to chronic symptoms of infection. For these reasons, it is often important to monitor herpes virus infections, especially in immunocompromised patients or elite athletes. Current antibody-based diagnostic methods do not lend themselves to monitoring herpes virus infections because they measure serum antibodies that become elevated 7-14 days following infection and remain elevated due to viral latency. Other current diagnostic methods, such as virus isolation and PCR, do not lend themselves to monitoring as they are laborious or the viral genome is not consistently present in blood cells. Results derived from current diagnostic methods do not correlate with the timing of onset of clinical signs. For example, antibodies can first be detected 10-14 days following initial infection and persist for long periods. A single antibody measurement does not indicate when infection occurred or the level of disease activity and measuring viral transcripts or viral proteins also does not indicate the level of disease activity. The immune system of the host is ultimately responsible for protection from viral invasion. It is the immune response, rather than the virus itself, that is responsible for clinical signs of disease. A more appropriate monitoring tool for herpes virus infection would be one that measured specific host immune reactions to infection.
[0051] As such, there currently exists a need for more effective modalities for diagnosing herpes virus infections, for determining active herpes virus infection through host immune response, and for identifying animals amenable to treatment or prophylactic therapy with antiviral agents. Primary infection leads to latent infection in all cases and, as such, there is often the risk of relapse in immunocompromised patients. In such cases, symptoms may or may not be evident, detectable or communicable. Accordingly, there is currently a need for better processes and reagents for assessing and monitoring mammals at risk of herpes virus infection and/or relapse. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0052] The present invention discloses methods and systems for detecting herpes virus infections, especially active herpes virus infections. A predictive set of genes in cells of the immune system for herpes virus infection has been identified and is described. These genes and their gene products can be used in gene expression assays, protein expression assays, whole cell assays, and in the design and manufacture of therapies. They can also be used to determine infection in animals with or without clinical signs of disease. It is proposed that such assays, when used frequently as an indicator of response to viral activity, will lead to better management decisions and treatment regimes including use with elite athletes or immunocompromised patients.
[0053] The present invention represents a significant advance over current technologies for the management of affected animals. In certain advantageous embodiments, it relies upon measuring the level of certain markers in cells, especially circulating leukocytes, of the host rather than detecting viral products or anti-viral antibodies. As such, these methods are suitable for widespread screening of symptomatic and asymptomatic animals. In certain embodiments where circulating leukocytes are the subject of analysis, the detection of a host response to herpes virus infection, especially infection with EHV, is feasible at very early stages of its progression, before herpes virus-specific antibodies can be detected in serum.
[0054] Thus, the present invention addresses the problem of diagnosing herpes virus infection by detecting a host response to herpes virus that may be measured in host cells.
Advantageous embodiments involve monitoring the expression of certain genes in peripheral leukocytes of the immune system, which may be reflected in changing patterns of RNA levels or protein production that correlate with the presence of herpes virus infection.
[0055] Accordingly, in one aspect, the present invention provides methods for diagnosing the presence of a herpes virus infection, particularly an active herpes virus infection, in a test subject, especially in an equine test subject. These methods generally comprise detecting in the test subject aberrant expression of at least one gene (also referred to herein as an "herpes virus infection marker gene" or an "HVI marker gene") selected from the group consisting of: (a) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 (see Table 1), or a complement thereof; (b) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 (see Table 1); (c) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ IDNO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions. In accordance with the present invention, these HVI marker genes are aberrantly expressed in animals with a herpes virus infection or a condition related to herpes virus infection, illustrative examples of which include immune suppression, stress, intense athletic training, concurrent infections and idiopathic conditions. [0056] As used herein, polynucleotide expression products of HVI marker genes are referred to herein as "herpes virus infection marker polynucleotides" or "HVI marker polynucleotides." Polypeptide expression products of HVI marker genes are referred to herein as "herpes virus infection marker" or "HVI marker polypeptides."
[0057] Thus, in some embodiments, the methods comprise detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 , or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions. [0058] In other embodiments, the methods comprise detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker polypeptide selected from the group consisting of: (i) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (ii) a polypeptide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; (iii) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 30% similarity with at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; and (iv) a polypeptide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence and is immuno-interactive with an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno- interactive with a sequence of (i), (ii) or (iii). [0059] Typically, such aberrant expression is detected by: (1) measuring in a biological sample obtained from the test subject the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least one HVI marker gene and (2) comparing the measured level or functional activity of each expression product to the level or functional activity of a corresponding expression product in a reference sample obtained from one or more normal subjects or from one or more subjects lacking disease (e.g., subjects lacking active infection), wherein a difference in the level or functional activity of the expression product in the biological sample as compared to the level or functional activity of the corresponding expression product in the reference sample is indicative of the presence of an herpes virus infection or related condition in the test subject. In some embodiments, the methods further comprise diagnosing the presence, stage or degree of an herpes virus infection or related condition in the test subject when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is different than the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product. In these embodiments, the difference typically represents an at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%, or even an at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000% increase, or an at least about 10%, 20%, 30% 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even an at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999% decrease in the level or functional activity of an individual expression product as compared to the level or functional activity of an individual corresponding expression product., which is hereafter referred to as "aberrant expression." In illustrative examples of this type, the presence of an herpes virus infection or related condition is determined by detecting a decrease in the level or functional activity of at least one HVI marker polynucleotide selected from (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 6, 10, 19, 24, 25, 29, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 41, 53, 57, 61, 63, 65, 66, 73, 77, 83, 89, 93, 94, 96, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 11, 20, 30, 36, 42, 54, 58, 62, 64, 74, 78, 90, 95, 97, 103 or 105; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 11, 20, 30, 36, 42, 54, 58, 62, 64, 74, 78, 90, 95, 97, 103 or 105, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions.
[0060] In other illustrative examples, the presence of an herpes virus infection or related condition is determined by detecting an increase in the level or functional activity of at least one HVI marker polynucleotide selected from (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 13, 15, 17, 21, 23, 26, 27, 31, 39, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 55, 59, 67, 69, 71, 75, 76, 79, 81, 85, 87, 91, 98, 99109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 14, 16, 18, 22, 28, 32, 40, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 60, 68, 70, 72, 80, 82, 86, 88, 92, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 14, 16, 18, 22, 28, 32, 40, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 60, 68, 70, 72, 80, 82, 86, 88, 92, 110, 112 or 114 wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions.
[0061] In some embodiments, the method further comprises diagnosing the absence of an herpes virus infection or related condition when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is the same as or similar to the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product. In these embodiments, the measured level or functional activity of an individual expression product varies from the measured level or functional activity of an individual corresponding expression product by no more than about 20%, 18%, 16%, 14%, 12%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1% or 0.1%, which is hereafter referred to as "normal expression.".
[0062] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77 or 78 HVI marker polynucleotides. For example, the methods may comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an HVI marker polynucleotide either alone or in combination with as much as 77, 76, 75, 74, 73, 72, 71, 70, 69, 68, 67, 66, 65, 64, 63, 62, 61, 60, 59, 58, 57, 56, 55, 54, 53, 52, 51, 50, 49, 48, 47, 46, 45, 44, 43, 42, 41, 40, 39, 38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, 29, 28, 27, 26, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 other HVI marker polynucleotide(s). In another example, the methods may comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an HVI marker polypeptide either alone or in combination with as much as 77, 76, 75, 74, 73, 72, 71, 70, 69, 68, 67, 66, 65, 64, 63, 62, 61, 60, 59, 58, 57, 56, 55, 54, 53, 52, 51, 50, 49, 48, 47, 46, 45, 44, 43, 42, 41, 40, 39, 38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 31, 30, 29, 28,
27, 26, 25, 24, 23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 other HVI marker polypeptides(s). In illustrative examples of this type, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 or 17 HVI marker genes that have a very high correlation (p<0.00001)with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level one correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25 or 26, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20 or 22; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20 or 22 wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions.
[0063] In other illustrative examples, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 20 or 21 HVI marker genes that have a high correlation
(p<0.0001)with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level two correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61 or 63, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62 or 64; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62 or 64, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions.
[0064] In still other illustrative examples, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15 HVI marker genes that have a medium correlation (p<0.0003) with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level three correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85 or 87, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86 or 88; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86 or 88, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions. [0065] In still other illustrative examples, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 or 17 herpes virus infection marker genes that have a moderate correlation (p<0.06) with the presence or risk of an herpes virus infection or related condition (hereafter referred to as "level four correlation HVI marker genes"), representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions,
[0066] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes.
[0067] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level three correlation HVI marker genes.
[0068] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level one correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level one correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
[0069] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level three correlation HVI marker genes.
[0070] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level four correlation HVI marker genes. [0071] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level five correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level two correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level five correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level five correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level five correlation BTVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level five correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level two correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level five correlation HVI marker genes. [0072] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level three correlation HVI marker genes and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level three correlation HVI marker gene and the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
[0073] In some embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 1 level four correlation HVI marker gene. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 2 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 3 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 4 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 5 level four correlation HVI marker genes. In still other embodiments, the methods comprise measuring the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least 6 level four correlation HVI marker genes.
[0074] Advantageously, the biological sample comprises blood, especially peripheral blood, which suitably includes leukocytes. Suitably, the expression product is selected from a RNA molecule or a polypeptide. In some embodiments, the expression product is the same as the corresponding expression product. In other embodiments, the expression product is a variant (e.g., an allelic variant) of the corresponding expression product.
[0075] In certain embodiments, the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target RNA (e.g., mRNA) or a DNA copy of the target RNA whose level is measured using at least one nucleic acid probe that hybridizts under at least low, medium, or high stringency conditions to the target RNA or to the DNA copy, wherein the nucleic acid probe comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of an HVI marker polynucleotide. In these embodiments, the measured level or abundance of the target RNA or its DNA copy is normalized to the level or abundance of a reference RNA or a DNA copy of the reference RNA that is present in the same sample. Suitably, the nucleic acid probe is immobilized on a solid or semi-solid support. In illustrative examples of this type, the nucleic acid probe forms part of a spatial array of nucleic acid probes. In some embodiments, the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by hybridization (e.g., using a nucleic acid array). In other embodiments, the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by nucleic acid amplification (e.g., using a polymerase chain reaction (PCR)). In still other embodiments, the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by nuclease protection assay.
[0076] In other embodiments, the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target polypeptide whose level is measured using at least one antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with the target polypeptide. In these embodiments, the measured level of the target polypeptide is normalized to the level of a reference polypeptide that is present in the same sample. Suitably, the antigen-binding molecule is immobilized on a solid or semi-solid support. In illustrative examples of this type, the antigen-binding molecule forms part of a spatial array of antigen-binding molecule. In some embodiments, the level of antigen-binding molecule that is bound to the target polypeptide is measured by immunoassay (e.g., using an ELISA). [0077] In still other embodiments, the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target polypeptide whose level is measured using at least one substrate for the target polypeptide with which it reacts to produce a reaction product. In these embodiments, the measured functional activity of the target polypeptide is normalized to the functional activity of a reference polypeptide that is present in the same sample.
[0078] In some embodiments, a system is used to perform the diagnostic methods as broadly described above, which suitably comprises at least one end station coupled to a base station. The base station is suitably caused (a) to receive subject data from the end station via a communications network, wherein the subject data represents parameter values corresponding to the measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one expression product in the biological sample, and (b) to compare the subject data with predetermined data representing the measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one corresponding expression product in the reference sample to thereby determine any difference in the level or functional activity of the expression product in the biological sample as compared to the level or functional activity of the corresponding expression product in the reference sample. Desirably, the base station is further caused to provide a diagnosis for the presence, absence or degree of Herpes virus infection-related conditions. In these embodiments, the base station may be further caused to transfer an indication of the diagnosis to the end station via the communications network.
[0079] In another aspect, the invention contemplates use of the methods broadly described above in the monitoring, treatment and management of animals with conditions that can lead to Herpes virus infection, illustrative examples of which include immunosuppression, new-boras, stress or intensive athletic training regimens. In these embodiments, the diagnostic methods of the invention are typically used at a frequency that is effective to monitor the early development of an herpes virus infection or related condition to thereby enable early therapeutic intervention and treatment of that condition.
[0080] In another aspect, the present invention provides methods for treating, preventing or inhibiting the development of an herpes virus infection or related condition in a subject. These methods generally comprise detecting aberrant expression of at least one HVI marker gene in the subject, and administering to the subject an effective amount of an agent that treats or ameliorates the symptoms or reverses or inhibits the development of the infection or related condition in the subject. Representative examples of such treatments or agents include but are not limited to, antibiotics, steroids and anti-inflammatory drugs, intravenous fluids, vasoactives, palliative support for damaged or distressed organs (e.g. oxygen for respiratory distress, fluids for hypovolemia) and close monitoring of vital organs. [0081] In another aspect, the present invention provides isolated polynucleotides, referred to herein as "HVI marker polynucleotides," which are generally selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of that sequence or complement; (c) a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the sequence of (a) or (b) or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium or high stringency conditions; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a portion of any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of that sequence or complement and hybridizes to a sequence of (a), (b) or (c), or a complement thereof, under at least low, medium or high stringency conditions.
[0082] In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a nucleic acid construct comprising a polynucleotide as broadly described above in operable connection with a regulatory element, which is operable in a host cell. In certain embodiments, the construct is in the form of a vector, especially an expression vector.
[0083] In still another aspect, the present invention provides isolated host cells containing a nucleic acid construct or vector as broadly described above. In certain advantageous embodiments, the host cells are selected from bacterial cells, yeast cells and insect cells.
[0084] In still another aspect, the present invention provides probes for interrogating nucleic acid for the presence of a polynucleotide as broadly described above. These probes generally comprise a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under at least low stringency conditions to a polynucleotide as broadly described above. In some embodiments, the probes consist essentially of a nucleic acid sequence which corresponds or is complementary to at least a portion of a nucleotide sequence encoding the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length. In other embodiments, the probes comprise a nucleotide sequence which is capable of hybridizing to at least a portion of a nucleotide sequence encoding the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 under at least low, medium or high stringency conditions, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length. In still other embodiment, the probes comprise a nucleotide sequence that is capable of hybridizing to at least a portion of any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 under at least low, medium or high stringency conditions, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length. Representative probes for detecting the HVI marker polynucleotides according to the resent invention are set forth in SEQ ID NO: 145 - 2150 (see Table 2).
[0085] In a related aspect, the invention provides a solid or semi-solid support comprising at least one nucleic acid probe as broadly described above immobilized thereon. In some embodiments, the solid or semi-solid support comprises a spatial array of nucleic acid probes immobilized thereon.
[0086] In a further aspect, the present invention provides isolated polypeptides, referred to herein as "HVI marker polypeptides," which are generally selected from: (i) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence similarity with a polypeptide expression product of an HVI marker gene as broadly described above, for example, especially an HVI marker gene that comprises a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% (and at least 51% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113; (ii) a portion of the polypeptide according to (i) wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of that polypeptide; (iii) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 30% similarity (and at least 31% to at least 99% and all integer percentages in between) with at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of the polypeptide according to (i); and (iv) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that is immuno-interactive with an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno- interactive with a sequence of (i), (ii) or (iii).
[0087] Still a further aspect of the present invention provides an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polypeptide as broadly described above.
[0088] In a related aspect, the invention provides a solid or semi-solid support comprising at least one antigen-binding molecule as broadly described above immobilized thereon. In some embodiments, the solid or semi-solid support comprises a spatial array of antigen-binding molecules immobilized thereon. [0089] Still another aspect of the invention provides the use of one or more HVI marker polynucleotides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more probes as broadly described above, or the use of one or more HVI marker polypeptides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more antigen-binding molecules as broadly described above, in the manufacture of a kit for diagnosing the presence of an Herpes virus infection-related condition in a subject.
[0090] The aspects of the invention are directed to the use of the diagnostic methods as broadly described above, or one or more HVI marker polynucleotides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more probes as broadly described above, or the use of one or more HVI marker polypeptides as broadly described above, or the use of one or more antigen-binding molecules as broadly described above, for diagnosing an Herpes virus infection-related condition animals (vertebrates), mammals, non-human mammals, animals, such as horses involved in load bearing or athletic activities (e.g., races) and pets (e.g., dogs and cats).
[0091] The aspects of the invention are directed to animals (vertebrates), mammals, non-human mammals, animals, such as horses involved in load bearing or athletic activities (e.g., races) and pets (e.g., dogs and cats).
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0092] Figure 1 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve for inoculated animals in Group 1, comparing gene expression at Days 2, 4 and 6 with the other days. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent with an area under the curve in excess of 0.9.
[0093] Figure 2 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using the selected genes for clinically affected animals. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent.
[0094] Figure 3 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using the selected genes for animals deemed to have active viral infection. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent.
[0095] Figure 4 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using all of the genes for clinically affected animals. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is good. [0096] Figure 5 is a graphical representation of a Receiver Operator Curve when using the selected genes for animals deemed to have active viral infection. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is good.
[0097] Figure 6 is a graphical representation showing a plot of Gene Expression Index (Log Intensity Units), Serum EHV Ab Levels (450 nm absorbance), Dates, Days (D = Day) and Clinical Signs for EHV-I Group 1 foals. Foals were inoculated on 18 March 2003. The changes in gene expression index correspond to the presence of clinical signs and precede the rise in specific serum anti-EHV-1 antibodies by 10-14 days.
[0098] Figure 7 is a graphical representation of a principal components analysis for Group 1 foals. Components are plotted by days after inoculation.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
1. Definitions
[0099] Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by those of ordinary skill in the art to which the invention belongs. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, preferred methods and materials are described. For the purposes of the present invention, the following terms are defined below.
[0100] The articles "a" and "an" are used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e. to at least one) of the grammatical object of the article. By way of example, "an element" means one element or more than one element.
[0101] The term "aberrant expression," as used herein to describe the expression of an HYI marker gene, refers to the overexpression or underexpression of an HVI marker gene relative to the level of expression of the HVI marker gene or variant thereof in cells obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject that is not infected with the herpes virus, and/or to a higher or lower level of an HVI marker gene product (e.g., transcript or polypeptide) in a tissue sample or body fluid obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject without the herpes virus. In particular, an HVI marker gene is aberrantly expressed if its level of expression is higher by at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%, or even an at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000%, or lower by at least about 10%, 20%, 30% 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even an at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999% than its level of expression in a cell, tissue or body fluid sample obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject without the herpes virus. [0102] The term "aberrant expression," as used herein to describe the expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide, refers to the over-expression or under-expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide relative to the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide or variant thereof in cells obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection related disease (e.g., lacking active herpes virus infection), and/or to a higher or lower level of an HVI marker polynucleotide product (e.g., transcript or polypeptide) in a tissue sample or body fluid obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection disease. In particular, an HVI marker polynucleotide is aberrantly expressed if the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide is higher by at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90%, or even an at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000%, or lower by at least about 10%, 20%, 30% 40%, 01222
50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even an at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999% than the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide by cells obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection disease, and/or relative to the level of expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide in a tissue sample or body fluid obtained from a healthy subject or from a subject lacking herpes virus infection disease. In accordance with the present invention, aberrant gene expression in cells of the immune system, and particularly in circulating leukocytes, is deduced from two consecutive steps: (1) discovery of aberrantly expressed genes for diagnosis, prognosis and condition assessment; and (2) clinical validation of aberrantly expressed genes. [0103] Aberrant gene expression in discovery is defined by those genes that are significantly up or down regulated (p<0.06) when comparing groups of cell or tissue samples (e.g., cells of the immune system such as but not limited to white blood cells) following (a) normalization to invariant genes, whose expression remains constant under normal and diseased conditions, and (b) the use of a statistical method that protects against false positives (e.g., Holm and FDR adjustment) to account for false positive discovery inherent in multivariate data such as microarray data. Those skilled in the art of gene expression data analysis will recognize that other forms of data normalization may be adopted without materially altering the nature of the invention (for example MAS5, Robust multi chip averaging, GC Robust multi chip averaging or the Li Wong algorithm). For diagnosis, the cell or tissue samples are typically obtained from a group representing true negative cell or tissue samples for the condition of interest and from a group representing true positive cell or tissue samples for that condition. Generally, all other parameters or variables in the groups need to be controlled, such as age, geographical location, sex, athletic fitness and other normal biological variation, suitably by use of the same animal and induction of the condition of interest in that animal. Those skilled in the art of experimental design will recognize that alternative approaches to controlling for other parameters and variables may be adopted., without materially affecting the nature of the invention. Such approaches include, but are not limited to, randomization, blocking and the use of covariates in analysis. F 'or prognosis, the cell or tissue samples are typically obtained from a group representing true negative cell or tissue samples for the condition of interest and from the same group that subsequently (over time) represents true positive cell or tissue samples for that condition. Generally, all other parameters or variables in the groups need to be controlled, such as age, geographical location, sex, athletic fitness and other normal biological variation, typically by use of the same animals, induction of the condition of interest in those animals and samples taken from the same animal over time. For assessment, the cell or tissue samples are generally obtained from a group representing one end of a spectrum of measurable clinical parameters relating to the condition of interest and from groups representing various points along that spectrum of measurable clinical parameters. Similarly, all other parameters or variables in the groups generally need to be controlled, such as age, geographical location, sex, athletic fitness and other normal biological variation, suitably by use of the same animal and induction of the condition of interest in that animal.
[0104] Aberrant gene expression in clinical validation is defined by those genes from the discovery list that can be demonstrated to be significantly up or down regulated following normalization to invariant genes in the cells or tissues whose gene expression is the subject of the analysis and for the condition of interest in clinical cell or tissue samples used in the discovery process such that the aberrantly expressed genes can correctly diagnose or assess a condition at least 75% of the time. Generally, receiver operator curves (ROC) are a useful measure of such diagnostic performance. Those skilled in the art of gene expression data analyzes will recognize that other methods of normalization (for example MAS 5, Robust multi chip averaging, GC Robust multi chip averaging or the Li Wong algorithm) may be substituted for invariant gene normalization without materially affecting the nature of the invention. Furthermore, those skilled in the art of gene expression data analysis will recognize that many methods may be used to determine which genes are "significantly up or down regulated".
[0105] By "about" is meant a quantity, level, value, number, frequency, percentage, dimension, size, amount, weight or length that varies by as much as 30, 25, 20, 25, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 % to a reference quantity, level, value, number, frequency, percentage, dimension, size, amount, weight or length. [0106] The term "active infection" is used herein in its broadest sense and includes the invasion, establishment and/or multiplication of a virus in a host, which is typically associated with one or more pathological symptoms that may or may not be clinically apparent. Active infections include localized, subclinical or temporary infections. A local infection may persist and spread by extension to become an acute, subacute or chronic clinical infection or disease state. A local infection may also become systemic when a virus gains access to the lymphatic or vascular system. Typically, "active infection" refers to an infectious state in which a host's immune system is activated against an infectious agent.
[0107] The term "amplicon" refers to a target sequence for amplification, and/or the amplification products of a target sequence for amplification. In certain other embodiments an "amplicon" may include the sequence of probes or primers used in amplification.
[0108] By "antigen-binding molecule" is meant a molecule that has binding affinity for a target antigen. It will be understood that this term extends to immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin fragments and non-immunoglobulin derived protein frameworks that exhibit antigen-binding activity. [0109] As used herein, the term "binds specifically," "specifically immuno- interactive" and the like when referring to an antigen-binding molecule refers to a binding reaction which is determinative of the presence of an antigen in the presence of a heterogeneous population of proteins and other biologies. Thus, under designated immunoassay conditions, the specified antigen-binding molecules bind to a particular antigen and do not bind in a significant amount to other proteins or antigens present in the sample. Specific binding to an antigen under such conditions may require an antigen-binding molecule that is selected for its specificity for a particular antigen. For example, antigen-binding molecules can be raised to a selected protein antigen, which bind to that antigen but not to other proteins present in a sample. A variety of immunoassay formats may be used to select antigen-binding molecules specifically immuno- interactive with a particular protein. For example, solid-phase ELISA immunoassays are routinely used to select monoclonal antibodies specifically immuno-interactive with a protein. See Harlow and Lane (1988) Antibodies, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Publications, New York, for a description of immunoassay formats and conditions that can be used to determine specific immunoreactivity.
[0110] By "biologically active portion" is meant a portion of a full-length parent peptide or polypeptide which portion retains an activity of the parent molecule. As used herein, the term "biologically active portion" includes deletion mutants and peptides, for example of at least about 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 150, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 contiguous amino acids, which comprise an activity of a parent molecule. Portions of this type may be obtained through the application of standard recombinant nucleic acid techniques or synthesized using conventional liquid or solid phase synthesis techniques. For example, reference may be made to solution synthesis or solid phase synthesis as described, for example, in Chapter 9 entitled "Peptide Synthesis" by Atherton and Shephard which is included in a publication entitled "Synthetic Vaccines" edited by Nicholson and published by Blackwell Scientific Publications. Alternatively, peptides can be produced by digestion of a peptide or polypeptide of the invention with proteinases such as endoLys-C, endoArg-C, endoGlu-C and staphylococcus V8- protease. The digested fragments can be purified by, for example, high performance liquid chromatographic (HPLC) techniques. Recombinant nucleic acid techniques can also be used to produce such portions.
[0111] The term "biological sample" as used herein refers to a sample that may be extracted, untreated, treated, diluted or concentrated from an animal. The biological sample may include a biological fluid such as whole blood, serum, plasma, saliva, urine, sweat, ascitic fluid, peritoneal fluid, synovial fluid, amniotic fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, tissue biopsy, and the like. In certain embodiments, the biological sample is blood, especially peripheral blood. [0112] As used herein, the term "cw-acting sequence", "ezs-acting element" or "ci$- regulatory region" or "regulatory region" or similar term shall be taken to mean any sequence of nucleotides, which when positioned appropriately relative to an expressible genetic sequence, is capable of regulating, at least in part, the expression of the genetic sequence. Those skilled in the art will be aware that a cώ-regulatory region may be capable of activating, silencing, enhancing, repressing or otherwise altering the level of expression and/or cell-type-specifϊcity and/or developmental specificity of a gene sequence at the transcriptional or post-transcriptional level. In certain embodiments of the present invention, the czs-acting sequence is an activator sequence that enhances or stimulates the expression of an expressible genetic sequence. [0113] Throughout this specification, unless the context requires otherwise, the words "comprise," "comprises" and "comprising" will be understood to mean the inclusion of a stated step or element or group of steps or elements but not the exclusion of any other step or element or group of steps or elements.
[0114] By "corresponds to" or "corresponding to" is meant a polynucleotide (a) having a nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical or complementary to all or a portion of a reference polynucleotide sequence or (b) encoding an amino acid sequence identical to an amino acid sequence in a peptide or protein. This phrase also includes within its scope a peptide or polypeptide having an amino acid sequence that is substantially identical to a sequence of amino acids in a reference peptide or protein. [0115] By "effective amount", in the context of treating or preventing a condition, is meant the administration of that amount of active to an individual in need of such treatment or prophylaxis, either in a single dose or as part of a series, that is effective for the prevention of incurring a symptom, holding in check such symptoms, and/or treating existing symptoms, of that condition. The effective amount will vary depending upon the health and physical condition of the individual to be treated, the taxonomic group of individual to be treated, the formulation of the composition, the assessment of the medical situation, and other relevant factors. It is expected that the amount will fall in a relatively broad range that can be determined through routine trials.
[0116] The terms "expression" or "gene expression" refer to either production of RNA message or translation of RNA message into proteins or polypeptides. Detection of either types of gene expression in use of any of the methods described herein are part of the invention.
[0117] By "expression vector" is meant any autonomous genetic element capable of directing the transcription of a polynucleotide contained within the vector and suitably the synthesis of a peptide or polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide. Such expression vectors are known to practitioners in the art. [0118] The term "gene" as used herein refers to any and all discrete coding regions of the cell's genome, as well as associated non-coding and regulatory regions. The gene is also intended to mean the open reading frame encoding specific polypeptides, introns, and adjacent 5' and 3' non-coding nucleotide sequences involved in the regulation of expression. In this regard, the gene may further comprise control signals such as promoters, enhancers, termination and/or polyadenylation signals that are naturally associated with a given gene, or heterologous control signals. The DNA sequences may be cDNA or genomic DNA or a fragment thereof. The gene may be introduced into an appropriate vector for extrachromosomal maintenance or for integration into the host. [0119] By "high density polynucleotide arrays" and the like is meant those arrays that contain at least 400 different features per cm^.
[0120] The phrase "high discrimination hybridization conditions" refers to hybridization conditions in which single base mismatch may be determined.
[0121] "Hybridization" is used herein to denote the pairing of complementary nucleotide sequences to produce a DNA-DNA hybrid or a DNA-RNA hybrid. Complementary base sequences are those sequences that are related by the base-pairing rules. In DNA, A pairs with T and C pairs with G. In RNA U pairs with A and C pairs with G. In this regard, the terms "match" and "mismatch" as used herein refer to the hybridization potential of paired nucleotides in complementary nucleic acid strands. Matched nucleotides hybridize efficiently, such as the classical A-T and G-C base pair mentioned above. Mismatches are other combinations of nucleotides that do not hybridize efficiently.
[0122] The phrase "hybridizing specifically to" and the like refer to the binding, duplexing, or hybridizing of a molecule only to a particular nucleotide sequence under stringent conditions when that sequence is present in a complex mixture (e.g., total cellular) DNA or RNA.
[0123] Reference herein to "immuno-interactive" includes reference to any interaction, reaction, or other form of association between molecules and in particular where one of the molecules is, or mimics, a component of the immune system.
[0124] "Immune function" or "immunoreactivity" refers to the ability of the immune system to respond to foreign antigen as measured by standard assays well known in the art.
[0125] By "isolated" is meant material that is substantially or essentially free from components that normally accompany it in its native state. For example, an "isolated polynucleotide", as used herein, refers to a polynucleotide, isolated from the sequences which flank it in a naturally-occurring state, e.g., a DNA fragment which has been removed from the sequences that are normally adjacent to the fragment. Alternatively, an "isolated peptide" or an "isolated polypeptide" and the like, as used herein, refer to in vitro isolation and/or purification of a peptide or polypeptide molecule from its natural cellular environment, and from association with other components of the cell. Without limitation, an isolated polynucleotide, peptide, or polypeptide can refer to a native sequence that is isolated by purification or to a sequence that is produced by recombinant or synthetic means.
[0126] By "marker gene" is meant a gene that imparts a distinct phenotype to cells expressing the marker gene and thus allows such transformed cells to be distinguished from cells that do not have the marker. A selectable marker gene confers a trait for which one can 'select' based on resistance to a selective agent (e.g., a herbicide, antibiotic, radiation, heat, or other treatment damaging to untransformed cells). A screenable marker gene (or reporter gene) confers a trait that one can identify through observation or testing, i.e., by 'screening' (e.g. β- glucuronidase, luciferase, or other enzyme activity not present in untransformed cells).
[0127] As used herein, a "naturally-occurring" nucleic acid molecule refers to a RNA or DNA molecule having a nucleotide sequence that occurs in nature. For example a naturally-occurring nucleic acid molecule can encode a protein that occurs in nature.
[0128] By "obtained from" is meant that a sample such as, for example, a cell extract or nucleic acid or polypeptide extract is isolated from, or derived from, a particular source. For instance, the extract may be isolated directly from biological fluid or tissue of the subject.
[0129] The term "oligonucleotide" as used herein refers to a polymer composed of a multiplicity of nucleotide residues (deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or related structural variants or synthetic analogues thereof, including nucleotides with modified or substituted sugar groups and the like) linked via phosphodiester bonds (or related structural variants or synthetic analogues thereof). Thus, while the term "oligonucleotide" typically refers to a nucleotide polymer in which the nucleotide residues and linkages between them are naturally-occurring, it will be understood that the term also includes within its scope various analogues including, but not restricted to, peptide nucleic acids (PNAs), phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phophoroselenoate, phosphorodiselenoate, phosphoroanilothioate, phosphoraniladate, phosphoroamidate, methyl phosphonates, 2-O-methyl ribonucleic acids, and the like. The exact size of the molecule can vary depending on the particular application. Oligonucleotides are a polynucleotide subset with 200 bases or fewer in length. Preferably, oligonucleotides are 10 to 60 bases in length and most preferably 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 to 40 bases in length. Oligonucleotides are usually single stranded, e.g., for probes; although oligonucleotides may be double stranded, e.g., for use in the construction of a variant nucleic acid sequence. Oligonucleotides of the invention can be either sense or antisense oligonucleotides.
[0130] The term "oligonucleotide array" refers to a substrate having oligonucleotide probes with different known sequences deposited at discrete known locations associated with its surface. For example, the substrate can be in the form of a two dimensional substrate as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,424,186. Such substrate may be used to synthesize two- dimensional spatially addressed oligonucleotide (matrix) arrays. Alternatively, the substrate may be characterized in that it forms a tubular array in which a two dimensional planar sheet is rolled into a three-dimensional tubular configuration. The substrate may also be in the form of a microsphere or bead connected to the surface of an optic fiber as, for example, disclosed by Chee et al. in WO 00/39587. Oligonucleotide arrays have at least two different features and a density of at least 400 features per cm2. In certain embodiments, the arrays can have a density of about 500, at least one thousand, at least 10 thousand, at least 100 thousand, at least one million or at least 10 million features per cm2. For example, the substrate may be silicon or glass and can have the thickness of a glass microscope slide or a glass cover slip, or may be composed of other synthetic polymers. Substrates that are transparent to light are useful when the method of performing an assay on the substrate involves optical detection. The term also refers to a probe array and the substrate to which it is attached that form part of a wafer.
[0131] The term "operably connected" or "operably linked" as used herein means placing a structural gene under the regulatory control of a promoter, which then controls the transcription and optionally translation of the gene. In the construction of heterologous promoter/structural gene combinations, it is generally preferred to position the genetic sequence or promoter at a distance from the gene transcription start site that is approximately the same as the distance between that genetic sequence or promoter and the gene it controls in its natural setting; i.e., the gene from which the genetic sequence or promoter is derived. As is known in the art, some variation in this distance can be accommodated without loss of function. Similarly, the preferred positioning of a regulatory sequence element with respect to a heterologous gene to be placed under its control is defined by the positioning of the element in its natural setting; i.e., the genes from which it is derived. [0132] The term "pathogen" is used herein in its broadest sense to refer to an organism or infectious agent whose infection of cells of viable animal tissue elicits a disease response.
[0133] The term "polynucleotide" or "nucleic acid" as used herein designates mRNA, RNA, cRNA, cDNA or DNA. The term typically refers to polymeric form of nucleotides of at least 10 bases in length, either ribonucleotides or deoxynucleotides or a modified form of either type of nucleotide. The term includes single and double stranded forms ofDNA.
[0134] The terms "polynucleotide variant" and "variant" refer to polynucleotides displaying substantial sequence identity with a reference polynucleotide sequence or polynucleotides that hybridize with a reference sequence under stringent conditions that are defined hereinafter. These terms also encompass polynucleotides in which one or more nucleotides have been added or deleted, or replaced with different nucleotides. In this regard, it is well understood in the art that certain alterations inclusive of mutations, additions, deletions and substitutions can be made to a reference polynucleotide whereby the altered polynucleotide retains a biological function or activity of the reference polynucleotide. The terms
"polynucleotide variant" and "variant" also include naturally-occurring allelic variants.
[0135] "Polypeptide", "peptide" and "protein" are used interchangeably herein to refer to a polymer of amino acid residues and to variants and synthetic analogues of the same. Thus, these terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues is a synthetic non-naturally-occurring amino acid, such as a chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally-occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally-occurring amino acid polymers.
[0136] The term "polypeptide variant" refers to polypeptides which are distinguished from a reference polypeptide by the addition, deletion or substitution of at least one amino acid residue. In certain embodiments, one or more amino acid residues of a reference polypeptide are replaced by different amino acids. It is well understood in the art that some amino acids may be changed to others with broadly similar properties without changing the nature of the activity of the polypeptide (conservative substitutions) as described hereinafter.
[0137] By "primer" is meant an oligonucleotide which, when paired with a strand of DNA, is capable of initiating the synthesis of a primer extension product in the presence of a suitable polymerizing agent. The primer is preferably single-stranded for maximum efficiency in amplification but can alternatively be double-stranded. A primer must be sufficiently long to prime the synthesis of extension products in the presence of the polymerization agent. The length of the primer depends on many factors, including application, temperature to be employed, template reaction conditions, other reagents, and source of primers. For example, depending on the complexity of the target sequence, the primer may be at least about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, to one base shorter in length than the template sequence at the 3' end of the primer to allow extension of a nucleic acid chain, though the 5' end of the primer may extend in length beyond the 3' end of the template sequence. In certain embodiments, primers can be large polynucleotides, such as from about 35 nucleotides to several kilobases or more. Primers can be selected to be "substantially complementary" to the sequence on the template to which it is designed to hybridize and serve as a site for the initiation of synthesis. By "substantially complementary", it is meant that the primer is sufficiently complementary to hybridize with a target polynucleotide. Desirably, the primer contains no mismatches with the template to which it is designed to hybridize but this is not essential. For example, non- complementary nucleotide residues can be attached to the 5' end of the primer, with the remainder of the primer sequence being complementary to the template. Alternatively, non- complementary nucleotide residues or a stretch of non-complementary nucleotide residues can be interspersed into a primer, provided that the primer sequence has sufficient complementarity with the sequence of the template to hybridize therewith and thereby form a template for synthesis of the extension product of the primer.
[0138] "Probe" refers to a molecule that binds to a specific sequence or sub¬ sequence or other moiety of another molecule. Unless otherwise indicated, the term "probe" typically refers to a polynucleotide probe that binds to another polynucleotide, often called the "target polynucleotide", through complementary base pairing. Probes can bind target polynucleotides lacking complete sequence complementarity with the probe, depending on the stringency of the hybridization conditions. Probes can be labeled directly or indirectly and include primers within their scope.
[0139] The term "recombinant polynucleotide" as used herein refers to a polynucleotide formed in vitro by the manipulation of nucleic acid into a form not normally found in nature. For example, the recombinant polynucleotide may be in the form of an expression vector. Generally, such expression vectors include transcriptional and translational regulatory nucleic acid operably linked to the nucleotide sequence.
[0140] By "recombinant polypeptide" is meant a polypeptide made using recombinant techniques, i.e., through the expression of a recombinant or synthetic polynucleotide.
[0141] By "regulatory element" or "regulatory sequence" is meant nucleic acid sequences (e.g., DNA) necessary for expression of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular host cell. The regulatory sequences that are suitable for prokaryotic cells for example, include a promoter, and optionally a cis-acting sequence such as an operator sequence and a ribosome binding site. Control sequences that are suitable for eukaryotic cells include promoters, polyadenylation signals, transcriptional enhancers, translational enhancers, leader or trailing sequences that modulate mRNA stability, as well as targeting sequences that target a product encoded by a transcribed polynucleotide to an intracellular compartment within a cell or to the extracellular environment. [0142] The term "sequence identity" as used herein refers to the extent that sequences are identical on a nucleotide-by-nucleotide basis or an amino acid-by-amino acid basis over a window of comparison. Thus, a "percentage of sequence identity" is calculated by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over the window of comparison, determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base (e.g., A, T, C, G, I) or the identical amino acid residue (e.g., Ala, Pro, Ser, Thr, GIy, VaI, Leu, He, Phe, Tyr, Trp, Lys, Arg, His, Asp, GIu, Asn, GIn, Cys and Met) occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison (i.e., the window size), and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity. For the purposes of the present invention, "sequence identity" will be understood to mean the "match percentage" calculated by the DNASIS computer program (Version 2.5 for windows; available from Hitachi Software engineering Co., Ltd.,
South San Francisco, California, USA) using standard defaults as used in the reference manual accompanying the software.
[0143] "Similarity" refers to the percentage number of amino acids that are identical or constitute conservative substitutions as defined in Table 3. Similarity may be determined using sequence comparison programs such as GAP (Deveraux et al. 1984, Nucleic Acids
Research 12, 387-395). In this way, sequences of a similar or substantially different length to those cited herein might be compared by insertion of gaps into the alignment, such gaps being determined, for example, by the comparison algorithm used by GAP.
[0144] Terms used to describe sequence relationships between two or more polynucleotides or polypeptides include "reference sequence", "comparison window",
"sequence identity", "percentage of sequence identity" and "substantial identity". A "reference sequence" is at least 12 but frequently 15 to 18 and often at least 25 monomer units, inclusive of nucleotides and amino acid residues, in length. Because two polynucleotides may each comprise (1) a sequence (i.e., only a portion of the complete polynucleotide sequence) that is similar between the two polynucleotides, and (2) a sequence that is divergent between the two polynucleotides, sequence comparisons between two (or more) polynucleotides are typically performed by comparing sequences of the two polynucleotides over a "comparison window" to identify and compare local regions of sequence similarity. A "comparison window" refers to a conceptual segment of at least 6 contiguous positions, usually about 50 to about 100, more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence is compared to a reference sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences are optimally aligned. The comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) of about 20% or less as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. Optimal alignment of sequences for aligning a comparison window may be conducted by computerized implementations of algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0,
Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Drive Madison, WI, USA) or by inspection and the best alignment (i.e., resulting in the highest percentage homology over the comparison window) generated by any of the various methods selected. Reference also may be made to the BLAST family of programs as for example disclosed by Altschul et al., 1997, Nucl. Acids Res. 25:3389. A detailed discussion of sequence analysis can be found in Unit 19.3 of Ausubel et al., "Current Protocols in Molecular Biology", John Wiley & Sons Inc, 1994-1998, Chapter 15.
[0145] The terms "subject" or "individual" or "patient", used interchangeably herein, refer to any subject, particularly a vertebrate subject, and even more particularly a mammalian subject, for whom therapy or prophylaxis is desired. Suitable vertebrate animals that fall within the scope of the invention include, but are not restricted to, primates, avians, livestock animals (e.g., sheep, cows, horses, donkeys, pigs), laboratory test animals (e.g., rabbits, mice, rats, guinea pigs, hamsters), companion animals (e.g., cats, dogs) and captive wild animals (e.g., foxes, deer, dingoes). A preferred subject is an animal, especially an equine animal, in need of treatment or prophylaxis of a herpes virus infection or its associated symptoms. However, it will be understood that the aforementioned terms do not imply that symptoms are present.
[0146] The phrase "substantially similar affinities" refers herein to target sequences having similar strengths of detectable hybridization to their complementary or substantially complementary oligonucleotide probes under a chosen set of stringent conditions.
[0147] The term "template" as used herein refers to a nucleic acid that is used in the creation of a complementary nucleic acid strand to the "template" strand. The template may be either RNA and/or DNA, and the complementary strand may also be RNA and/or DNA. In certain embodiments, the complementary strand may comprise all or part of the complementary sequence to the "template," and/or may include mutations so that it is not an exact, complementary strand to the "template". Strands that are not exactly complementary to the template strand may hybridize specifically to the template strand in detection assays described here, as well as other assays known in the art, and such complementary strands that can be used in detection assays are part of the invention.
[0148] The term "transformation" means alteration of the genotype of an organism, for example a bacterium, yeast, mammal, avian, reptile, fish or plant, by the introduction of a foreign or endogenous nucleic acid.
[0149] The term "treat" is meant to include both therapeutic and prophylactic treatment.
[0150] By "vector" is meant a polynucleotide molecule, suitably a DNA molecule derived, for example, from a plasmid, bacteriophage, yeast, virus, mammal, avian, reptile or fish into which a polynucleotide can be inserted or cloned. A vector preferably contains one or more unique restriction sites and can be capable of autonomous replication in a defined host cell including a target cell or tissue or a progenitor cell or tissue thereof, or be integrable with the genome of the defined host such that the cloned sequence is reproducible. Accordingly, the vector can be an autonomously replicating vector, i.e., a vector that exists as an extrachromosomal entity, the replication of which is independent of chromosomal replication, e.g., a linear or closed circular plasmid, an extrachromosomal element, a minichromosome, or an artificial chromosome. The vector can contain any means for assuring self-replication. Alternatively, the vector can be one which, when introduced into the host cell, is integrated into the genome and replicated together with the chromosome(s) into which it has been integrated. A vector system can comprise a single vector or plasmid, two or more vectors or plasmids, which together contain the total DNA to be introduced into the genome of the host cell, or a transposon. The choice of the vector will typically depend on the compatibility of the vector with the host cell into which the vector is to be introduced. The vector can also include a selection marker such as an antibiotic resistance gene that can be used for selection of suitable transformants. Examples of such resistance genes are known to those of skill in the art.
[0151] The terms "wild-type" and "normal" are used interchangeably to refer to the phenotype that is characteristic of most of the members of the species occurring naturally and contrast for example with the phenotype of a mutant.
2. Abbreviations [0152] The following abbreviations are used throughout the application: nt =nucleotide nts nucleotides aa = amino acid(s) kb =kilobase(s) or kilobase pair(s) kDa =kilodalton(s) d =day h =hour s = seconds
3. Markers of herpes virus infection and uses therefor
[0153] The present invention concerns the early detection, diagnosis, monitoring, or prognosis of herpes virus infections, especially EHV infections, or conditions related thereto. Surrogate markers of herpes virus infection in the form of KNA molecules of specified sequences, or polypeptides expressed from these RNA molecules in cells, especially in blood cells, and more especially in peripheral blood cells, of subjects with herpes virus infection, are disclosed. These markers are indicators of herpes virus infection and, when differentially expressed, as compared to their expression in normal subjects or in subjects lacking herpes virus-related disease, are diagnostic for the presence or risk of development of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection, in tested subjects. Such markers provide considerable advantages over the prior art in this field. In certain advantageous embodiments where peripheral blood is used for the analysis, it is possible to diagnose herpes virus infection before serum antibodies are detected.
[0154] It will be apparent that the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein will find utility in a variety of applications in herpes virus detection, diagnosis, prognosis and treatment. Examples of such applications within the scope of the present disclosure comprise amplification of HVI markers using specific primers, detection of HVI markers by hybridization with oligonucleotide probes, incorporation of isolated nucleic acids into vectors, expression of vector-incorporated nucleic acids as RNA and protein, and development of immunological reagents corresponding to marker encoded products.
[0155] The identified HVI markers may in turn be used to design specific oligonucleotide probes and primers. Such probes and primers may be of any length that would specifically hybridize to the identified marker gene sequences and may be at least about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500 nucleotides in length and in the case of probes, up to the full length of the sequences of the marker genes identified herein. Probes may also include additional sequence at their 5' and/or 3' ends so that they extent beyond the target sequence with which they hybridize.
[0156] When used in combination with nucleic acid amplification procedures, these probes and primers enable the rapid analysis of biological samples (e.g., peripheral blood samples) for detecting marker genes or for detecting or quantifying marker gene transcripts. Such procedures include any method or technique known in the art or described herein for duplicating or increasing the number of copies or amount of a target nucleic acid or its complement.
[0157] The identified markers may also be used to identify and isolate full-length gene sequences, including regulatory elements for gene expression, from genomic DNA libraries, which are suitably but not exclusively of equine origin. The cDNA sequences identified in the present disclosure may be used as hybridization probes to screen genomic DNA libraries by conventional techniques. Once partial genomic clones have been identified, full- length genes may be isolated by "chromosomal walking" (also called "overlap hybridization") using, for example, the method disclosed by Chinault & Carbon (1979, Gene 5: 111-126). Once a partial genomic clone has been isolated using a cDNA hybridization probe, non-repetitive segments at or near the ends of the partial genomic clone may be used as hybridization probes in further genomic library screening, ultimately allowing isolation of entire gene sequences for the HVI markers of interest. It will be recognized that full-length genes may be obtained using the full-length or partial cDNA sequences or short expressed sequence tags (ESTs) described in this disclosure using standard techniques as disclosed for example by Sambrook, et al. (MOLECULAR CLONING. A LABORATORY MANUAL (Cold Spring Harbor Press, 1989) and Ausubel et al. , (CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1994). In addition, the disclosed sequences may be used to identify and isolate full- length cDNA sequences using standard techniques as disclosed, for example, in the above- referenced texts. Sequences identified and isolated by such means may be useful in the detection of HVI marker polynucleotides using the detection methods described herein, and are part of the invention.
[0158] One of ordinary skill in the art could select segments from the identified marker genes for use in the different detection, diagnostic, or prognostic methods, vector constructs, antigen-binding molecule production, kit, and/or any of the embodiments described herein as part of the present invention. Marker gene sequences that are desirable for use in the invention are those set fort in SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113.
3.1 Nucleic acid molecules of the invention [0159] As described in the Examples and in Table 1, the present disclosure provides
63 markers of herpes virus (i.e., 63 HVI marker genes), identified by GeneChip™ analysis of blood obtained from normal horses and from horses with clinical evidence of EHV. Of the 63 marker genes, 44 have full-length or substantially full-length coding sequences and the remaining 21 have partial sequence information at one or both of their 5' and 3' ends. The identified HVI marker genes include 21 previously uncharacterized equine genes.
[0160] In accordance with the present invention, the sequences of isolated nucleic acids disclosed herein find utility inter alia as hybridization probes or amplification primers. These nucleic acids may be used, for example, in diagnostic evaluation of biological samples or employed to clone full-length cDNAs or genomic clones corresponding thereto. In certain embodiments, these probes and primers represent oligonucleotides, which are of sufficient length to provide specific hybridization to a RNA or DNA sample extracted from the biological sample. The sequences typically will be about 10-20 nucleotides, but may be longer. Longer sequences, e.g., of about 30, 40, 50, 100, 500 and even up to full-length, are desirable for certain embodiments. [0161] Nucleic acid molecules having contiguous stretches of about 10, 15, 17, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75 or 100 or 500 nucleotides of a sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 are contemplated. Molecules that are complementary to the above mentioned sequences and that bind to these sequences under high stringency conditions are also contemplated. These probes are useful in a variety of hybridization embodiments, such as Southern and northern blotting. In some cases, it is contemplated that probes may be used that hybridize to multiple target sequences without compromising their ability to effectively diagnose herpes virus infection. In general, it is contemplated that the hybridization probes described herein are useful both as reagents in solution hybridization, as in PCR, for detection of expression of corresponding genes, as well as in embodiments employing a solid phase.
[0162] Various probes and primers may be designed around the disclosed nucleotide sequences. For example, in certain embodiments, the sequences used to design probes and primers may include repetitive stretches of adenine nucleotides (poly-A tails) normally attached at the ends of the RNA for the identified marker genes. In other embodiments, probes and primers may be specifically designed to not include these or other segments from the identified marker genes, as one of ordinary skilled in the art may deem certain segments more suitable for use in the detection methods disclosed. In any event, the choice of primer or probe sequences for a selected application is within the realm of the ordinary skilled practitioner. Illustrative probe sequences for detection of HVI marker polynucleotides are presented in Table 2.
[0163] Primers may be provided in double-stranded or single-stranded form, although the single-stranded form is desirable. Probes, while perhaps capable of priming, are designed to bind to a target DNA or RNA and need not be used in an amplification process. In certain embodiments, the probes or primers are labeled with radioactive species 32P, 14C, 35S, 3H, or other label), with a fluorophore (e.g., rhodamine, fluorescein) or with a chemillumiscent label (e.g., luciferase). [0164] The present invention provides substantially full-length cDNA sequences as well as EST and partial cDNA sequences that are useful as markers of EHV. It will be understood, however, that the present disclosure is not limited to these disclosed sequences and is intended particularly to encompass at least isolated nucleic acids that are hybridizable to nucleic acids comprising the disclosed sequences or that are variants of these nucleic acids. For example, a nucleic acid of partial sequence may be used to identify a structurally-related gene or the full-length genomic or cDNA clone from which it is derived. Methods for generating cDNA and genomic libraries which may be used as a target for the above-described probes are known in the art (see, for example, Sambrook et al., 1989, supra and Ausubel et al, 1994, supra). All such nucleic acids as well as the specific nucleic acid molecules disclosed herein are collectively referred to as "herpes virus infection marker polynucleotides''' or "HVI marker polynucleotides." Additionally, the present invention includes within its scope isolated or purified expression products of HVI marker polynucleotides (i.e., RNA transcripts and polypeptides).
[0165] Accordingly, the present invention encompasses isolated or substantially purified nucleic acid or protein compositions. An "isolated" or "purified" nucleic acid molecule or protein, or biologically active portion thereof, is substantially or essentially free from components that normally accompany or interact with the nucleic acid molecule or protein as found in its naturally occurring environment. Thus, an isolated or purified polynucleotide or polypeptide is substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. Suitably, an "isolated" polynucleotide is free of sequences (especially protein encoding sequences) that naturally flank the polynucleotide (i.e., sequences located at the 5' and 3' ends of the polynucleotide) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the polynucleotide was derived. For example, in various embodiments, an isolated HVI marker polynucleotide can contain less than about 5 kb, 4 kb, 3 kb, 2 kb, 1 kb, 0.5 kb, or 0.1 kb of nucleotide sequences that naturally flank the polynucleotide in genomic DNA of the cell from which the polynucleotide was derived. A polypeptide that is substantially free of cellular material includes preparations of protein having less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, (by dry weight) of contaminating protein. When the protein of the invention or biologically active portion thereof is recombinantly produced, culture medium suitably represents less than about 30%, 20%, 10%, or 5% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or non-protein-of-interest chemicals.
[0166] The present invention also encompasses portions of the full-length or substantially full-length nucleotide sequences of the HVI marker polynucleotides or their transcripts or DNA copies of these transcripts. Portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence may encode polypeptide portions or segments that retain the biological activity of the native polypeptide. Alternatively, portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence that are useful as hybridization probes generally do not encode amino acid sequences retaining such biological activity. Thus, portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence may range from at least about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 90, 100 nucleotides, or almost up to the full-length nucleotide sequence encoding the HVI marker polypeptides of the invention. [0167] A portion of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence that encodes a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention may encode at least about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 150, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000, or even at least about 2000, 3000, 4000 or 5000 contiguous amino acid residues, or almost up to the total number of amino acids present in a full-length HVI marker polypeptide. Portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence that are useful as hybridization probes or PCR primers generally need not encode a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide.
[0168] Thus, a portion of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence may encode a biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide, or it may be a fragment that can be used as a hybridization probe or PCR primer using standard methods known in the art. A biologically active portion of an HVI marker polypeptide can be prepared by isolating a portion of one of the HVI marker nucleotide sequences of the invention, expressing the encoded portion of the HVI marker polypeptide (e.g., by recombinant expression in vitro), and assessing the activity of the encoded portion of the HVI marker polypeptide. Nucleic acid molecules that are portions of an HVI marker nucleotide sequence comprise at least about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, or 650 nucleotides, or almost up to the number of nucleotides present in a full-length HVI marker nucleotide sequence.
[0169] The invention also contemplates variants of the HVI marker nucleotide sequences. Nucleic acid variants can be naturally-occurring, such as allelic variants (same locus), homologues (different locus), and orthologues (different organism) or can be non naturally- occurring. Naturally occurring variants such as these can be identified with the use of well- known molecular biology techniques, as, for example, with polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and hybridization techniques as known in the art. Non-naturally occurring variants can be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells, or organisms. The variants can contain nucleotide substitutions, deletions, inversions and insertions. Variation can occur in either or both the coding and non-coding regions. The variations can produce both conservative and non-conservative amino acid substitutions (as compared in the encoded product). For nucleotide sequences, conservative variants include those sequences that, because of the degeneracy of the genetic code, encode the amino acid sequence of one of the EHV marker polypeptides of the invention. Variant nucleotide sequences also include synthetically derived nucleotide sequences, such as those generated, for example, by using site-directed mutagenesis but which still encode an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention. Generally, variants of a particular nucleotide sequence of the invention will have at least about 30%, 40% 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, generally at least about 75%, 80%, 85%, desirably about 90% to 95% or more, and more suitably about 98% or more sequence identity to that particular nucleotide sequence as determined by sequence alignment programs described elsewhere herein using default parameters.
[0170] The HVI marker nucleotide sequences of the invention can be used to isolate corresponding sequences and alleles from other organisms, particularly other mammals, especially other equine species. Methods are readily available in the art for the hybridization of nucleic acid sequences. Coding sequences from other organisms may be isolated according to well known techniques based on their sequence identity with the coding sequences set forth herein. In these techniques all or part of the known coding sequence is used as a probe which selectively hybridizes to other HVI marker coding sequences present in a population of cloned genomic DNA fragments or cDNA fragments (i.e., genomic or cDNA libraries) from a chosen organism. Accordingly, the present invention also contemplates polynucleotides that hybridize to the HVI marker polynucleotide nucleotide sequences, or to their complements, under stringency conditions described below. As used herein, the term "hybridizes under low stringency, medium stringency, high stringency, or very high stringency conditions" describes conditions for hybridization and washing. Guidance for performing hybridization reactions can be found in Ausubel et al, (1998, supra), Sections 6.3.1-6.3.6. Aqueous and non-aqueous methods are described in that reference and either can be used. Reference herein to low stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about 1% v/v to at least about 15% v/v formamide and from at least about 1 M to at least about 2 M salt for hybridization at 42° C, and at least about 1 M to at least about 2 M salt for washing at 42° C. Low stringency conditions also may include 1% Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaHPO4 (pH 7.2),
7% SDS for hybridization at 65° C, and (i) 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS; or (ii) 0.5% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 40 mM NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 5% SDS for washing at room temperature. One embodiment of low stringency conditions includes hybridization in 6 x sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC) at about 45° C, followed by two washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at least at 50° C (the temperature of the washes can be increased to 55° C for low stringency conditions). Medium stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about 16% v/v to at least about 30% v/v formamide and from at least about 0.5 M to at least about 0.9 M salt for hybridization at 42° C, and at least about 0.1 M to at least about 0.2 M salt for washing at 55° C. Medium stringency conditions also may include 1% Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaHPO4
(pH 7.2), 7% SDS for hybridization at 65° C, and (i) 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS; or (ii) 0.5% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 40 mM NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 5% SDS for washing at 60-65° C. One embodiment of medium stringency conditions includes hybridizing in 6 x SSC at about 45° C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at 60° C. High stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about 31% v/v to at least about 50% v/v formamide and from about 0.01 M to about 0.15 M salt for hybridization at 42° C, and about 0.01 M to about 0.02 M salt for washing at 55° C. High stringency conditions also may include 1% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5" M NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 7% SDS for hybridization at 65° C, and (i) 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS; or (ii) 0.5% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 40 mM NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 1% SDS for washing at a temperature in excess of 65° C. One embodiment of high stringency conditions includes hybridizing in 6 x SSC at about 45° C, followed by one or more washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65° C.
[0171] In certain embodiments, an HVI marker polypeptide is encoded by a polynucleotide that hybridizes to a disclosed nucleotide sequence under very high stringency conditions. One embodiment of very high stringency conditions includes hybridizing 0.5 M sodium phosphate, 7% SDS at 65° C, followed by one or more washes at 0.2 x SSC, 1% SDS at 650 C.
[0172] Other stringency conditions are well known in the art and a skilled addressee will recognize that various factors can be manipulated to optimize the specificity of the hybridization. Optimization of the stringency of the final washes can serve to ensure a high degree of hybridization. For detailed examples, see Ausubel et al, supra at pages 2.10.1 to 2.10.16 and Sambrook et al (1989, supra) at sections 1.101 to 1.104.
[0173] While stringent washes are typically carried out at temperatures from about 42° C to 68° C, one skilled in the art will appreciate that other temperatures may be suitable for stringent conditions. Maximum hybridization rate typically occurs at about 20° C to 25° C below the Tm for formation of a DNA-DNA hybrid. It is well known in the art that the Tm is the melting temperature, or temperature at which two complementary polynucleotide sequences dissociate. Methods for estimating T1n are well known in the art (see Ausubel et al, supra at page 2.10.8). In general, the Tn, of a perfectly matched duplex of DNA may be predicted as an approximation by the formula:
[0174] Tm= 81.5 + 16.6 (log10 M) + 0.41 (%G+C) - 0.63 (% formamide) - (600/length)
[0175] wherein: M is the concentration OfNa+, preferably in the range of 0.01 molar to 0.4 molar; %G+C is the sum of guanosine and cytosine bases as a percentage of the total number of bases, within the range between 30% and 75% G+C; % formamide is the percent formamide concentration by volume; length is the number of base pairs in the DNA duplex. The Tm of a duplex DNA decreases by approximately I0 C with every increase of 1% in the number of randomly mismatched base pairs. Washing is generally carried out at Tm — 15° C for high stringency, or Tm - 30° C for moderate stringency.
[0176] In one example of a hybridization procedure, a membrane (e.g., a nitrocellulose membrane or a nylon membrane) containing immobilized DNA is hybridized overnight at 42° C in a hybridization buffer (50% deionised formamide, 5 x SSC, 5 x Denhardt's solution (0.1% ficoll, 0.1% polyvinylpyrollidone and 0.1% bovine serum albumin), 0.1% SDS and 200 mg/mL denatured salmon sperm DNA) containing labeled probe. The membrane is then subjected to two sequential medium stringency washes (i.e., 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 45° C, followed by 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 50° C), followed by two sequential higher stringency washes (i.e., 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 12 min at 55° C followed by 0.2 x SSC and 0.1%SDS solution for 12 min at 65-68° C.
3.2 Polypeptides of the invention
[0177] The present invention also contemplates full-length polypeptides encoded by the HVI marker polynucleotides of the invention as well as the biologically active portions of those polypeptides, which are referred to. collectively herein as "herpes virus infection marker polynucleotide" or "HVI marker polypeptides" . Biologically active portions of full-length HVI marker polypeptides include portions with immuno-interactive activity of at least about 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60 amino acid residues in length. For example, immuno- interactive fragments contemplated by the present invention are at least 6 and desirably at least 8 amino acid residues in length, which can elicit an immune response in an animal for the production of antigen-binding molecules that are immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention. Such antigen-binding molecules can be used to screen other mammals, especially equine mammals, for structurally and/or functionally related HVI marker polypeptides. Typically, portions of a full-length HVI marker polypeptide may participate in an interaction, for example, an intramolecular or an inter-molecular interaction. An inter-molecular interaction can be a specific binding interaction or an enzymatic interaction (e.g., the interaction can be transient and a covalent bond is formed or broken). Biologically active portions of a full- length HVI marker polypeptide include peptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently similar to or derived from the amino acid sequences of a (putative) full-length HVI marker polypeptide, for example, the amino acid sequences shown in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, which include less amino acids than a full- length HVI marker polypeptide, and exhibit at least one activity of that polypeptide. Typically, biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of a full-length HVI marker polypeptide. A biologically active portion of a full-length HVI marker polypeptide can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 150, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000, or even at least about 2000, 3000, 4000 or 5000, or more amino acid residues in length. Suitably, the portion is a "biologically-active portion" having no less than about 1%, 10%, 25% 50% of the activity of the full-length polypeptide from which it is derived. [0178] The present invention also contemplates variant HVI marker polypeptides. "Variant" polypeptides include proteins derived from the native protein by deletion (so-called truncation) or addition of one or more amino acids to the N-terminal and/or C-terminal end of the native protein; deletion or addition of one or more amino acids at one or more sites in the native protein; or substitution of one or more amino acids at one or more sites in the native protein. Variant proteins encompassed by the present invention are biologically active, that is, they continue to possess the desired biological activity of the native protein. Such variants may result from, for example, genetic polymorphism or from human manipulation. Biologically active variants of a native HVI marker protein of the invention will have at least 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, generally at least 75%, 80%, 85%, preferably about 90% to 95% or more, and more preferably about 98% or more sequence similarity with the amino acid sequence for the native protein as determined by sequence alignment programs described elsewhere herein using default parameters. A biologically active variant of a protein of the invention may differ from that protein generally by as much 1000, 500, 400, 300, 200, 100, 50 or 20 amino acid residues or suitably by as few as 1-15 amino acid residues, as few as 1-10, such as 6-10, as few as 5, as few as 4, 3, 2, or even 1 amino acid residue.
[0179] AN HVI marker polypeptide of the invention may be altered in various ways including amino acid substitutions, deletions, truncations, and insertions. Methods for such manipulations are generally known in the art. For example, amino acid sequence variants of an HVI marker protein can be prepared by mutations in the DNA. Methods for mutagenesis and nucleotide sequence alterations are well known in the art. See, for example, Kunkel (1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:488-492), Kunkel et al. (1987, Methods in Enzymol 154:367- 382), U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,192, Watson, J. D. et al. ("Molecular Biology of the Gene", Fourth Edition, Benjamin/Cummings, Menlo Park, Calif., 1987) and the references cited therein. Guidance as to appropriate amino acid substitutions that do not affect biological activity of the protein of interest may be found in the model of Dayhoff et al. (1978, Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure, Natl. Biomed. Res. Found., Washington, D.C.). Methods for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations or truncation, and for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a selected property are known in the art. Such methods are adaptable for rapid screening of the gene libraries generated by combinatorial mutagenesis of HVI marker polypeptides. Recursive ensemble mutagenesis (REM), a technique which enhances the frequency of functional mutants in the libraries, can be used in combination with the screening assays to identify HVI marker polypeptide variants (Arkin and Yourvan (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:7811-7815; Delgrave et al. (1993) Protein Engineering 6:327- 331). Conservative substitutions, such as exchanging one amino acid with another having similar properties, may be desirable as discussed in more detail below. [0180] Variant HVI marker polypeptides may contain conservative amino acid substitutions at various locations along their sequence, as compared to the parent HVI marker amino acid sequence. A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art, which can be generally sub-classified as follows:
[0181] Acidic: The residue has a negative charge due to loss of H ion at physiological pH and the residue is attracted by aqueous solution so as to seek the surface positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium at physiological pH. Amino acids having an acidic side chain include glutamic acid and aspartic acid.
[0182] Basic: The residue has a positive charge due to association with H ion at physiological pH or within one or two pH units thereof (e.g., histidine) and the residue is attracted by aqueous solution so as to seek the surface positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium at physiological pH. Amino acids having a basic side chain include arginine, lysine and histidine.
[0183] Charged: The residues are charged at physiological pH and, therefore, include amino acids having acidic or basic side chains (i.e., glutamic acid, aspartic acid, arginine, lysine and histidine). [0184] Hydrophobic: The residues are not charged at physiological pH and the residue is repelled by aqueous solution so as to seek the inner positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium. Amino acids having a hydrophobic side chain include tyrosine, valine, isoleucine, leucine, methionine, phenylalanine and tryptophan. [0185] Neutral/polar: The residues are not charged at physiological pH, but the residue is not sufficiently repelled by aqueous solutions so that it would seek inner positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium. Amino acids having a neutral/polar side chain include asparagine, glutamine, cysteine, histidine, serine and threonine. [0186] This description also characterizes certain amino acids as "small" since their side chains are not sufficiently large, even if polar groups are lacking, to confer hydrophobicity. With the exception of proline, "small" amino acids are those with four carbons or less when at least one polar group is on the side chain and three carbons or less when not. Amino acids having a small side chain include glycine, serine, alanine and threonine. The gene-encoded secondary amino acid proline is a special case due to its known effects on the secondary conformation of peptide chains. The structure of proline differs from all the other naturally- occurring amino acids in that its side chain is bonded to the nitrogen of the α-amino group, as well as the α-carbon. Several amino acid similarity matrices (e.g., PAM120 matrix and PAM250 matrix as disclosed for example by Dayhoff et al. (1978) A model of evolutionary change in proteins. Matrices for determining distance relationships In M. O. Dayhoff, (ed.), Atlas of protein sequence and structure, Vol. 5, pp. 345-358, National Biomedical Research Foundation, Washington DC; and by Gonnet et al, 1992, Science 256(5062): 144301445), however, include proline in the same group as glycine, serine, alanine and threonine. Accordingly, for the purposes of the present invention, proline is classified as a "small" amino acid. [0187] The degree of attraction or repulsion required for classification as polar or nonpolar is arbitrary and, therefore, amino acids specifically contemplated by the invention have been classified as one or the other. Most amino acids not specifically named can be classified on the basis of known behavior.
[0188] Amino acid residues can be further sub-classified as cyclic or noncyclic, and aromatic or nonaromatic, self-explanatory classifications with respect to the side-chain substituent groups of the residues, and as small or large. The residue is considered small if it contains a total of four carbon atoms or less, inclusive of the carboxyl carbon, provided an additional polar substituent is present; three or less if not. Small residues are, of course, always nonaromatic. Dependent on their structural properties, amino acid residues may fall in two or more classes. For the naturally-occurring protein amino acids, sub-classification according to the this scheme is presented in the Table 3.
[0189] Conservative amino acid substitution also includes groupings based on side chains. For example, a group of amino acids having aliphatic side chains is glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, and isoleucine; a group of amino acids having aliphatic-hydroxyl side chains is serine and threonine; a group of amino acids having amide-containing side chains is asparagine and glutamine; a group of amino acids having aromatic side chains is phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan; a group of amino acids having basic side chains is lysine, arginine, and histidine; and a group of amino acids having sulfur-containing side chains is cysteine and methionine. For example, it is reasonable to expect that replacement of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, a threonine with a serine, or a similar replacement of an amino acid with a structurally related amino acid will not have a major effect on the properties of the resulting variant polypeptide. Whether an amino acid change results in a functional HVI marker polypeptide can readily be determined by assaying its activity. Conservative substitutions are shown in Table 4 below under the heading of exemplary substitutions. More preferred substitutions are shown under the heading of preferred substitutions. Amino acid substitutions falling within the scope of the invention, are, in general, accomplished by selecting substitutions that do not differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the peptide backbone in the area of the substitution, (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain. After the substitutions are introduced, the variants are screened for biological activity. [0190] Alternatively, similar amino acids for making conservative substitutions can be grouped into three categories based on the identity of the side chains. The first group includes glutamic acid, aspartic acid, arginine, lysine, histidine, which all have charged side chains; the second group includes glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, glutamine, asparagine; and the third group includes leucine, isoleucine, valine, alanine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, methionine, as described in Zubay, G., Biochemistry, third edition, Wm.C. Brown Publishers (1993).
[0191] Thus, a predicted non-essential amino acid residue in an HYI marker polypeptide is typically replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family. Alternatively, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of an HVI marker gene coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for an activity of the parent polypeptide to identify mutants which retain that activity. Following mutagenesis of the coding sequences, the encoded peptide can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the peptide can be determined.
[0192] Accordingly, the present invention also contemplates variants of the naturally-occurring HVI marker polypeptide sequences or their biologically-active fragments, wherein the variants are distinguished from the naturally-occurring sequence by the addition, deletion, or substitution of one or more amino acid residues. In general, variants will display at least about 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 % similarity to a parent HVI marker polypeptide sequence as, for example, set forth in any one of SEQ IDNO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114. Desirably, variants will have at least 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 % sequence identity to a parent HVI marker polypeptide sequence as, for example, set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114. Moreover, sequences differing from the native or parent sequences by the addition, deletion, or substitution of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 ,90, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500 or more amino acids but which retain the properties of the parent HVI marker polypeptide are contemplated. HVI marker polypeptides also include polypeptides that are encoded by polynucleotides that hybridize under stringency conditions as defined herein, especially high stringency conditions, to the HVI marker polynucleotide sequences of the invention, or the non-coding strand thereof, as described above.
[0193] In one embodiment, variant polypeptides differ from an BTVI marker sequence by at least one but by less than 50, 40, 30, 20, 15, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3 or 2 amino acid residue(s). In another, variant polypeptides differ from the corresponding sequence in any one of SEQ IDNO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 by at least 1% but less than 20%, 15%, 10% or 5% of the residues. (If this comparison requires alignment the sequences should be aligned for maximum similarity. "Looped" out sequences from deletions or insertions, or mismatches, are considered differences.) The differences are, suitably, differences or changes at a non-essential residue or a conservative substitution.
[0194] A "non-essential" amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence of an embodiment polypeptide without abolishing or substantially altering one or more of its activities. Suitably, the alteration does not substantially alter one of these activities, for example, the activity is at least 20%, 40%, 60%, 70% or 80% of wild-type. An "essential" amino acid residue is a residue that, when altered from the wild-type sequence of an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention, results in abolition of an activity of the parent molecule such that less than 20% of the wild-type activity is present.
[0195] In other embodiments, a variant polypeptide includes an amino acid sequence having at least about 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94% 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or more similarity to a corresponding sequence of an HVI marker polypeptide as, for example, set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 and has the activity of that HVI marker polypeptide.
[0196] HVI marker polypeptides of the invention may be prepared by any suitable procedure known to those of skill in the art. For example, the polypeptides may be prepared by a procedure including the steps of: (a) preparing a chimeric construct comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes at least a portion of an HVI marker polynucleotide and that is operably linked to a regulatory element; (b) introducing the chimeric construct into a host cell; (c) culturing the host cell to express the HVI marker polypeptide; and (d) isolating the HVI marker polypeptide from the host cell. In illustrative examples, the nucleotide sequence encodes at least a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 or a variant thereof. [0197] The chimeric construct is typically in the form of an expression vector, which is suitably selected from self-replicating extra-chromosomal vectors (e.g., plasmids) and vectors that integrate into a host genome.
[0198] The regulatory element will generally be appropriate for the host cell employed for expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide. Numerous types of expression vectors and regulatory elements are known in the art for a variety of host cells. Illustrative elements of this type include, but are not restricted to, promoter sequences (e.g., constitutive or inducible promoters which may be naturally occurring or combine elements of more than one promoter), leader or signal sequences, ribosomal binding sites, transcriptional start and stop sequences, translational start and termination sequences, and enhancer or activator sequences.
[0199] In some embodiments, the expression vector comprises a selectable marker gene to permit the selection of transformed host cells. Selectable marker genes are well known in the art and will vary with the host cell employed.
[0200] The expression vector may also include a fusion partner (typically provided by the expression vector) so that the HVI marker polypeptide is produced as a fusion polypeptide with the fusion partner. The main advantage of fusion partners is that they assist identification and/or purification of the fusion polypeptide. In order to produce the fusion polypeptide, it is necessary to ligate the HVI marker polynucleotide into an expression vector so that the translational reading frames of the fusion partner and the HVI marker polynucleotide coincide. Well known examples of fusion partners include, but are not limited to, glutathione-S- transferase (GST), Fc potion of human IgG, maltose binding protein (MBP) and hexahistidine (HIS6), which are particularly useful for isolation of the fusion polypeptide by affinity chromatography. In some embodiments, fusion polypeptides are purified by affinity chromatography using matrices to which the fusion partners bind such as but not limited to glutathione-, amylose-, and nickel- or cobalt-conjugated resins. Many such matrices are available in "kit" form, such as the QIAexpress™ system (Qiagen) useful with (HIS6) fusion partners and the Pharmacia GST purification system. Other fusion partners known in the art are light-emitting proteins such as green fluorescent protein (GFP) and luciferase, which serve as fluorescent "tags" that permit the identification and/or isolation of fusion polypeptides by fluorescence microscopy or by flow cytometry. Flow cytometric methods such as fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) are particularly useful in this latter application.
[0201] Desirably, the fusion partners also possess protease cleavage sites, such as for Factor Xa or Thrombin, which permit the relevant protease to partially digest the fusion polypeptide and thereby liberate the HVI marker polypeptide from the fusion construct. The liberated polypeptide can then be isolated from the fusion partner by subsequent chromatographic separation. [0202] Fusion partners also include within their scope "epitope tags," which are usually short peptide sequences for which a specific antibody is available. Well known examples of epitope tags for which specific monoclonal antibodies are readily available include c-Myc, influenza virus, haemagglutinin and FLAG tags. [0203] The chimeric constructs of the invention are introduced into a host by any suitable means including "transduction" and "transfection", which are art recognized as meaning the introduction of a nucleic acid, for example, an expression vector, into a recipient cell by nucleic acid-mediated gene transfer. "Transformation," however, refers to a process in which a host's genotype is changed as a result of the cellular uptake of exogenous DNA or RNA, and, for example, the transformed cell comprises the expression system of the invention. There are many methods for introducing chimeric constructs into cells. Typically, the method employed will depend on the choice of host cell. Technology for introduction of chimeric constructs into host cells is well known to those of skill in the art. Four general classes of methods for delivering nucleic acid molecules into cells have been described: (1) chemical methods such as calcium phosphate precipitation, polyethylene glycol (PEG)-mediate precipitation and lipofection; (2) physical methods such as microinjection, electroporation, acceleration methods and vacuum infiltration; (3) vector based methods such as bacterial and viral vector-mediated transformation; and (4) receptor-mediated. Transformation techniques that fall within these and other classes are well known to workers in the art, and new techniques are continually becoming known. The particular choice of a transformation technology will be determined by its efficiency to transform certain host species as well as the experience and preference of the person practising the invention with a particular methodology of choice. It will be apparent to the skilled person that the particular choice of a transformation system to introduce a chimeric construct into cells is not essential to or a limitation of the invention, provided it achieves an acceptable level of nucleic acid transfer.
[0204] Recombinant HVI marker polypeptides may be produced by culturing a host cell transformed with a chimeric construct. The conditions appropriate for expression of the HVI marker polynucleotide will vary with the choice of expression vector and the host cell and are easily ascertained by one skilled in the art through routine experimentation. Suitable host cells for expression may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic. An illustrative host cell for expression of a polypeptide of the invention is a bacterium. The bacterium used may be Escherichia coli. Alternatively, the host cell may be a yeast cell or an insect cell such as, for example, SF9 cells that may be utilized with a baculovirus expression system.
[0205] Recombinant HVI marker polypeptides can be conveniently prepared using standard protocols as described for example in Sambrook, et ah, (1989, supra), in particular
Sections 16 and 17; Ausubel et ah, (1994, supra), in particular Chapters 10 and 16; and Coligan et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN PROTEIN SCIENCE (John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1995- 1997), in particular Chapters 1, 5 and 6. Alternatively, the HVI marker polypeptides may be synthesized by chemical synthesis, e.g., using solution synthesis or solid phase synthesis as described, for example, in Chapter 9 of Atherton and Shephard {supra) and in Roberge et al (1995, Science 269: 202).
4. Antigen-binding molecules
[0206] The invention also provides antigen-binding molecules that are specifically immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention. In one embodiment, the antigen-binding molecule comprise whole polyclonal antibodies. Such antibodies may be prepared, for example, by injecting an HVI marker polypeptide of the invention into a production species, which may include mice or rabbits, to obtain polyclonal antisera. Methods of producing polyclonal antibodies are well known to those skilled in the art. Exemplary protocols which may be used are described for example in Coligan et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN IMMUNOLOGY, (John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 1991), and Ausubel et al, (1994- 1998, supra), in particular Section III of Chapter 11.
[0207] In lieu of polyclonal antisera obtained in a production species, monoclonal antibodies may be produced using the standard method as described, for example, by Kδhler and Milstein (1975, Nature 256, 495-497), or by more recent modifications thereof as described, for example, in Coligan et al, (1991, supra) by immortalising spleen or other antibody producing cells derived from a production species which has been inoculated with one or more of the HVI marker polypeptides of the invention.
[0208] The invention also contemplates as antigen-binding molecules Fv, Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2 immunoglobulin fragments. Alternatively, the antigen-binding molecule may comprise a synthetic stabilized Fv fragment. Exemplary fragments of this type include single chain Fv fragments (sFv, frequently termed scFv) in which a peptide linker is used to bridge the N terminus or C terminus of a YH domain with the C terminus or N-terminus, respectively, of a \L domain. ScFv lack all constant parts of whole antibodies and are not able to activate complement. ScFvs may be prepared, for example, in accordance with methods outlined in Kreber et al (Kreber et al 1997, J. Immunol. Methods; 201(1): 35-55). Alternatively, they may be prepared by methods described in U.S. Patent No 5,091,513, European Patent No 239,400 or the articles by Winter and Milstein (1991, Nature 349:293) and Plϋckthun et al (1996, In Antibody engineering: A practical approach. 203-252). In another embodiment, the synthetic stabilized Fv fragment comprises a disulfide stabilized Fv (dsFv) in which cysteine residues are introduced into the YH and VL domains such that in the fully folded Fv molecule the two residues will form a disulfide bond between them. Suitable methods of producing dsFv are described for example in (Glockscuther et al. Biochem. 29: 1363-1367; Reiter et al. 1994, J. Biol. Chem. 269: 18327-18331; Reiter et al. 1994, Biochem. 33: 5451-5459; Reiter et al. 1994. Cancer Res. 54: 2714-2718; Webber et al. 1995, MoI. Immunol. 32: 249-258).
[0209] Phage display and combinatorial methods for generating anti-HVI marker polypeptide antigen-binding molecules are known in the art (as described in, e.g., Ladner et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409; Kang et al. International Publication No. WO 92/18619; Dower et al. International Publication No. WO 91/17271; Winter et al. International Publication WO 92/20791; Markland et al International Publication No. WO 92/15679; Breitling et al. International Publication WO 93/01288; McCafferty et al. International Publication No. WO 92/01047; Garrard et al. International Publication No. WO 92/09690; Ladner et al. International Publication No. WO 90/02809; Fuchs et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1370-1372; Hay et al. (1992) Hum Antibod Hybridomas 3:81-85; Huse et al. (1989) Science 246:1275-1281; Griffiths et al. (1993) £M50 J 12:725-734; Hawkins et al. (1992) JMoI Biol 226:889-896; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature 352:624-628; Gram et al. (1992) PNAS 89:3576-3580; Garrad et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1373-1377; Hoogenboom et al. (1991) Nuc Acid Res 19:4133-4137; and
Barbas et al. (1991) PNAS 88:7978-7982). The antigen-binding molecules can be used to screen expression libraries for variant HVI marker polypeptides. They can also be used to detect and/or isolate the HVI marker polypeptides of the invention. Thus, the invention also contemplates the use of antigen-binding molecules to isolate HVI marker polypeptides using , for example, any suitable immunoaffmity based method including, but not limited to, immunochromatography and immunoprecipitation. A suitable method utilizes solid phase adsorption in which anti-HVI marker polypeptide antigen-binding molecules are attached to a suitable resin, the resin is contacted with a sample suspected of containing an HVI marker polypeptide, and the HVI marker polypeptide, if any, is subsequently eluted from the resin. Illustrative resins include: Sepharose™ (Pharmacia), Poros™ resins (Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis),
Actigel Superflow™ resins (Sterogene Bioseparations Inc., Carlsbad Calif.), and Dynabeads™ (Dynal Inc., Lake Success, N.Y.).
[0210] The antigen-binding molecule can be coupled to a compound, e.g., a label such as a radioactive nucleus, or imaging agent, e.g. a radioactive, enzymatic, or other, e.g., imaging agent, e.g., a NMR contrast agent. Labels which produce detectable radioactive emissions or fluorescence are preferred. An anti-HVI marker polypeptide antigen-binding molecule (e.g., monoclonal antibody) can be used to detect HVI marker polypeptides (e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the protein. In certain advantageous application in accordance with the present invention, such antigen-binding molecules can be used to monitor HVI marker polypeptides levels in biological samples (including whole cells and fluids) for diagnosing the presence, absence, , degree, of herpes virus infection or risk of development of disease as a consequences of herpes virus infection. Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance (i.e., antibody labeling). Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include 125I, 1311, 35S or 3H. The label may be selected from a group including a chromogen, a catalyst, an enzyme, a fluorophore, a chemiluminescent molecule, a lanthanide ion such as Europium (Eu34), a radioisotope and a direct visual label. In the case of a direct visual label, use may be made of a colloidal metallic or non-metallic particle, a dye particle, an enzyme or a substrate, an organic polymer, a latex particle, a liposome, or other vesicle containing a signal producing substance and the like.
[0211] A large number of enzymes useful as labels is disclosed in United States Patent Specifications U.S. 4,366,241, U.S. 4,843,000, and U.S. 4,849,338. Enzyme labels useful in the present invention include alkaline phosphatase, horseradish peroxidase, luciferase, β- galactosidase, glucose oxidase, lysozyme, malate dehydrogenase and the like. The enzyme label may be used alone or in combination with a second enzyme in solution.
5. Methods of detecting aberrant HVI marker gene expression or alleles
[0212] The present invention is predicated in part on the discovery that horses infected with a herpes virus (especially EHV), and typically those with an active herpes virus infection, have aberrant expression of certain genes or certain alleles of genes, referred to herein as HVI marker genes, as compared to horses not infected with the herpes virus. It is proposed that aberrant expression of these genes or their homologues or orthologues will be found in other animals with herpes virus infection. Accordingly, the present invention features a method for assessing herpes virus infection or for diagnosing herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection, in a subject, which is suitably a mammal, by detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker gene in a biological sample obtained from the subject. Suitably, the herpes virus infection includes infection by a member of a herpes virus subfamily selected from alpha herpes virinae, beta herpes virinae and gamma herpes virinae. Illustrative examples of herpes viruses from the alpha herpes virinae subfamily include HHV-I (HSV-I), HHV-2 (HSV-2), HHV-3 (VZV), and equine herpes viruses (e.g., EHV-I and EHV-4). Non-limiting examples of herpes viruses from the beta herpes virinae subfamily include HHV-5 (CMV), HHV-6 (roseolovirus) and HHV-7. Representative examples of herpes viruses from the gamma herpes virinae subfamily include, but are not limited to, HHV-4 (lymphocryptovirus, EBV), and HHV-8 (rhadinovirus). In specific embodiments, the herpes virus is EHV, especially EHV-I and more especially active EHV-I. [0213] In order to make the assessment or the diagnosis, it will be desirable to qualitatively or quantitatively determine the levels of HVI marker gene transcripts, or the presence of levels of particular alleles of an HVI marker gene, or the level or functional activity of HVI marker polypeptides, hi some embodiments, the presence, degree or stage of herpes virus infection or risk of development of herpes virus sequelae is diagnosed when an HVI marker gene product is present at a detectably lower level in the biological sample as compared to the level at which that gene is present in a reference sample obtained from normal subjects or from subjects not infected with herpes virus, especially not actively infected with herpes virus. In other embodiments, the presence, degree or stage of herpes virus infection or risk of development of herpes virus sequelae is diagnosed when an HVI marker gene product is present at a detectably higher level in the biological sample as compared to the level at which that gene is present in a reference sample obtained from normal subjects or from subjects not infected with herpes virus, especially not actively infected with herpes virus. Generally, such diagnoses are made when the level or functional activity of an HVI marker gene product in the biological sample varies from the level or functional activity of a corresponding HVI marker gene product in the reference sample by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 92%, 94%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99%, or even by at least about 99.5%, 99.9%, 99.95%, 99.99%, 99.995% or 99.999%, or even by at least about 100%, 200%, 300%, 400%, 500%, 600%, 700%, 800%, 900% or 1000%. Illustrative increases or decreases in the expression level of representative HVI marker genes are shown in Tables 5-7. [0214] The corresponding gene product is generally selected from the same gene product that is present in the biological sample, a gene product expressed from a variant gene (e.g., an homologous or orthologous gene) including an allelic variant, or a splice variant or protein product thereof. In some embodiments, the method comprises measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 HVI marker genes.
[0215] Generally, the biological sample contains blood, especially peripheral blood, or a fraction or extract thereof. Typically, the biological sample comprises blood cells such as mature, immature and developing leukocytes, including lymphocytes, polymorphonuclear leukocytes, neutrophils, monocytes, reticulocytes, basophils, coelomocytes, haemocytes, eosinophils, megakaryocytes, macrophages, dendritic cells natural killer cells, or fraction of etal
such cells (e.g., a nucleic acid or protein fraction). In specific embodiments, the biological sample comprises leukocytes including peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC).
5.1 Nucleic acid-based diagnostics
[0216] Nucleic acid used in polynucleotide-based assays can be isolated from cells contained in the biological sample, according to standard methodologies (Sambrook, et ah, 1989, supra; and Ausubel et ah, 1994, supra). The nucleic acid is typically fractionated (e.g., poly A+ RNA) or whole cell RNA. Where RNA is used as the subject of detection, it may be desired to convert the RNA to a complementary DNA. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid is amplified by a template-dependent nucleic acid amplification technique. A number of template dependent processes are available to amplify the HVI marker sequences present in a given template sample. An exemplary nucleic acid amplification technique is the polymerase chain reaction (referred to as PCR) which is described in detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195, 4,683,202 and 4,800,159, Ausubel {supra), and in Innis et ah, ("PCR Protocols", Academic Press, Inc., San Diego Calif., 1990). Briefly, in PCR, two primer sequences are prepared that are complementary to regions on opposite complementary strands of the marker sequence. An excess of deoxynucleoside triphosphates are added to a reaction mixture along with a DNA polymerase, e.g., Taq polymerase. If a cognate HVI marker sequence is present in a sample, the primers will bind to the marker and the polymerase will cause the primers to be extended along the marker sequence by adding on nucleotides. By raising and lowering the temperature of the reaction mixture, the extended primers will dissociate from the marker to form reaction products, excess primers will bind to the marker and to the reaction products and the process is repeated. A reverse transcriptase PCR amplification procedure may be performed in order to quantify the amount of mRNA amplified. Methods of reverse transcribing RNA into cDNA are well known and described in Sambrook et ah, 1989, supra. Alternative methods for reverse transcription utilize thermostable, RNA-dependent DNA polymerases. These methods are described in WO 90/07641. Polymerase chain reaction methodologies are well known in the art.
[0217] In certain advantageous embodiments, the template-dependent amplification involves the quantification of transcripts in real-time. For example, RNA or DNA may be quantified using the Real-Time PCR technique (Higuchi, 1992, et ah, Biotechnology 10: 413- 417). By determining the concentration of the amplified products of the target DNA in PCR reactions that have completed the same number of cycles and are in their linear ranges, it is possible to determine the relative concentrations of the specific target sequence in the original DNA mixture. If the DNA mixtures are cDNAs synthesized from RNAs isolated from different tissues or cells, the relative abundance of the specific mRNA from which the target sequence was derived can be determined for the respective tissues or cells. This direct proportionality between the concentration of the PCR products and the relative mRNA abundance is only true in the linear range of the PCR reaction. The final concentration of the target DNA in the plateau portion of the curve is determined by the availability of reagents in the reaction mix and is independent of the original concentration of target DNA.
[0218] Another method for amplification is the ligase chain reaction ("LCR"), disclosed in EPO No. 320 308. In LCR, two complementary probe pairs are prepared, and in the presence of the target sequence, each pair will bind to opposite complementary strands of the target such that they abut. In the presence of a ligase, the two probe pairs will link to form a single unit. By temperature cycling, as in PCR, bound ligated units dissociate from the target and then serve as "target sequences" for ligation of excess probe pairs. U.S. Pat. No. 4,883,750 describes a method similar to LCR for binding probe pairs to a target sequence.
[0219] Qβ Replicase, described in PCT Application No. PCT/US87/00880, may also be used. In this method, a replicative sequence of RNA that has a region complementary to that of a target is added to a sample in the presence of an RNA polymerase. The polymerase will copy the replicative sequence that can then be detected. [0220] An isothermal amplification method, in which restriction endonucleases and ligases are used to achieve the amplification of target molecules that contain nucleotide 5'α-thio- triphosphates in one strand of a restriction site may also be useful in the amplification of nucleic acids in the present invention, Walker et at., (1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL U.S.A 89: 392-396).
[0221] Strand Displacement Amplification (SDA) is another method of carrying out isothermal amplification of nucleic acids which involves multiple rounds of strand displacement and synthesis, i.e., nick translation. A similar method, called Repair Chain Reaction (RCR), involves annealing several probes throughout a region targeted for amplification, followed by a repair reaction in which only two of the four bases are present. The other two bases can be added as biotinylated derivatives for easy detection. A similar approach is used in SDA. Target specific sequences can also be detected using a cyclic probe reaction (CPR). In CPR, a probe having 31 and 5' sequences of non-specific DNA and a middle sequence of specific RNA is hybridized to DNA that is present in a sample. Upon hybridization, the reaction is treated with RNase H, and the products of the probe identified as distinctive products that are released after digestion. The original template is annealed to another cycling probe and the reaction is repeated.
[0222] Still another amplification method described in GB Application No. 2 202 328, and in PCT Application No. PCT/US89/01025, may be used. In the former application, "modified" primers are used in a PCR-like, template- and enzyme-dependent synthesis. The primers may be modified by labeling with a capture moiety (e.g., biotin) and/or a detector moiety (e.g., enzyme). In the latter application, an excess of labeled probes are added to a sample. In the presence of the target sequence, the probe binds and is cleaved catalytically. After cleavage, the target sequence is released intact to be bound by excess probe. Cleavage of the labeled probe signals the presence of the target sequence.
[0223] Other nucleic acid amplification procedures include transcription-based amplification systems (TAS), including nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA) and 3SR (Kwoh et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. Sd. U.S.A., 86: 1173; Gingeras et al, PCT
Application WO 88/10315). InNASBA, the nucleic acids can be prepared for amplification by standard phenol/chloroform extraction, heat denaturation of a clinical sample, treatment with lysis buffer and minispin columns for isolation of DNA and RNA or guanidinium chloride extraction of RNA. These amplification techniques involve annealing a primer which has target specific sequences. Following polymerization, DNA/RNA hybrids are digested with RNase H while double stranded DNA molecules are heat denatured again. In either case the single stranded DNA is made fully double stranded by addition of second target specific primer, followed by polymerization. The double-stranded DNA molecules are then multiply transcribed by an RNA polymerase such as T7 or SP6. In an isothermal cyclic reaction, the RNAs are reverse transcribed into single stranded DNA, which is then converted to double stranded DNA, and then transcribed once again with an RNA polymerase such as T7 or SP6. The resulting products, whether truncated or complete, indicate target specific sequences.
[0224] Davey et al, EPO No. 329 822 disclose a nucleic acid amplification process involving cyclically synthesizing single-stranded RNA ("ssRNA"), ssDNA, and double- stranded DNA (dsDNA), which may be used in accordance with the present invention. The ssRNA is a template for a first primer oligonucleotide, which is elongated by reverse transcriptase (RNA-dependent DNA polymerase). The RNA is then removed from the resulting DNA:RNA duplex by the action of ribonuclease H (RNase H, an RNase specific for RNA in duplex with either DNA or RNA). The resultant ssDNA is a template for a second primer, which also includes the sequences of an RNA polymerase promoter (exemplified by T7 RNA polymerase) 5' to its homology to the template. This primer is then extended by DNA polymerase (exemplified by the large "Klenow" fragment of E. coli DNA polymerase I), resulting in a double-stranded DNA ("dsDNA") molecule, having a sequence identical to that of the original RNA between the primers and having additionally, at one end, a promoter sequence. This promoter sequence can be used by the appropriate RNA polymerase to make many RNA copies of the DNA. These copies can then re-enter the cycle leading to very swift amplification. With proper choice of enzymes, this amplification can be done isothermally without addition of enzymes at each cycle. Because of the cyclical nature of this process, the starting sequence can be chosen to be in the form of either DNA or RNA. [0225] Miller et al in PCT Application WO 89/06700 disclose a nucleic acid sequence amplification scheme based on the hybridization of a promoter/primer sequence to a 22 target single-stranded DNA ("ssDNA") followed by transcription of many RNA copies of the sequence. This scheme is not cyclic, i.e., new templates are not produced from the resultant RNA transcripts. Other amplification methods include "RACE" and "one-sided PCR" (Frohman, M. A., In: "PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications", Academic Press, N.Y., 1990; Ohara et al, 1989, Proc. Natl Acad. ScI U.S.A., 86: 5673-567).
[0226] Methods based on ligation of two (or more) oligonucleotides in the presence of nucleic acid having the sequence of the resulting "di-oligonucleotide", thereby amplifying the di-oligonucleotide, may also be used for amplifying target nucleic acid sequences. Wu et al, (1989, Genomics 4: 560). [0227] Depending on the format, the HVI marker nucleic acid of interest is identified in the sample directly using a template-dependent amplification as described, for example, above, or with a second, known nucleic acid following amplification. Next, the identified product is detected. In certain applications, the detection may be performed by visual means (e.g., ethidium bromide staining of a gel). Alternatively, the detection may involve indirect identification of the product via chemiluminescence, radioactive scintigraphy of radiolabel or fluorescent label or even via a system using electrical or thermal impulse signals (Affymax Technology; Bellus, 1994, J Macromol. Sci. Pure, Appl. Chem., A31(l): 1355-1376).
[0228] In some embodiments, amplification products or "amplicons" are visualized in order to confirm amplification of the HVI marker sequences. One typical visualization method involves staining of a gel with ethidium bromide and visualization under UV light.
Alternatively, if the amplification products are integrally labeled with radio- or fluorometrically- labeled nucleotides, the amplification products can then be exposed to x-ray film or visualized under the appropriate stimulating spectra, following separation. In some embodiments, visualization is achieved indirectly. Following separation of amplification products, a labeled nucleic acid probe is brought into contact with the amplified HVI marker sequence. The probe is suitably conjugated to a chromophore but may be radiolabeled. Alternatively, the probe is conjugated to a binding partner, such as an antigen-binding molecule, or biotin, and the other member of the binding pair carries a detectable moiety or reporter molecule. The techniques involved are well known to those of skill in the art and can be found in many standard texts on molecular protocols (e.g., see Sambrook et al, 1989, supra and Ausubel et al. 1994, supra). For example, chromophore or radiolabel probes or primers identify the target during or following amplification.
[0229] In certain embodiments, target nucleic acids are quantified using blotting techniques, which are well known to those of skill in the art. Southern blotting involves the use of DNA as a target, whereas Northern blotting involves the use of RNA as a target. Each provide different types of information, although cDNA blotting is analogous, in many aspects, to blotting or KNA species. Briefly, a probe is used to target a DNA or RNA species that has been immobilized on a suitable matrix, often a filter of nitrocellulose. The different species should be spatially separated to facilitate analysis. This often is accomplished by gel electrophoresis of nucleic acid species followed by "blotting" on to the filter. Subsequently, the blotted target is incubated with a probe (usually labeled) under conditions that promote denaturation and rehybridization. Because the probe is designed to base pair with the target, the probe will bind a portion of the target sequence under renaturing conditions. Unbound probe is then removed, and detection is accomplished as described above.
[0230] Following detection/quantification, one may compare the results seen in a given subject with a control reaction or a statistically significant reference group of normal subjects or of subjects free of herpes virus infection, especially free of active herpes virus infection. In this way, it is possible to correlate the amount of an HVI marker nucleic acid detected with the progression or severity of the disease.
[0231] Also contemplated are genotyping methods and allelic discrimination methods and technologies such as those described by Kristensen et al. (Biotechniques 30(2): 318-322), including the use of single nucleotide polymorphism analysis, high performance liquid chromatography, TaqMan™, liquid chromatography, and mass spectrometry.
[0232] Also contemplated are biochip-based technologies such as those described by Hacia et al. (1996, Nature Genetics 14: 441-447) and Shoemaker et al (1996, Nature Genetics 14: 450-456). Briefly, these techniques involve quantitative methods for analysing large numbers of genes rapidly and accurately. By tagging genes with oligonucleotides or using fixed probe arrays, one can employ biochip technology to segregate target molecules as high density arrays and screen these molecules on the basis of hybridization. See also Pease et al. (1994, Proc. Natl. Acad. Set U.S.A. 91: 5022-5026); Fodor et al. (1991, Science 251: 767-773). Briefly, nucleic acid probes to HVI marker polynucleotides are made and attached to biochips to be used in screening and diagnostic methods, as outlined herein. The nucleic acid probes attached to the biochip are designed to be substantially complementary to specific expressed HVI marker nucleic acids, i.e., the target sequence (either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, for example in sandwich assays), such that hybridization of the target sequence and the probes of the present invention occurs. This complementarity need not be perfect; there may be any number of base pair mismatches which will interfere with hybridization between the target sequence and the nucleic acid probes of the present invention. However, if the number of mismatches is so great that no hybridization can occur under even the least stringent of hybridization conditions, the sequence is not a complementary target sequence. In certain embodiments, more than one probe per sequence is used, with either overlapping probes or probes to different sections of the target being used. That is, two, three, four or more probes, with three being desirable, are used to build in a redundancy for a particular target. The probes can be overlapping (i.e. have some sequence in common), or separate.
[0233] As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art, nucleic acids can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support in a wide variety of ways. By "immobilized" and grammatical equivalents herein is meant the association or binding between the nucleic acid probe and the solid support is sufficient to be stable under the conditions of binding, washing, analysis, and removal as outlined below. The binding can be covalent or non-covalent. By "non- covalent binding" and grammatical equivalents herein is meant one or more of either electrostatic, hydrophilic, and hydrophobic interactions. Included in non-covalent binding is the covalent attachment of a molecule, such as, streptavidin to the support and the non-covalent binding of the biotinylated probe to the streptavidin. By "covalent binding" and grammatical equivalents herein is meant that the two moieties, the solid support and the probe, are attached by at least one bond, including sigma bonds, pi bonds and coordination bonds. Covalent bonds can be formed directly between the probe and the solid support or can be formed by a cross linker or by inclusion of a specific reactive group on either the solid support or the probe or both molecules. Immobilisation may also involve a combination of covalent and non-covalent interactions.
[0234] In general, the probes are attached to the biochip in a wide variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art. As described herein, the nucleic acids can either be synthesized first, with subsequent attachment to the biochip, or can be directly synthesized on the biochip.
[0235] The biochip comprises a suitable solid or semi-solid substrate or solid support. By "substrate" or "solid support" is meant any material that can be modified to contain discrete individual sites appropriate for the attachment or association of the nucleic acid probes and is amenable to at least one detection method. As will be appreciated by practitioners in the art, the number of possible substrates are very large, and include, but are not limited to, glass and modified or functionalized glass, plastics (including acrylics, polystyrene and copolymers of styrene and other materials, polypropylene, polyethylene, polybutylene, polyurethanes, Teflon™, etc.), polysaccharides, nylon or nitrocellulose, resins, silica or silica-based materials including silicon and modified silicon, carbon, metals, inorganic glasses, plastics, etc. In general, the substrates allow optical detection and do not appreciably fluorescese.
[0236] Generally the substrate is planar, although as will be appreciated by those of skill in the art, other configurations of substrates may be used as well. For example, the probes may be placed on the inside surface of a tube, for flow-through sample analysis to minimize sample volume. Similarly, the substrate may be flexible, such as a flexible foam, including closed cell foams made of particular plastics.
[0237] In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides probes are synthesized on the substrate, as is known in the art. For example, photoactivation techniques utilizing photopolymerization compounds and techniques can be used. In an illustrative example, the nucleic acids are synthesized in situ, using well known photolithographic techniques, such as those described in WO 95/25116; WO 95/35505; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,700,637 and 5,445,934; and references cited within; these methods of attachment form the basis of the Affymetrix GeneChip™ technology. [0238] In an illustrative biochip analysis, oligonucleotide probes on the biochip are exposed to or contacted with a nucleic acid sample suspected of containing one or more herpes virus polynucleotides under conditions favouring specific hybridization. Sample extracts of DNA or RNA, either single or double-stranded, may be prepared from fluid suspensions of biological materials, or by grinding biological materials, or following a cell lysis step which includes, but is not limited to, lysis effected by treatment with SDS (or other detergents), osmotic shock, guanidinium isothiocyanate and lysozyme. Suitable DNA, which may be used in the method of the invention, includes cDNA. Such DNA may be prepared by any one of a number of commonly used protocols as for example described in Ausubel, et al., 1994, supra, and Sambrook, et al., et al, 1989, supra. [0239] Suitable RNA, which may be used in the method of the invention, includes messenger RNA, complementary RNA transcribed from DNA (cRNA) or genomic or subgenomic RNA. Such RNA may be prepared using standard protocols as for example described in the relevant sections of Ausubel, et al. 1994, supra and Sambrook, et al. 1989, supra). [0240] cDNA may be fragmented, for example, by sonication or by treatment with restriction endonucleases. Suitably, cDNA is fragmented such that resultant DNA fragments are of a length greater than the length of the immobilized oligonucleotide probe(s) but small enough to allow rapid access thereto under suitable hybridization conditions. Alternatively, fragments of cDNA may be selected and amplified using a suitable nucleotide amplification technique, as described for example above, involving appropriate random or specific primers.
[0241] Usually the target HVI marker polynucleotides are detectably labeled so that their hybridization to individual probes can be determined. The target polynucleotides are typically detectably labeled with a reporter molecule illustrative examples of which include chromogens, catalysts, enzymes, fluorochromes, chemiluminescent molecules, bioluminescent molecules, lanthanide ions (e.g., Eu34), a radioisotope and a direct visual label. In the case of a direct visual label, use may be made of a colloidal metallic or non-metallic particle, a dye 01222 particle, an enzyme or a substrate, an organic polymer, a latex particle, a liposome, or other vesicle containing a signal producing substance and the like. Illustrative labels of this type include large colloids, for example, metal colloids such as those from gold, selenium, silver, tin and titanium oxide. In some embodiments in which an enzyme is used as a direct visual label, biotinylated bases are incorporated into a target polynucleotide. Hybridization is detected by incubation with streptavidin-reporter molecules.
[0242] Suitable fluorochromes include, but are not limited to, fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC), tetramethylrhodamine isothiocyanate (TRITC), R-Phycoerythrin (RPE), and Texas Red. Other exemplary fluorochromes include those discussed by Dower et al. (International Publication WO 93/06121). Reference also may be made to the fluorochromes described in U.S. Patents 5,573,909 (Singer et al), 5,326,692 (Brinkley et al). Alternatively, reference may be made to the fluorochromes described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,227,487, 5,274,113, 5,405,975, 5,433,896, 5,442,045, 5,451,663, 5,453,517, 5,459,276, 5,516,864, 5,648,270 and 5,723,218. Commercially available fluorescent labels include, for example, fluorescein phosphoramidites such as Fluoreprime™ (Pharmacia), Fluoredite™ (Millipore) and FAM (Applied Biosystems International)
[0243] Radioactive reporter molecules include, for example, 32P, which can be detected by an X-ray or phosphoimager techniques.
[0244] The hybrid-forming step can be performed under suitable conditions for hybridizing oligonucleotide probes to test nucleic acid including DNA or RNA. In this regard, reference may be made, for example, to NUCLEIC ACID HYBRIDIZATION, A PRACTICAL APPROACH (Homes and Higgins, eds.) (IRL press, Washington D.C., 1985). In general, whether hybridization takes place is influenced by the length of the oligonucleotide probe and the polynucleotide sequence under test, the pH, the temperature, the concentration of mono- and divalent cations, the proportion of G and C nucleotides in the hybrid-forming region, the viscosity of the medium and the possible presence of denaturants. Such variables also influence the time required for hybridization. The preferred conditions will therefore depend upon the particular application. Such empirical conditions, however, can be routinely determined without undue experimentation. [0245] In certain advantageous embodiments, high discrimination hybridization conditions are used. For example, reference may be made to Wallace et al. (1979, Nucl. Acids Res. 6: 3543) who describe conditions that differentiate the hybridization of 11 to 17 base long oligonucleotide probes that match perfectly and are completely homologous to a target sequence as compared to similar oligonucleotide probes that contain a single internal base pair mismatch. Reference also may be made to Wood et al. (1985, Proc. Natl. Acid. ScI USA 82: 1585) who describe conditions for hybridization of 11 to 20 base long oligonucleotides using 3M tetramethyl ammonium chloride wherein the melting point of the hybrid depends only on the length of the oligonucleotide probe, regardless of its GC content. In addition, Drmanac et al. {supra) describe hybridization conditions that allow stringent hybridization of 6-10 nucleotide long oligomers, and similar conditions may be obtained most readily by using nucleotide analogues such as 'locked nucleic acids (Christensen et al, 2001 Biochem J 354: 481-4).
[0246] Generally, a hybridization reaction can be performed in the presence of a hybridization buffer that optionally includes a hybridization optimising agent, such as an isostabilising agent, a denaturing agent and/or a renaturation accelerant. Examples of isostabilising agents include, but are not restricted to, betaines and lower tetraalkyl ammonium salts. Denaturing agents are compositions that lower the melting temperature of double stranded nucleic acid molecules by interfering with hydrogen bonding between bases in a double stranded nucleic acid or the hydration of nucleic acid molecules. Denaturing agents include, but are not restricted to, formamide, formaldehyde, dimethylsulphoxide, tetraethyl acetate, urea, guanidium isothiocyanate, glycerol and chaotropic salts. Hybridization accelerants include heterogeneous nuclear ribonucleoprotein (hnRP) Al and cationic detergents such as cetyltrimethylammonium bromide (CTAB) and dodecyl trimethylammonium bromide (DTAB), polylysine, spermine, spermidine, single stranded binding protein (SSB), phage T4 gene 32 protein and a mixture of ammonium acetate and ethanol. Hybridization buffers may include target polynucleotides at a concentration between about 0.005 nM and about 50 nM, preferably between about 0.5 nM and 5 nM, more preferably between about 1 nM and 2 nM.
[0247] A hybridization mixture containing the target HVI marker polynucleotides is placed in contact with the array of probes and incubated at a temperature and for a time appropriate to permit hybridization between the target sequences in the target polynucleotides and any complementary probes. Contact can take place in any suitable container, for example, a dish or a cell designed to hold the solid support on which the probes are bound. Generally, incubation will be at temperatures normally used for hybridization of nucleic acids, for example, between about 20° C and about 75° C, example, about 25° C, about 30° C, about 35° C, about 40° C, about 45° C, about 50° C, about 55° C, about 60° C, or about 65° C. For probes longer than 14 nucleotides, 20° C to 50° C is desirable. For shorter probes, lower temperatures are preferred. A sample of target polynucleotides is incubated with the probes for a time sufficient to allow the desired level of hybridization between the target sequences in the target polynucleotides and any complementary probes. For example, the hybridization may be carried out at about 45° C +/-10° C in formamide for 1-2 days.
[0248] After the hybrid-forming step, the probes are washed to remove any unbound nucleic acid with a hybridization buffer, which can typically comprise a hybridization optimising agent in the same range of concentrations as for the hybridization step. This washing step leaves only bound target polynucleotides. The probes are then examined to identify which probes have hybridized to a target polynucleotide.
[0249] The hybridization reactions are then detected to determine which of the probes has hybridized to a corresponding target sequence. Depending on the nature of the reporter molecule associated with a target polynucleotide, a signal may be instrumentally detected by irradiating a fluorescent label with light and detecting fluorescence in a fluorimeter; by providing for an enzyme system to produce a dye which could be detected using a spectrophotometer; or detection of a dye particle or a colored colloidal metallic or non metallic particle using a reflectometer; in the case of using a radioactive label or chemiluminescent molecule employing a radiation counter or autoradiography. Accordingly, a detection means may be adapted to detect or scan light associated with the label which light may include fluorescent, luminescent, focussed beam or laser light. In such a case, a charge couple device (CCD) or a photocell can be used to scan for emission of light from a probe :target polynucleotide hybrid from each location in the micro-array and record the data directly in a digital computer. In some cases, electronic detection of the signal may not be necessary. For example, with enzymatically generated color spots associated with nucleic acid array format, visual examination of the array will allow interpretation of the pattern on the array. In the case of a nucleic acid array, the detection means is suitably interfaced with pattern recognition software to convert the pattern of signals from the array into a plain language genetic profile. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotide probes specific for different HVI marker gene products are in the form of a nucleic acid array and detection of a signal generated from a reporter molecule on the array is performed using a 'chip reader'. A detection system that can be used by a 'chip reader' is described for example by Pirrung et al (U.S. Patent No. 5,143,854). The chip reader will typically also incorporate some signal processing to determine whether the signal at a particular array position or feature is a true positive or maybe a spurious signal. Exemplary chip readers are described for example by Fodor et al (U.S. Patent No. 5,925,525). Alternatively, when the array is made using a mixture of individually addressable kinds of labeled microbeads, the reaction may be detected using flow cytometry.
5.2 Protein-based diagnostics [0250] Consistent with the present invention, the presence of an aberrant concentration of an HVI marker protein is indicative of the presence, degree or stage of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection or risk of development of herpes virus sequelae. HVI marker protein levels in biological samples can be assayed using any suitable method known in the art. For example, when an HVI marker protein is an enzyme, the protein can be quantified based upon its catalytic activity or based upon the number of molecules of the protein contained in a sample. Antibody-based techniques may be employed, such as, for example, immunohisto logical and immunohistochemical methods for measuring the level of a protein of interest in a tissue sample. For example, specific recognition is provided by a primary antibody (polyclonal or monoclonal) and a secondary detection system is used to detect presence (or binding) of the primary antibody. Detectable labels can be conjugated to the secondary antibody, such as a fluorescent label, a radiolabel, or an enzyme (e.g., alkaline phosphatase, horseradish peroxidase) which produces a quantifiable, e.g., colored, product. In another suitable method, the primary antibody itself can be detectably labeled. As a result, immunohistological labeling of a tissue section is provided. In some embodiments, a protein extract is produced from a biological sample (e.g., tissue, cells) for analysis. Such an extract (e.g., a detergent extract) can be subjected to western-blot or dot/slot assay of the level of the protein of interest, using routine immunoblotting methods (Jalkanen et al, 1985, J. Cell. Biol. 101: 976-985; Jalkanen et al, 1987, J. Cell. Biol. 105: 3087-3096).
[0251] Other useful antibody-based methods include immunoassays, such as the enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) and the radioimmunoassay (RIA). For example, a protein-specific monoclonal antibody, can be used both as an immunoadsorbent and as an enzyme-labeled probe to detect and quantify an HVI marker protein of interest. The amount of such protein present in a sample can be calculated by reference to the amount present in a standard preparation using a linear regression computer algorithm (see Lacobilli et al, 1988, Breast Cancer Research and Treatment 11 : 19-30). In other embodiments, two different monoclonal antibodies to the protein of interest can be employed, one as the immunoadsorbent and the other as an enzyme-labeled probe.
[0252] Additionally, recent developments in the field of protein capture arrays permit the simultaneous detection and/or quantification of a large number of proteins. For example, low-density protein arrays on filter membranes, such as the universal protein array system (Ge, 2000 Nucleic Acids Res. 28(2):e3) allow imaging of arrayed antigens using standard ELISA techniques and a scanning charge-coupled device (CCD) detector. Immuno- sensor arrays have also been developed that enable the simultaneous detection of clinical analytes. It is now possible using protein arrays, to profile protein expression in bodily fluids, such as in sera of healthy or diseased subjects, as well as in subjects pre- and post-drug treatment.
[0253] Protein capture arrays typically comprise a plurality of protein-capture agents each of which defines a spatially distinct feature of the array. The protein-capture agent can be any molecule or complex of molecules which has the ability to bind a protein and immobilise it to the site of the protein-capture agent on the array. The protein-capture agent may be a protein whose natural function in a cell is to specifically bind another protein, such as an antibody or a receptor. Alternatively, the protein-capture agent may instead be a partially or wholly synthetic or recombinant protein which specifically binds a protein. Alternatively, the protein-capture agent may be a protein which has been selected in vitro from a mutagenized, randomized, or completely random and synthetic library by its binding affinity to a specific protein or peptide target. The selection method used may optionally have been a display method such as ribosome display or phage display, as known in the art. Alternatively, the protein- capture agent obtained via in vitro selection may be a DNA or RNA aptamer which specifically binds a protein target (see, e.g., Potyrailo et al, 1998 Anal. Chem. 70:3419-3425; Cohen et at, 1998, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 95:14272-14277; Fukuda, et al, 1997 Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 37:237-238; available from SomaLogic). For example, aptamers are selected from libraries of oligonucleotides by the Selex™ process and their interaction with protein can be enhanced by covalent attachment, through incorporation of brominated deoxyuridine and UV-activated crosslinking (photoaptamers). Aptamers have the advantages of ease of production by automated oligonucleotide synthesis and the stability and robustness of DNA; universal fluorescent protein stains can be used to detect binding. Alternatively, the in vitro selected protein-capture agent may be a polypeptide (e.g., an antigen) (see, e.g., Roberts and Szostak, 1997 Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 94:12297-12302).
[0254] An alternative to an array of capture molecules is one made through 'molecular imprinting' technology, in which peptides (e.g., from the C-terminal regions of proteins) are used as templates to generate structurally complementary, sequence-specific cavities in a polymerizable matrix; the cavities can then specifically capture (denatured) proteins which have the appropriate primary amino acid sequence (e.g., available from ProteinPrint™ and Aspira Biosystems).
[0255] Exemplary protein capture arrays include arrays comprising spatially addressed antigen-binding molecules, commonly referred to as antibody arrays, which can facilitate extensive parallel analysis of numerous proteins defining a proteome or subproteome. Antibody arrays have been shown to have the required properties of specificity and acceptable background, and some are available commercially (e.g., BD Biosciences, Clontech, BioRad and Sigma). Various methods for the preparation of antibody arrays have been reported (see, e.g., Lopez et al., 2003 J. Chromatogr. B 787:19-27; Cahill, 2000 Trends in Biotechnology 7:47-51; U.S. Pat. App. Pub. 2002/0055186; U.S. Pat. App. Pub. 2003/0003599; PCT publication WO 03/062444; PCT publication WO 03/077851; PCT publication WO 02/59601; PCT publication WO 02/39120; PCT publication WO 01/79849; PCT publication WO 99/39210). The antigen-binding molecules of such arrays may recognise at least a subset of proteins expressed by a cell or population of cells, illustrative examples of which include growth factor receptors, hormone receptors, neurotransmitter receptors, catecholamine receptors, amino acid derivative receptors, cytokine receptors, extracellular matrix receptors, antibodies, lectins, cytokines, serpins, proteases, kinases, phosphatases, ras-like GTPases, hydrolases, steroid hormone receptors, transcription factors, heat-shock transcription factors, DNA-binding proteins, zinc-finger proteins, leucine-zipper proteins, homeodomain proteins, intracellular signal transduction modulators and effectors, apoptosis-related factors, DNA synthesis factors, DNA repair factors, DNA recombination factors, cell-surface antigens, hepatitis C virus (HCV) proteases and HTV proteases.
[0256] Antigen-binding molecules for antibody arrays are made either by conventional immunisation (e.g., polyclonal sera and hybridomas), or as recombinant fragments, usually expressed in E. coli, after selection from phage display or ribosome display libraries (e.g., available from Cambridge Antibody Technology, Biolnvent, Affitech and Biosite). Alternatively, 'combibodies' comprising non-covalent associations of VH and VL domains, can be produced in a matrix format created from combinations of diabody-producing bacterial clones (e.g., available from Domantis). Exemplary antigen-binding molecules for use as protein-capture agents include monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, Fv, Fab, Fab' and F(ab')2 immunoglobulin fragments, synthetic stabilized Fv fragments, e.g., single chain Fv fragments (scFv), disulfide stabilized Fv fragments (dsFv), single variable region domains (dAbs) minibodies, combibodies and multivalent antibodies such as diabodies and multi-scFv, single domains from camelids or engineered human equivalents.
[0257] Individual spatially distinct protein-capture agents are typically attached to a support surface, which is generally planar or contoured. Common physical supports include glass slides, silicon, microwells, nitrocellulose or PVDF membranes, and magnetic and other microbeads.
[0258] While microdrops of protein delivered onto planar surfaces are widely used, related alternative architectures include CD centrifugation devices based on developments in microfluidics (e.g., available from Gyros) and specialized chip designs, such as engineered microchannels in a plate (e.g., The Living Chip™, available from Biotrove) and tiny 3D posts on a silicon surface (e.g., available from Zyomyx).
[0259] Particles in suspension can also be used as the basis of arrays, providing they are coded for identification; systems include color coding for microbeads (e.g., available from Luminex, Bio-Rad and Nanomics Biosystems) and semiconductor nanocrystals (e.g., QDots™, available from Quantum Dots), and barcoding for beads (UltraPlex™, available from Smartbeads) and multimetal microrods (Nanobarcodes™ particles, available from Surromed). Beads can also be assembled into planar arrays on semiconductor chips (e.g., available from LEAPS technology and BioArray Solutions). Where particles are used, individual protein- capture agents are typically attached to an individual particle to provide the spatial definition or separation of the array. The particles may then be assayed separately, but in parallel, in a compartmentalized way, for example in the wells of a microtitre plate or in separate test tubes.
[0260] In operation, a protein sample, which is optionally fragmented to form peptide fragments (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. App. Pub. 2002/0055186), is delivered to a protein- capture array under conditions suitable for protein or peptide binding, and the array is washed to remove unbound or non-specifically bound components of the sample from the array. Next, the presence or amount of protein or peptide bound to each feature of the array is detected using a suitable detection system. The amount of protein bound to a feature of the array may be determined relative to the amount of a second protein bound to a second feature of the array. In certain embodiments, the amount of the second protein in the sample is already known or known to be invariant.
[0261] For analysing differential expression of proteins between two cells or cell populations, a protein sample of a first cell or population of cells is delivered to the array under conditions suitable for protein binding. In an analogous manner, a protein sample of a second cell or population of cells to a second array, is delivered to a second array which is identical to the first array. Both arrays are then washed to remove unbound or non-specifically bound components of the sample from the arrays. In a final step, the amounts of protein remaining bound to the features of the first array are compared to the amounts of protein remaining bound to the corresponding features of the second array. To determine the differential protein expression pattern of the two cells or populations of cells, the amount of protein bound to individual features of the first array is subtracted from the amount of protein bound to the corresponding features of the second array.
[0262] In an illustrative example, fluorescence labeling can be used for detecting protein bound to the array. The same instrumentation as used for reading DNA microarrays is applicable to protein-capture arrays. For differential display, capture arrays (e.g. antibody arrays) can be probed with fluorescently labeled proteins from two different cell states, in which cell lysates are labeled with different fluorophores (e.g., Cy-3 and Cy-5) and mixed, such that the color acts as a readout for changes in target abundance. Fluorescent readout sensitivity can be amplified 10-100 fold by tyramide signal amplification (TSA) (e.g., available from PerkinElmer Lifesciences). Planar waveguide technology (e.g., available from Zeptosens) enables ultrasensitive fluorescence detection, with the additional advantage of no washing procedures. High sensitivity can also be achieved with suspension beads and particles, using phycoerythrin as label (e.g., available from Luminex) or the properties of semiconductor nanocrystals (e.g., available from Quantum Dot). Fluorescence resonance energy transfer has been adapted to detect binding of unlabeled ligands, which may be useful on arrays (e.g., available from Affibody). Several alternative readouts have been developed, including adaptations of surface plasmon resonance (e.g., available from HTS Biosystems and Intrinsic Bioprobes), rolling circle DNA amplification (e.g., available from Molecular Staging), mass spectrometry (e.g., available from Sense Proteomic, Ciphergen, Intrinsic and Bioprobes), resonance light scattering (e.g., available from Genicon Sciences) and atomic force microscopy (e.g., available from BioForce Laboratories). A microfluidics system for automated sample incubation with arrays on glass slides and washing has been co-developed by NextGen and Perkin Elmer Life Sciences.
[0263] In certain embodiments, the techniques used for detection of HVI marker expression products will include internal or external standards to permit quantitative or semi- quantitative determination of those products, to thereby enable a valid comparison of the level or functional activity of these expression products in a biological sample with the corresponding expression products in a reference sample or samples. Such standards can be determined by the skilled practitioner using standard protocols. In specific examples, absolute values for the level or functional activity of individual expression products are determined. [0264] In specific embodiments, the diagnostic method is implemented using a system as disclosed, for example, in International Publication No. WO 02/090579 and in copending PCT Application No. PCT/AU03/01517 filed November 14, 2003, comprising at least one end station coupled to a base station. The base station is typically coupled to one or more databases comprising predetermined data from a number of individuals representing the level or functional activity of HVI marker expression products, together with indications of the actual status of the individuals (e.g., presence, absence, degree, stage of herpes virus infection or risk of development of herpes virus sequelae) when the predetermined data was collected. In operation, the base station is adapted to receive from the end station, typically via a communications network, subject data representing a measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one expression product in a biological sample obtained from a test subject and to compare the subject data to the predetermined data stored in the database(s). Comparing the subject and predetermined data allows the base station to determine the status of the subject in accordance with the results of the comparison. Thus, the base station attempts to identify individuals having similar parameter values to the test subject and once the status has been determined on the basis of that identification, the base station provides an indication of the diagnosis to the end station.
5.3 Kits
[0265] AU the essential materials and reagents required for detecting and quantifying HVI marker gene expression products may be assembled together in a kit. The kits may also optionally include appropriate reagents for detection of labels, positive and negative controls, washing solutions, blotting membranes, microtitre plates dilution buffers and the like. For example, a nucleic acid-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polynucleotide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) a primer or probe that specifically hybridizes to an HVI marker polynucleotide. Also included may be enzymes suitable for amplifying nucleic acids including various polymerases (Reverse Transcriptase, Taq, Sequenase™ DNA ligase etc. depending on the nucleic acid amplification technique employed), deoxynucleotides and buffers to provide the necessary reaction mixture for amplification. Such kits also generally will comprise, in suitable means, distinct containers for each individual reagent and enzyme as well as for each primer or probe. Alternatively, a protein-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polypeptide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polynucleotide. The kit can also feature various devices and reagents for performing one of the assays described herein; and/or printed instructions for using the kit to quantify the expression of an HVI marker gene.
[0266] The kits may optionally include appropriate reagents for detection of labels, positive and negative controls, washing solutions, blotting membranes, microtitre plates dilution buffers and the like. For example, a nucleic acid-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polynucleotide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) a primer or probe that specifically hybridizes to an HVI marker polynucleotide. Also included may be enzymes suitable for amplifying nucleic acids including various polymerases (Reverse Transcriptase, Taq, Sequenase™ DNA ligase etc. depending on the nucleic acid amplification technique employed), deoxynucleotides and buffers to provide the necessary reaction mixture for amplification. Such kits also generally will comprise, in suitable means, distinct containers for each individual reagent and enzyme as well as for each primer or probe. Alternatively, a protein-based detection kit may include (i) an HVI marker polypeptide (which may be used as a positive control), (ii) an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with an HVI marker polynucleotide. The kit can also feature various devices and reagents for performing one of the assays described herein; and/or printed instructions for using the kit to quantify the expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide.
6. Methods of treatment or prophylaxis
[0267] The present invention also extends to the treatment or prevention of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection, in subjects following positive diagnosis for the risk of development of herpes virus sequelae in the subjects. Generally, the treatment will include administering to a positively diagnosed subject an effective amount of an agent or therapy that ameliorates the symptoms or reverses the development of herpes virus infection, or that reduces the potential of the subject to developing herpes virus sequelae. Current agents suitable for treating herpes virus infections include, but are not limited to, acyclovir, famcyclovir, valacyclovir, gancyclovir, pencyclovir, azidothymidine, cytidine arabinoside, ribavirin, amantadine, iododeoxyuridine, poscarnet, trifluoridine, methizazone, vidarabine, levanisole 4-amino-α,α-dimethyl-2-ethoxymethy 1- 1 H-imidazo [4, 5 -c] quinoline- 1 -ethanol as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20020147210, hydroxylated tolans as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20020103262, cyclopropanated carbocyclic 2'-deoxynucleosides as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,840,728, thymidine-analogous antiherpetic drugs as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 6,048,843, Foscarnet (PFA, Foscavir™ from Astra, Sodertlje, Sweden), 5-(E)-bromovinyl uracil analogues and related pyrimidine nucleosides as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20040053891, l-aryl-4-oxo-l,4-dihydro-3-quinolinecarboxarnides as disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20040024209, and spermidine catecholamide iron chelators as disclosed, for example, by Raymond et al. (1984, Biochem. Bioph. Res. Comm., 121(3): 848-854).
[0268] Alternatively, the subject may be treated using an apparatus, as described for example in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20020099426, which delivers electrical stimulation to an infected skin or mucosa of a patient. The electrical stimulation is applied as a series of electrical pulses having different electrical characteristics.
[0269] However, it will be understood that the present invention encompasses any agent or process that is useful for treating or preventing a herpes virus infection and is not limited to the aforementioned illustrative compounds and formulations. [0270] Typically, herpes virus infection-relieving agents will be administered in pharmaceutical (or veterinary) compositions together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and in an effective amount to achieve their intended purpose. The dose of active compounds administered to a subject should be sufficient to achieve a beneficial response in the subject over time such as a reduction in, or relief from, the symptoms of herpes virus infection, especially active herpes virus infection. The quantity of the pharmaceutically active compounds(s) to be administered may depend on the subject to be treated inclusive of the age, sex, weight and general health condition thereof. In this regard, precise amounts of the active compound(s) for administration will depend on the judgement of the practitioner. In determining the effective amount of the active compound(s) to be administered in the treatment or prevention of herpes virus infection, the physician or veterinarian may evaluate severity of any symptom associated with the presence of herpes virus infection including symptoms related to herpes virus sequelae as mentioned above. In any event, those of skill in the art may readily determine suitable dosages of the herpes virus infection-relieving agents and suitable treatment regimens without undue experimentation. [0271] In specific embodiments, the present invention extends to the management of EHV infection, management of relapse of EHV infection, or prevention of further infection of EHV in subjects following positive diagnosis for the presence, or stage of EHV in the subjects. Generally, the management includes isolation to prevent further infection, palliative therapies, and rest to avoid long-term damage. The present invention permits more effective quarantine and management decisions to be made at a time when the animal is infective - veterinarians, owners and trainers armed with this information would be able to isolate these animals until viral shedding had stopped to prevent infection of other horses, especially other pregnant mares. By contrast, prior art methods merely enable the diagnosis of EHV only after the infectious stage has passed - and are therefore not useful for quarantine decisions.
[0272] In order that the invention may be readily understood and put into practical effect, particular preferred embodiments will now be described by way of the following non- limiting examples.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1
IDENTIFICATION OF SPECIFIC DIAGNOSTIC GENES FOR HERPES VIRUS INFECTION
Experimental Disease Trial Design [0273] Equine Herpes Virus 1 (EHV-I) infection was induced in thirteen (13) foals in two groups at separate times. Six foals were followed for 20 days and infected (experimentally inoculated) on day 0 (Group 1). Seven (7) foals were followed for 42 days and experimentally inoculated on day 21 (Group 2). AU foals were infected with in vitro cultured EHV-I using nasopharyngeal aerosol. Blood samples from Group 1 were taken at eight time points - Days 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 13 and 20. Blood samples from Group 2 were taken at 16 time points, days 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 13, 20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 31, 34 and 41. The sample at Day 0 acted as a control for each horse.
[0274] Animals in Group 2 were subsequently discovered to have been subjected to natural and unsynchronized infection with EHV. All animals in Group 2 seroconverted, and the time of seroconversion was used to impute a time of natural infection (some 10-14 days before seroconversion). Because infection times in Group 2 were not synchronized, gene expression data from these animals were used to test the diagnostic signatures developed using Group 1.
[0275] The following tests and observations were undertaken at all of the above time points: [0276] • Physical examination, including temperature, pulse and respiration measurements
[0277] • Haematology and biochemistry
[0278] • PCR on nasal swabs
[0279] • Serum EHV-I antibody (Ab) titres [0280] • Gene expression analysis on a white blood cell specific gene array.
[0281] Blood samples obtained from exposed animals were analyzed using GeneChips™ (method of use is described below in detail in "Generation of Gene Expression Data") containing thousands of genes expressed in white blood cells of horses. Analysis of these data (see "Identification of Responding Genes and Demonstration of Diagnostic Potential" below) reveal a number of specific genes that differ in expression between animals before and after infection with EHV from day 1 following infection. It is possible to design an assay that measures the RNA level in the sample from the expression of at least one and desirably at least two HVI marker genes representative transcript sequences of which are set forth in 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113. This provides a level of specificity and sensitivity both equal to 94%. Alternatively, any combination of at least two polynucleotides with any of the other 61 HVI marker polynucleotides listed in Table 1 provides strong diagnostic capacity.
Materials and Methods
Blood Collection
[0282] Blood is collected from a horse (in a non-agitated state) for the purpose of extraction of high quality RNA or protein. Suitable blood collection tubes for the collection, preservation, transport and isolation of RNA include PAXgene™ tubes (PreAnalytix Inc., Valencia, CA, USA). Alternatively, blood can be collected into tubes containing solutions designed for the preservation of nucleic acids (available from Roche, Ambion, Invitrogen and ABI). For the determination of protein levels, 50 mL of blood is prevented from clotting by collection into a tube containing 4 mL of 4% sodium citrate. White blood cells and plasma are isolated and stored frozen for later analysis and detection of specific proteins. PAXgene tubes can be kept at room temperature prior to RNA extraction. Clinical signs are recorded in a standard format.
[0283] A kit available from Qiagen Inc (Valencia, CA, USA) has the reagents and instructions for the isolation of total RNA from 2.5 mL blood collected in the PAXgene Blood RNA Tube. Isolation begins with a centrifugation step to pellet nucleic acids in the PAXgene blood RNA tube. The pellet is washed and resuspended and incubated in optimized buffers together with Proteinase K to bring about protein digestion. An additional centrifugation is carried out to remove residual cell debris and the supernatant is transferred to a fresh microcentrifuge tube. Ethanol is added to adjust binding conditions, and the lysate is applied to the PAXgene RNA spin column. During brief centrifugation, RNA is selectively bound to the silica-gel membrane as contaminants pass through. Remaining contaminants are removed in three efficient wash steps and RNA is then eluted in Buffer BR5.
[0284] Determination of RNA quantity and quality is necessary prior to proceeding and can be achieved using an Agilent Bioanalyzer and Absorbance 260/280 ratio using a spectrophotometer.
DNA Extraction
[0285] A kit available from Qiagen Inc (Valencia, CA, USA) has the reagents and instructions for the isolation of total DNA from 8.5 mL blood collected in the PAXgene Blood DNA Tube. Isolation begins with the addition of additional lysis solution followed by a centrifugation step. The pellet is washed and resuspended and incubated in optimized buffers together with Proteinase K to bring about protein digestion. DNA is precipitated using alcohol and an additional centrifugation is carried out to pellet the nucleic acid. Remaining contaminants are removed in a wash step and the DNA is then resuspended in Buffer BG4. [0286] Determination of DNA quantity and quality is necessary prior to proceeding and can be achieved using a spectrophotometer or agarose gel electrophoresis.
Serum Antibody Determination
[0287] Serum antibody levels to EHV-I were determined by ELISA assay using recombinant EHV-I glycoprotein G essentially as described by Foote et al. (Equine Vet J. 36 (4): 341-345, 2004).Total RNA Extraction
Generation of Gene Expression Data
Choice of Method
[0288] Measurement of specific RNA levels in a tissue sample can be achieved using a variety of technologies. Two common and readily available technologies that are well known in the art are:
[0289] GeneChip™ analysis using Affymetrix technology.
[0290] Real-Time Polymerase Chain Reaction (TaqMan™ from Applied Biosystems for example).
[0291] GeneChips™ quantitate RNA by detection of labeled cRNA hybridized to short oligonucleotides built on a silicon substrate. Details on the technology and methodology can be found at www.affymetrix.com.
[0292] Real-Time Polymerase Chain Reaction (RT-PCR) quantitates RNA using two PCR primers, a labeled probe and a thermostable DNA polymerase. As PCR product is generated a dye is released into solution and detected. Internal controls such as 18S RNA probes are often used to determine starting levels of total RNA in the sample. Each gene and the internal control are run separately. Details on the technology and methods can be found at www.appliedbiosytems.com or www.qiagen.com or www.biorad..com. Applied Biosystems offer a service whereby the customer provides DNA sequence information and payment and is supplied in return all of the reagents required to perform RT-PCR analysis on individual genes. [0293] GeneChip™ analysis has the advantage of being able to analyze thousands of genes at a time. However it is expensive and takes over 3 days to perform a single assay. RT- PCR generally only analyzes one gene at a time, but is inexpensive and can be completed within a single day. [0294] RT-PCR is the method of choice for gene expression analysis if the number , of specific genes to be analyzed is less than 20. GeneChip™ or other gene expression analysis technologies (such as Illumina Bead Arrays) are the method of choice when many genes need to be analyzed simultaneously. [0295] The methodology for GeneChip™ data generation and analysis and Real
Time PCR is presented below in brief.
GeneChip™ Data Generation
cDNA & cRNA Generation:
[0296] The following method for cDNA and cRNA generation from total RNA has been adapted from the protocol provided and recommended by Affymetrix (www.affymetrix.com).
[0297] The steps are:
[0298] • A total of 3 μg of total RNA is used as a template to generate double stranded cDNA. [0299] • cRNA is generated and labeled using biotinylated Uracil (dUTP).
[0300] • biotin-labeled cRNA is cleaned and the quantity determined using a spectrophotometer and MOPS gel analysis.
[0301] • labeled cRNA is fragmented to ~ 300bp in size.
[0302] • RNA quantity is determined on an Agilent "Lab-on-a-Chip" system (Agilent Technologies).
Hybridization, Washing & Staining: [0303] The steps are:
[0304] • A hybridization cocktail is prepared containing 0.05 μg/μL of labeled and fragmented cRNA, spike-in positive hybridization controls, and the Affymetrix oligonucleotides B2, bioB, bioC, bioD and ere.
[0305] • The final volume (80 μL) of the hybridization cocktail is added to the GeneChip™ cartridge.
[0306] • The cartridge is placed in a hybridization oven at constant rotation for 16 hours. [0307] • The fluid is removed from the GeneChip™ and stored. [0308] The GeneChip™ is placed in the fluidics station.
[0309] The experimental conditions for each GeneChip™ are recorded as an
.EXP file.
[0310] • All washing and staining procedures are carried out by the Affymetrix fluidics station with an attendant providing the appropriate solutions.
[0311] • The GeneChip™ is washed, stained with steptavidin-phycoerythin dye and then washed again using low salt solutions.
[0312] • After the wash protocols are completed, the dye on the probe array is 'excited' by laser and the image captured by a CCD camera using an Affymetrix Scanner (manufactured by Agilent).
[0313] Scanning & Data File Generation:
[0314] The scanner and MAS 5 software generates an image file from a single GeneChip D called a .DAT file (see figure overleaf).
[0315] The .DAT file is then pre-processed prior to any statistical analysis. [0316] Data pre-processing steps (prior to any statistical analysis) include:
[0317] • .DAT File Quality Control (QC).
[0318] • .CEL File Generation.
[0319] • Scaling and Normalization.
.DATFiIe Quality Control [0320] The .DAT file is an image. The image is inspected manually for artifacts
(e.g. high/low intensity spots, scratches, high regional or overall background). (The B2 oligonucleotide hybridization performance is easily identified by an alternating pattern of intensities creating a border and array name.) The MAS 5 software used the B2 oligonucleotide border to align a grid over the image so that each square of oligonucleotides was centered and identified.
[0321] The other spiked hybridization controls (bioB, bioC, bioD and ere) are used to evaluate sample hybridization efficiency by reading "present" gene detection calls with increasing signal values, reflecting their relative concentrations. (If the .DAT file is of suitable quality it is converted to an intensity data file (.CEL file) by Affymetrix MAS 5 software). [0322] .CEL File Generation [0323] The .CEL files generated by the MAS 5 software from .DAT files contain calculated raw intensities for the probe sets. Gene expression data is obtained by subtracting a calculated background from each cell value. To eliminate negative intensity values, a noise correction fraction based from a local noise value from the standard deviation of the lowest 2% of the background is applied.
[0324] All .CEL files generated from the GeneChips™ are subjected to specific quality metrics parameters.
[0325] Some metrics are routinely recommended by Affymetrix and can be determined from Affymetrix internal controls provided as part of the GeneChip™. Other metrics are based on experience and the processing of many GeneChips™.
Analysis of GeneChip™ Data [0326] Three illustrative approaches to normalizing data might be used:
[0327] • Affymetrix MAS 5 Algorithm.
[0328] • Robust Multi-chip Analysis (RMA) algorithm of Irizarry (Irizarray et al, 2002, Biostatistics (in print)).
[0329] • Robust Multi-chip Analysis Saved model (RMAS).
[0330] Those of skill in the art will recognise that many other approaches might be adopted, without materially affecting the invention.
Affymetrix MAS 5 Algorithm [0331] .CEL files are used by Affymetrix MAS 5 software to normalize or scale the data. Scaled data from one chip are compared to similarly scaled data from other chips.
[0332] Affymetrix MAS 5 normalization is achieved by applying the default "Global Scaling" option of the MAS 5 algorithm to the .CEL files. This procedure subtracts a robust estimate of the center of the distribution of probe values, and divides by a robust estimate of the probe variability. This produces a set of chips with common location and scale at the probe level.
[0333] Gene expression indices are generated by a robust averaging procedure on all the probe pairs for a given gene. The results are constrained to be non-negative.
[0334] Given that scaling takes place at the level of the probe, rather than at the level of the gene, it is possible that even after normalization there may be chip-to-chip differences in overall gene expression level. Following standard MAS5 normalization, values for each gene were de-trended with respect to median chip intensity. That is, values for each gene were regressed on the median chip intensity, and residuals were calculated. These residuals were taken as the de-trended estimates of expression for each gene
[0335] Median chip intensity was calculated using the Affymetrix MAS5 algorithm, but with a scale factor fixed at one.
RMA Analysis
[0336] This method is identical to the RMA method, with the exception that probe weights and target quantiles are established using a long term library of chip .eel files, and are not re-calculated for these specific chips. Again, normalization occurs at the probe level.
Real-Time PCR Data Generation [0337] Background information for conducting Real-time PCR may be obtained, for example, at http://dorakmt.tripod.com/genetics/realtime.html and in a review by Bustin SA (2000, J MoI Endocrinol 25:169-193).
[0338] TaqMan™ Primer and Probe Design Guidelines:
[0339] 1. The Primer Express™ (ABI) software designs primers with a melting temperature (Tm) of 58-60 D C, and probes with a Tm value of 10° C higher. The Tm of both primers should be equal;
[0340] 2. Primers should be 15-30 bases in length;
[0341] 3. The G+C content should ideally be 30-80%. If a higher G+C content is unavoidable, the use of high annealing and melting temperatures, cosolvents such as glycerol, DMSO, or 7-deaza-dGTP may be necessary;
[0342] 4. The run of an identical nucleotide should be avoided. This is especially true for G, where runs of four or more Gs is not allowed;
[0343] 5. The total number of Gs and Cs in the last five nucleotides at the 3' end of the primer should not exceed two (the newer version of the software has an option to do this automatically). This helps to introduce relative instability to the 3' end of primers to reduce non¬ specific priming. The primer conditions are the same for SYBR Green assays;
[0344] 6. Maximum amplicon size should not exceed 400 bp (ideally 50-150 bases). Smaller amplicons give more consistent results because PCR is more efficient and more tolerant of reaction conditions (the short length requirement has nothing to do with the efficiency of 5' nuclease activity);
[0345] 7. The probes should not have runs of identical nucleotides (especially four or more consecutive Gs), G+C content should be 30-80%, there should be more Cs than Gs, and not a G at the 5' end. The higher number of Cs produces a higher ΔRn. The choice of probe should be made first;
[0346] 8. To avoid false-positive results due to amplification of contaminating genomic DNA in the cDNA preparation, it is preferable to have primers spanning exon-exon junctions. This way, genomic DNA will not be amplified (the PDAR kit for human GAPDH amplification has such primers);
[0347] 9. If a TaqMan™ probe is designed for allelic discrimination, the mismatching nucleotide (the polymorphic site) should be in the middle of the probe rather than at the ends; [0348] 10. Use primers that contain dA nucleotides near the 3' ends so that any primer-dimer generated is efficiently degraded by AmpErase™ UNG (mentioned in p.9 of the manual for EZ RT-PCR kit; P/N 402877). If primers cannot be selected with dA nucleotides near the ends, the use of primers with 3' terminal dU-nucleotides should be considered.
[0349] (See also the general principles of PCR Primer Design by InVitroGen.)
General Method:
[0350] 1. Reverse transcription of total RNA to cDNA should be done with random hexamers (not with oligo-dT). If oligo-dT has to be used long mRNA transcripts or amplicons greater than two kilobases upstream should be avoided, and 18S RNA cannot be used as normalizer; [0351] 2. Multiplex PCR will only work properly if the control primers are limiting
(ABI control reagents do not have their primers limited);
[0352] 3. The range of target cDNA used is 10 ng to 1 Dg. IfDNA is used (mainly for allelic discrimination studies), the optimum amount is 100 ng to 1 Dg;
[0353] 4. It is ideal to treat each RNA preparation with RNAse free DNAse to avoid genomic DNA contamination. Even the best RNA extraction methods yield some genomic
DNA. Of course, it is ideal to have primers not amplifying genomic DNA at all but sometimes this may not be possible;
[0354] 5. For optimal results, the reagents (before the preparation of the PCR mix) and the PCR mixture itself (before loading) should be vortexed and mixed well. Otherwise there may be shifting Rn value during the early (0 - 5) cycles of PCR. It is also important to add probe to the buffer component and allow it to equilibrate at room temperature prior to reagent mix formulation. TaqMan™ Primers and Probes:
[0355] The TaqMan™ probes ordered from ABI at midi-scale arrive already resuspended at 100 μM. If a 1/20 dilution is made, this gives a 5 μM solution. This stock solution should be aliquoted, frozen and kept in the dark. Using 1 μL of this in a 50 μL reaction gives the recommended 100 nM final concentration.
[0356] The primers arrive lyophilized with the amount given on the tube in pmols (such as 150.000 pmol which is equal to 150 nmol). IfX nmol of primer is resuspended in X μL Of H2O, the resulting solution is 1 niM. It is best to freeze this stock solution in aliquots. When the 1 mM stock solution is diluted 1/100, the resulting working solution will be 10 μM. To get the recommended 50 - 900 nM final primer concentration in 50 μL reaction volume, 0.25 - 4.50 DL should be used per reaction (2.5 μL for 500 nM final concentration).
[0357] The PDAR primers and probes are supplied as a mix in one tube. They have to be used 2.5 μL in a 50 μL reaction volume.
Setting up One-step TaqMan™ Reaction: [0358] One-step real-time PCR uses RNA (as opposed to cDNA) as a template. This is the preferred method if the RNA solution has a low concentration but only if singleplex reactions are run. The disadvantage is that RNA carryover prevention enzyme AmpErase cannot be used in one-step reaction format. In this method, both reverse transcriptase and real-time PCR take place in the same tube. The downstream PCR primer also acts as the primer for reverse transcriptase (random hexamers or oligo-dT cannot be used for reverse transcription in one-step RT-PCR). One-step reaction requires higher dNTP concentration (greater than or equal to 300 mM vs 200 mM) as it combines two reactions needing dNTPs in one. A typical reaction mix for one-step PCR by Gold RT-PCR kit is as follows:
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000089_0001
[0359] If a PDAR is used, 2.5 μL of primer + probe mix used.
[0360] Ideally 10 pg - 100 ng RNA should be used in this reaction. Note that decreasing the amount of template from 100 ng to 50 ng will increase the CT value by 1. To decrease a CT value by 3, the initial amount of template should be increased 8-fold. ABI claims that 2 picograms of RNA can be detected by this system and the maximum amount of RNA that can be used is 1 microgram. For routine analysis, 10 pg - 100 ng RNA and 100 pg - 1 μg genomic DNA can be used.
Cycling Parameters for One-step PCR:
[0361] Reverse transcription (by MuLV) 48° C for 30 min. [0362] AmpliTaq activation 95° C for 10 min.
[0363] PCR: denaturation 95° C for 15 sec and annealing/extension 60° C for 1 min (repeated 40 times) (On ABI 7700, minimum holding time is 15 seconds.)
[0364] The recently introduced EZ one-step™ RT-PCR kit allows the use of UNG as the incubation time for reverse transcription is 60° C thanks to the use of a thermostable reverse transcriptase. This temperature also a better option to avoid primer dimers and non¬ specific bindings at 48° C.
Operating the ABI 7700:
[0365] Make sure the following before starting a run: [0366] 1. Cycle parameters are correct for the run; [0367] 2. Choice of spectral compensation is correct (off for singleplex, on for multiplex reactions);
[0368] 3. Choice of "Number of PCR Stages" is correct in the Analysis Options box (Analysis/Options). This may have to be manually assigned after a run if the data is absent in the amplification plot but visible in the plate view, and the X-axis of the amplification is displaying a range of 0-1 cycles;
[0369] 4. No Template Control is labeled as such (for accurate ΔRn calculations); [0370] 5. The choice of dye component should be made correctly before data analysis;
[0371] 6. You must save the run before it starts by giving it a name (not leaving as untitled); [0372] 7. Also at the end of the run, first save the data before starting to analyze.
[0373] The ABI software requires extreme caution. Do not attempt to stop a run after clicking on the Run button. You will have problems and if you need to switch off and on the machine, you have to wait for at least an hour to restart the run.
[0374] When analyzing the data, remember that the default setting for baseline is 3 - 15. If any CT value is <15, the baseline should be changed accordingly (the baseline stop value should be 1-2 smaller than the smallest CT value). For a useful discussion of this matter, see the ABI Tutorial on Setting Baselines and Thresholds. (Interestingly, this issue is best discussed in the manual for TaqMan™ Human Endogenous Control Plate.)
[0375] If the results do not make sense, check the raw spectra for a possible CDC camera saturation during the run. Saturation of CDC camera may be prevented by using optical caps rather than optical adhesive cover. It is also more likely to happen when SYBR Green I is used, when multiplexing and when a high concentration of probe is used.
Interpretation of Results:
[0376] At the end of each reaction, the recorded fluorescence intensity is used for the following calculations:
[0377] Rn+ is the Rn value of a reaction containing all components, Rn- is the Rn value of an unreacted sample (baseline value or the value detected in NTC). ΔRn is the difference between Rn+ and Rn-. It is an indicator of the magnitude of the signal generated by the PCR. [0378] There are three illustrative methods to quantitate the amount of template:
[0379] 1. Absolute standard method: In this method, a known amount of standard such as in vitro translated RNA (cRNA) is used;
[0380] 2. Relative standard: Known amounts of the target nucleic acid are included in the assay design in each run; [0381] 3. Comparative CT method: This method uses no known amount of standard but compares the relative amount of the target sequence to any of the reference values chosen and the result is given as relative to the reference value (such as the expression level of resting lymphocytes or a standard cell line). The Comparative CT Method (AACT) for Relative Quantitation of Gene Expression:
[0382] This method enables relative quantitation of template and increases sample throughput by eliminating the need for standard curves when looking at expression levels relative to an active reference control (normalizer). For this method to be successful, the dynamic range of both the target and reference should be similar. A sensitive method to control this is to look at how ΔCT (the difference between the two CT values of two PCRs for the same initial template amount) varies with template dilution. If the efficiencies of the two amplicons are approximately equal, the plot of log input amount versus ΔCT will have a nearly horizontal line (a slope of <0.10). This means that both PCRs perform equally efficiently across the range of initial template amounts. If the plot shows unequal efficiency, the standard curve method should be used for quantitation of gene expression. The dynamic range should be determined for both (1) minimum and maximum concentrations of the targets for which the results are accurate and (2) minimum and maximum ratios of two gene quantities for which the results are accurate. In conventional competitive RT-PCR, the dynamic range is limited to a target-to-competitor ratio of about 10: 1 to 1:10 (the best accuracy is obtained for 1 : 1 ratio). The real-time PCR is able to achieve a much wider dynamic range.
[0383] Running the target and endogenous control amplifications in separate tubes and using the standard curve method requires the least amount of optimisation and validation. The advantage of using the comparative CT method is that the need for a standard curve is eliminated (more wells are available for samples). It also eliminates the adverse effect of any dilution errors made in creating the standard curve samples.
[0384] As long as the target and normalizer have similar dynamic ranges, the comparative CT method (ΔΔCT method) is the most practical method. It is expected that the normalizer will have a higher expression level than the target (thus, a smaller CT value). The calculations for the quantitation start with getting the difference (ΔCT) between the CT values of the target and the normalizer:
[0385] ΔCT = CT (target) - CT (normalizer)
[0386] This value is calculated for each sample to be quantitated (unless, the target is expressed at a higher level than the normalizer, this should be a positive value. It is no harm if it is negative). One of these samples should be chosen as the reference (baseline) for each comparison to be made. The comparative ΔΔCT calculation involves finding the difference between each sample's ΔCT and the baseline's ΔCT. If the baseline value is representing the minimum level of expression, the ΔΔCT values are expected to be negative (because the ΔCT for the baseline sample will be the largest as it will have the greatest CT value). If the expression is increased in some samples and decreased in others, the ΔΔCT values will be a mixture of negative and positive ones. The last step in quantitation is to transform these values to absolute values. The formula for this is:
[0387] comparative expression level = 2 - ΔΔCT
[0388] For expressions increased compared to the baseline level this will be something like 23 = 8 times increase, and for decreased expression it will be something like 2-3 = 1/8 of the reference level. Microsoft Excel can be used to do these calculations by simply entering the CT values (there is an online ABI tutorial at http://www.appliedbiosystems.com/support/tutorials/7700amp/ on the use of spread sheet programs to produce amplification plots; the TaqMan™ Human Endogenous Control Plate protocol also contains detailed instructions on using MS Excel for real-time PCR data analysis).
[0389] The other (absolute) quantification methods are outlined in the ABI User Bulletins
(http://docs.appliedbiosystems.com/search.taf?_UserReference=A8658327189850A13A0C598 E). The Bulletins #2 and #5 are most useful for the general understanding of real-time PCR and quantification.
Recommendations on Procedures:
[0390] 1. Use positive-displacement pipettes to avoid inaccuracies in pipetting;
[0391] 2. The sensitivity of real-time PCR allows detection of the target in 2 pg of total RNA. The number of copies of total RNA used in the reaction should ideally be enough to give a signal by 25-30 cycles (preferably less than 100 ng). The amount used should be decreased or increased to achieve this;
[0392] 3. The optimal concentrations of the reagents are as follows;
[0393] i. Magnesium chloride concentration should be between 4 and 7 mM. It is optimized as 5.5 mM for the primers/probes designed using the Primer Express software; [0394] ii. Concentrations of dNTPs should be balanced with the exception of dUTP (if used). Substitution of dUTP for dTTP for control of PCR product carryover requires twice dUTP that of other dNTPs. While the optimal range for dNTPs is 500 μM to 1 mM (for one-step RT-PCR), for a typical TaqMan reaction (PCR only), 200 μM of each dNTP (400 μM of dUTP) is used; [0395] iii. Typically 0.25 μL (1.25 U) AmpliTaq DNA Polymerase (5.0 U/μL) is added into each 50 μL reaction. This is the minimum requirement. If necessary, optimisation can be done by increasing this amount by 0.25 U increments; [0396] iv. The optimal probe concentration is 50-200 nM, and the primer concentration is 100-900 nM. Ideally, each primer pair should be optimized at three different temperatures (58, 60 and 620 C for TaqMan primers) and at each combination of three concentrations (50, 300, 900 nM). This means setting up three different sets (for three temperatures) with nine reactions in each (50/50 mM, 50/300 mM, 50/900, 300/50, 300/300, 300/900, 900/50, 900/300, 900/900 mM) using a fixed amount of target template. If necessary, a second round of optimisation may improve the results. Optimal performance is achieved by selecting the primer concentrations that provide the lowest CT and highest ΔRn. Similarly, the probe concentration should be optimized for 25-225 nM; [0397] 4. If AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase is being used, there has to be a 9- 12 min pre-PCR heat step at 92 - 95° C to activate it. If AmpliTaq Gold DNA Polymerase is used, there is no need to set up the reaction on ice. A typical TaqMan reaction consists of 2 min at 50° C for UNG (see below) incubation, 10 min at 95° C for Polymerase activation, and 40 cycles of 15 sec at 95° C (denaturation) and 1 min at 60° C (annealing and extension). A typical reverse transcription cycle (for cDNA synthesis), which should precede the TaqMan reaction if the starting material is total RNA, consists of 10 min at 25°0 C (primer incubation), 30 min at 48° C (reverse transcription with conventional reverse transcriptase) and 5 min at 95° C (reverse transcriptase inactivation);
[0398] 5. AmpErase uracil-N-glycosylase (UNG) is added in the reaction to prevent the reamplification of carry-over PCR products by removing any uracil incorporated into amplicons. This is why dUTP is used rather than dTTP in PCR reaction. UNG does not function above 55° C and does not cut single-stranded DNA with terminal dU nucleotides. UNG- containing master mix should not be used with one-step RT-PCR unless rTth DNA polymerase is being used for reverse transcription and PCR (TaqMan EZ RT-PCR kit); [0399] 6. It is necessary to include at least three No Amplification Controls
(NAC) as well as three No Template Controls (NTC) in each reaction plate (to achieve a 99.7% confidence level in the definition of +/- thresholds for the target amplification, six replicates of NTCs must be run). NAC former contains sample and no enzyme. It is necessary to rule out the presence of fluorescence contaminants in the sample or in the heat block of the thermal cycler (these would cause false positives). If the absolute fluorescence of the NAC is greater than that of the NTC after PCR, fluorescent contaminants may be present in the sample or in the heating block of the thermal cycler;
[0400] 7. The dynamic range of a primer/probe system and its normalizer should be examined if the ΔΔCT method is going to be used for relative quantitation. This is done by running (in triplicate) reactions of five RNA concentrations (for example, 0, 80 pg/μL, 400 pg/μL, 2 ng/uL and 50 ng/μL). The resulting plot of log of the initial amount vs CT values (standard curve) should be a (near) straight line for both the target and normalizer real-time RT- PCRs for the same range of total RNA concentrations;
[0401] 8. The passive reference is a dye (ROX) included in the reaction (present in the TaqMan universal PCR master mix). It does not participate in the 5' nuclease reaction. It provides an internal reference for background fluorescence emission. This is used to normalize the reporter-dye signal. This normalization is for non-PCR-related fluorescence fluctuations occurring well-to-well (concentration or volume differences) or over time and different from the normalization for the amount of cDNA or efficiency of the PCR. Normalization is achieved by dividing the emission intensity of reporter dye by the emission intensity of the passive reference. This gives the ratio defined as Rn;
[0402] 9. If multiplexing is done, the more abundant of the targets will use up all the ingredients of the reaction before the other target gets a chance to amplify. To avoid this, the primer concentrations for the more abundant target should be limited;
[0403] 10. TaqMan Universal PCR master mix should be stored at 2 to 8° C (not at -200 C);
[0404] 11. The GAPDH probe supplied with the TaqMan Gold RT-PCR kit is labeled with a JOE reporter dye, the same probe provided within the Pre-Developed TaqMan™ Assay Reagents (PDAR) kit is labeled with VIC. Primers for these human GAPDH assays are designed not to amplify genomic DNA; [0405] 12. The carryover prevention enzyme, AmpErase UNG, cannot be used with one-step RT-PCR which requires incubation at 48° C but may be used with the EZ RT-PCR kit;
[0406] 13. One-step RT-PCR can only be used for singleplex reactions, and the only choice for reverse transcription is the downstream primer (not random hexamers or oligo-dT);
[0407] 14. It is ideal to run duplicates to control pipetting errors but this inevitably increases the cost;
[0408] 15. If multiplexing, the spectral compensation option (in Advanced Options) should be checked before the run;
[0409] 16. Normalization for the fluorescent fluctuation by using a passive reference (ROX) in the reaction and for the amount of cDNA/PCR efficiency by using an endogenous control (such as GAPDH, active reference) are different processes;
[0410] 17. ABI 7700 can be used not only for quantitative RT-PCR but also end- point PCR. The latter includes presence/absence assays or allelic discrimination assays (such as SNP typing); [0411] 18. Shifting Rn values during the early cycles (cycle 0-5) of PCR means initial disequilibrium of the reaction components and does not affect the final results as long as the lower value of baseline range is reset;
[0412] 19. If an abnormal amplification plot has been noted (CT value <15 cycles with amplification signal detected in early cycles), the upper value of the baseline range should be lowered and the samples should be diluted to increase the CT value (a high CT value may also be due to contamination);
[0413] 20. A small ΔRn value (or greater than expected CT value) indicates either poor PCR efficiency or low copy number of the target; [0414] 21. A standard deviation >0.16 for CT value indicates inaccurate pipetting;
[0415] 22. SYBR Green entry in the Pure Dye Setup should be abbreviated as "SYBR" in capitals. Any other abbreviation or lower case letters will cause problems;
[0416] 23. The SDS software for ABI 7700 have conflicts with the Macintosh Operating System version 8.1. The data should not be analyzed on such computers; [0417] 24. The ABI 7700 should not be deactivated for extended periods of time. If it has ever been shutdown, it should be allowed to warm up for at least one hour before a run. Leaving the instrument on all times is recommended and is beneficial for the laser. If the machine has been switched on just before a run, an error box stating a firmware version conflict may appear. If this happens, choose the "Auto Download" option; [0418] 25. The ABI 7700 is only one of the real-time PCR systems available, others include systems from BioRad, Cepheid, Corbett Research, Roche and Stratagene.
Genotyping Analysis
[0419] Many methods are available to genotype DNA. A review of allelic discrimination methods can be found in Kristensen et al. (Biotechniques 30(2):318-322 (2001). Only one method, allele-specific PCR is described here.
Primer Design
[0420] Upstream and downstream PCR primers specific for particular alleles can be designed using freely available computer programs, such as Primer3
(http://frodo.wi.mit.edu/primer3/primer3 code.htmP). Alternatively the DNA sequences of the various alleles can be aligned using a program such as ClustalW
(http://www.ebi.ac.uk/clυstalwΛ and specific primers designed to areas where DNA sequence differences exist but retaining enough specificity to ensure amplification of the correct amplicon. Preferably a PCR amplicon is designed to have a restriction enzyme site in one allele but not the other. Primers are generally 18-25 base pairs in length with similar melting temperatures.
PCR Amplification
[0421] The composition of PCR reactions has been described elsewhere (Clinical Applications of PCR, Dennis Lo (Editor), Blackwell Publishing, 1998). Briefly, a reaction contains primers, DNA, buffers and a thermostable polymerase enzyme. The reaction is cycled (up to 50 times) through temperature steps of denaturation, hybridization and DNA extension on a thermocycler such as the MJ Research Thermocycler model PTC-96V.
DNA Analysis [0422] PCR products can be analyzed using a variety of methods including size differentiation using mass spectrometry, capillary gel electrophoresis and agarose gel electrophoresis. If the PCR amplicons have been designed to contain differential restriction enzyme sites, the DNA in the PCR reaction is purified using DNA-binding columns or precipitation and re-suspended in water, and then restricted using the appropriate restriction enzyme. The restricted DNA can then be run on an agarose gel where DNA is separated by size using electric current. Various alleles of a gene will have different sizes depending on whether they contain restriction sites.
EXAMPLE 2
IDENTIFICATION OF DIAGNOSTIC MARKER GENES AND PRIORITY RANKING OF GENES [0423] For experimental Group 1, differences in gene expression between animals before and after infection with EHV were analyzed using the empirical Bayes approach of Lonnstedt and Speed (Lonnstedt and Speed, 2002, Statistica Sinica 12: 31-46). Analyzes were performed, comparing each post-infection time point with the pre-infection time point. A general linear model was fitted to each gene, with terms for individual animal effects, and a term for clinical status (before or after infection with EHV). Genes were ranked according to their posterior odds of differential expression between clinical status groups. Only those genes with statistically significant changes (assessed using the t statistic based on the empirical Bayes shrunken standard deviations) were recorded. Strong control of the type 1 Error rate was maintained, using Holm's adjustment to the p Values (Holm, S. 1979, Scandinavian Journal of Statistics 6: 65-70). Genes which showed statistically significant differences before and after infection with EHV were tabulated for each day post infection.
[0424] In addition, analyzes were performed comparing animals clinically affected (demonstrating clinical signs of EHV infection) and healthy animals; and comparing animals deemed to have "active viral infection" and healthy animals (in general, "active viral infection" animals included a period of approximately 7 days following known infection with EHV).
[0425] Table 5 shows genes significantly different following these analyzes ranked according to p value. Again this analysis is based on a two-group comparison with p Values adjusted using Holm's method. The "effect size" (M) in these Tables represents a log value, indicating the fold change of gene expression compared to control. Negative values represent down regulation and positive values indicate up regulation. The t statistic and p value are significance values as described herein. The B statistic is a Bayesian posterior log odds of differential expression. [0426] Table 6 shows genes significantly different following these analyzes ranked according to T value. Sign indicates which genes are up and down regulated (negative or positive "Difference" and t values) and the magnitude of the response is indicated by "Difference". Again this analysis is based on a two-group comparison with p Values adjusted using Holm's method.
EXAMPLE 3
DEMONSTRATION OF DIAGNOSTIC POTENTIAL TO DETERMINE HERPES VIRUS INFECTION
[0427] In addition, at each time post-infection, the diagnostic potential of the entire set of genes was assessed using discriminant analysis (Venables and Ripley, 2002, Modern Applied Statistics in S, Springer) on the principal component scores (Jolliffe, I.T. Principal components analysis, Springer-Verlag, 1986) calculated from gene expression. The entire process was crossvalidated. Cross validation was achieved dropping one animal at a time (rather than one observation). Sensitivity and specificity were calculated for a uniform prior. This may be interpreted as a form of shrinkage regularization, where the estimates are shrunken to lie in a reduced space. [0428] Cross -validated discriminant function scores were used to estimate a receiver operator curve. The receiver operator curve was calculated by moving a critical threshold along the axis of the discriminant function scores. Both raw empirical ROCs were calculated, and smoothed ROCs using Lloyd's method (Lloyd, CJ. 1998, Journal of the American Statistical Association 93: 1356-1364). Curves were calculated for the comparison of clinically negative and clinically positive animals. Separate curves were calculated, using gene expression at each day post-infection. The area under the receiver operator curve was calculated by the trapezoidal rule, applied to both the empirical ROC and the smoothed ROC.
[0429] The ROC provides a useful summary of the diagnostic potential of an assay. A perfect diagnostic assay has a ROC which is a horizontal line passing through the point with sensitivity and specificity both equal to one. The area under the ROC for such a perfect diagnostic is 1. A useless diagnostic assay has a ROC which is given by a 45 degree line through the origin. The area for such an uninformative diagnostic is 0.5.
[0430] Sensitivity, and selectivity and the areas under the ROC are shown in Table 8, for samples taken 2, 4, 13 and 20 days after infection for Group 1 foals. From these results, there is evidence of strong diagnostic potential at 2 and 4 days after infection (coinciding with the period of maximum clinical signs), but very little evidence of diagnostic potential at 13 or at 20 days.
[0431] In addition, comparisons were made between the periods 0, 13 and 20 days after infection with 2, 4 and 6 days after infection - corresponding to the symptomatic vs asymptomatic time points for Group 1 foals. The ROC for the comparison is shown in Figure 1. The sensitivity and specificity for the comparison was ROC were 1 and 0.867 respectively. The area under the empirical and smoothed ROC were 0.982 and 0.952 respectively. These constitute very strong evidence for differential gene expression corresponding to symptomatic EHV infection. [0432] In addition, an ROC curve (Figure 2) was generated using the selected genes for clinically affected animals. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent.
[0433] In addition, an ROC curve (Figure 3)was generated using the selected genes for animals deemed to have active viral infection. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is excellent.
[0434] In addition, an ROC curve (Figure 4) was generated using all of the genes for clinically affected animals. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is good.
[0435] In addition, an ROC curve (Figure 5) was generated using all of the genes for animals deemed to have active viral infection. The sensitivity and specificity of a test using the gene expression signature is good.
[0436] Receiver Operator curves calculated in this way, based on shrinkage estimates over the entire set of genes on the chip are conservative - that is, they tend to underestimate the diagnostic potential. Better diagnostic performance should be obtained in operational diagnostics, based on a selected subset of the genes.
[0437] Hematology and biochemistry results, clinical parameters (heart rate (HR), and respiratory rate (RR)) and statistical significance of these parameters for Days 2, 4, 6, 13 and 20 compared to Day 0 for foals in Group 1 are presented in Table 7. All of the measurements except for PCV (packed cell volume) are statistically significant and most likely reflect changes associated with herpes virus infection. However, these changes are non-specific and can be associated with many other conditions. Similar results for parameters from foals in Group 2 are not presented as there were no significant differences despite the fact that these foals were infected albeit subclinically.
[0438] Figure 6 is a plot of Gene Expression Index (Log Intensity Units), Serum EHV Ab Levels (450 nrn absorbance), Dates, Days (D = Day), Clinical Signs for foals in Group 1. Group 1 foals were inoculated (experimentally infected) on 18 March 2003. The changes in gene expression index correspond to the presence of clinical signs and precede the rise in specific serum anti-EHV-1 antibodies by 10-14 days. This ability to diagnose herpes virus infection 10-14 days earlier than antibody-based tests, and during the period of demonstrable clinical signs, has practical significance in treatment and management. For example, it is during this period that current drugs are most efficacious, and for many herpes virus infections when animals are most infectious.
[0439] Figure 7 contains plots of the first four principal components using gene expression for all genes for Group 1 foals. Components are plotted by days after inoculation. It is clear from these plots that the major changes in gene expression are occurring during the 10- day period following inoculation with herpes virus. This period also corresponds to the presence of clinical signs (see Figure 2).
[0440] Because Group 2 foals were subject to uncontrolled natural infection at varying time points, the gene expression classifier trained on the data for Group 1 foals was used on each sample to predict the EHV infection status for Group 2 foals. This prediction involves a predicted (maximum posterior probability) and a predicted discriminant function score (which is a linear combination of each gene from the sample). Both the predicted class (positive or negative for EHV infection) and the discriminant score are shown in Table 9.
[0441] Using the serum EHV-I Ab results, it was determined that four (4) of the foals (360, 364, 368 and 369: see Table 9) were all probably naturally infected on Day -4 (i.e. four days prior to the beginning of the experiment (Day O)). Of these, foals 364 and 368 showed clinical signs on Days 0 & 2 and Day 2 respectively. It is noteworthy that when we used the gene classifier, each of these foals was determined to be infected with EHV-I in some or all of the days between Days 0 and 4. This indicates that the EHV-I gene signature could be diagnostic of EHV-I whether or not the animal is exhibiting clinical signs. Using the serum
EHV-I Ab results, it was determined that foal 362 was naturally infected on Day -1 - meaning that a signature ought to be able to be detected anywhere between Day -1 and Day 6. Using the gene classifier, positive (meaning 'infected') results were observed in this foal in Days 0, 2 and 6. No clinical signs were apparent in this animal. Foal 375 was infected around Day 6 on the basis of the serum EHV-I Ab results. Positive classifiers were observed on Days 2, 4 and 6, but again, no clinical signs were apparent. In Foal 366, using the serum EHV-I Ab results, it was determined that this animal was unlikely to be naturally infected until Day 14 - meaning that seroconversion occurred around Day 27 or 28. Note that the animals in Trial 2 were all challenged at Day 21. Accordingly, this foal was sero-negative for EHV-I at Day 21. Foal 366 did not develop any clinical signs except mildly on Day 23. These results would appear to indicate that the serum Ab levels (humoral immunity) were almost sufficient by the time of experimental challenge (Day 21) to protect the animal from overt signs of clinical disease. Accordingly, we did not see any positive results when the gene expression classifier was applied during the period following experimental inoculation.
[0442] Thus, Group 2 foals have shown that a preliminary classifier developed from Group 1 foals can identify early natural infection with EHV-I in the presence or absence of clinical signs (or any significant changes in hematology and biochemistry).
EXAMPLE 4
PREDICTIVE GENE SETS
[0443] Although about 63 genes have been identified as having diagnostic potential, a much fewer number are generally required for acceptable diagnostic performance.
[0444] Table 10 shows the cross-validated classification success, sensitivity and specificity obtained from a linear discriminant analysis, based on two genes selected from the set of potential diagnostic genes. The pairs presented are those producing the highest prediction success, many other pairs of genes produce acceptable classification success. The identification of alternate pairs of genes would be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. Techniques for identifying pairs include (but are not limited to) forward variable selection (Venables W.N. and Ripley B.D. Modern Applied Statistics in S 4th Edition 2002. Springer), best subsets selection, backwards elimination (Venables W.N. and Ripley B.D., 2002, supra), stepwise selection (Venables W.N. and Ripley B.D., 2002, supra) and stochastic variable elimination (Figueirodo M.A. Adaptive Sparseness for Supervised Learning).
[0445] Table 11 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on three genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of three genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on three HVI marker genes can be made. [0446] Table 12 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on four genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of four genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on four HVI marker genes can be made. [0447] Table 13 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on five genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of five genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on five HVI marker genes can be made. [0448] Table 14 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on six genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of six genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on six HVI marker genes can be made.
[0449] Table 15 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on seven genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of seven genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on seven HVI marker genes can be made.
[0450] Table 16 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on eight genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of eight genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on eight HVI marker genes can be made.
[0451] Table 17 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on nine genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets of nine genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on nine HVI marker genes can be made.
[0452] Table 18 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on ten genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only twenty sets often genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on ten HVI marker genes can be made. [0453] Table 19 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on 20 genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only 20 sets of twenty genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on twenty HVI marker genes can be made.
[0454] Table 20 shows the cross-validated classification success obtained from a linear discriminant analysis based on 30 genes selected from the diagnostic set. Only 20 sets of twenty genes are presented. It will be readily apparent to practitioners in the art that other suitable diagnostic selections based on twenty HVI marker genes can be made.
[0455] Further genes introduced noise (and subsequently lowered crossvalidated sensitivity and specificity) through over-fitting. EXAMPLE 5
DEMONSTRATION OF SPECIFICITY
[0456] The specificity of the Herpes virus signature was examined by training a classifier on the trial data only and running the classifier over a large gene expression dataset of over 850 GeneChips™. Gene expression results in the database were obtained from samples from horses with various diseases and conditions including; clinical, induced acute and chronic EPM, herpes virus infection, degenerative osteoarthritis, stress, Rhodococcus infection, endotoxaemia, laminitis, gastric ulcer syndrome, animals in athletic training and clinically normal animals. [0457] Two classifiers were generated. Both were based on the comparison of active viral infection versus clinically normal horses. The first used all the genes on the GeneChip™. The second used only those genes listed in Table 1. The latter signature was able to identify all known EHV-infected animals. It also identified 25 other horses of unknown EHV status, including animals under stress as part of another clinical trial, and five foals with known lung lesions associated with Rhodococcus equi infection.
[0458] Using this method and a gene signature of 63 genes, a specificity of 95% and sensitivity of 100% for herpes virus infection was obtained from a population sample size of over 850.
EXAMPLE 7
GENE ONTOLOGY
[0459] Gene sequences were compared against the GenBank database usiiϊg the BLAST algorithm (Altschul, S.F., Gish, W., Miller, W., Myers, E.W. & Lipman, DJ. (1990) "Basic local alignment search tool." J. MoI. Biol. 215:403-410), and gene homology and gene ontology searches were performed in order to group genes based on function, metabolic processes or cellular component. Table 21 lists and groups the genes based on these criteria. In some instances there is no information available (NA). See also Table 1, which contains sequence information for each gene. [0460] The disclosure of every patent, patent application, and publication cited herein is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
[0461] The citation of any reference herein should not be construed as an admission that such reference is available as "Prior Art" to the instant application. [0462] Throughout the specification the aim has been to describe the preferred embodiments of the invention without limiting the invention to any one embodiment or specific collection of features. Those of skill in the art will therefore appreciate that, in light of the instant disclosure, various modifications and changes can be made in the particular embodiments exemplified without departing from the scope of the present invention. All such modifications and changes are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims.
TABLE 1
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
O
Figure imgf000109_0001
Figure imgf000110_0001
Figure imgf000111_0001
Figure imgf000112_0001
Figure imgf000113_0001
Figure imgf000114_0001
Figure imgf000115_0001
Figure imgf000116_0001
Figure imgf000117_0001
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000119_0001
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000128_0001
Figure imgf000129_0001
Figure imgf000130_0001
Figure imgf000131_0001
Figure imgf000132_0001
Figure imgf000133_0001
Figure imgf000134_0001
Figure imgf000135_0001
Figure imgf000136_0001
Figure imgf000137_0001
Figure imgf000138_0001
Figure imgf000139_0001
Figure imgf000140_0001
Figure imgf000141_0001
Figure imgf000142_0001
Figure imgf000143_0001
Figure imgf000144_0001
Figure imgf000145_0001
Figure imgf000146_0001
Figure imgf000147_0001
Figure imgf000148_0001
Figure imgf000149_0001
Figure imgf000150_0001
Figure imgf000151_0001
Figure imgf000152_0001
Figure imgf000153_0001
Figure imgf000154_0001
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000156_0001
Figure imgf000157_0001
Figure imgf000158_0001
Figure imgf000159_0001
Figure imgf000160_0001
Figure imgf000161_0001
Figure imgf000162_0001
Figure imgf000163_0001
Figure imgf000164_0001
Figure imgf000165_0001
Figure imgf000166_0001
Figure imgf000167_0001
Figure imgf000168_0001
Figure imgf000169_0001
Figure imgf000170_0001
O
Figure imgf000171_0001
Figure imgf000172_0001
Figure imgf000173_0001
Figure imgf000174_0001
Figure imgf000175_0001
Figure imgf000176_0001
Figure imgf000177_0001
Figure imgf000178_0001
Figure imgf000179_0001
Figure imgf000180_0001
Figure imgf000181_0001
Figure imgf000182_0001
Figure imgf000183_0001
Figure imgf000184_0001
Figure imgf000185_0001
Figure imgf000186_0001
Figure imgf000187_0001
Figure imgf000188_0001
Figure imgf000189_0001
Figure imgf000190_0001
Figure imgf000191_0001
Figure imgf000192_0001
Figure imgf000193_0001
TABLE 2
Figure imgf000194_0001
Figure imgf000195_0001
Figure imgf000196_0001
Figure imgf000197_0001
Figure imgf000198_0001
Figure imgf000199_0001
Figure imgf000200_0001
Figure imgf000201_0001
Figure imgf000202_0001
Figure imgf000203_0001
Figure imgf000204_0001
Figure imgf000205_0001
Figure imgf000206_0001
Figure imgf000207_0001
Figure imgf000208_0001
Figure imgf000209_0001
Figure imgf000210_0001
Figure imgf000211_0001
Figure imgf000212_0001
Figure imgf000213_0001
Figure imgf000214_0001
Figure imgf000215_0001
Figure imgf000216_0001
U2005/001222
Figure imgf000217_0001
Figure imgf000218_0001
Figure imgf000219_0001
Figure imgf000220_0001
Figure imgf000221_0001
Figure imgf000222_0001
Figure imgf000223_0001
Figure imgf000224_0001
Figure imgf000225_0001
Figure imgf000226_0001
Figure imgf000227_0001
Figure imgf000228_0001
Figure imgf000229_0001
Figure imgf000230_0001
Figure imgf000231_0001
Figure imgf000232_0001
Figure imgf000233_0001
Figure imgf000234_0001
Figure imgf000235_0001
Figure imgf000236_0001
Figure imgf000237_0001
Figure imgf000238_0001
Figure imgf000239_0001
TABLE 3
AMINO ACID SUB-CLASSIFICATION
Figure imgf000240_0001
TABLE 4
EXEMPLARY AND PREFERRED AMINO ACID SUBSTITUTIONS
Figure imgf000241_0001
TABLE 5
RANKING OF GENES BASED ON P VALUE
j Gene Namef _„ ' Difference SE
Figure imgf000242_0001
B1961481. V1.3_at 1.666322507 0.155216771 10.735454 3.42E-12 WBC026C03_V1.3_at 1.150792386 0.126397807 9.10452809 1.76E-09 WBC005G04_V1.3_at 0.894442963 0.099099842 9.02567496 2.40E-09 WBC020C09_V1.3_at -1.975434651 0.227309869 -8.690492245 8.93E-09 WBC007A05_V1.3_at 0.785659357 0.094470794 8.31642587 3.90E-08 B1961581.V1.3_at -0.451711505 0.055606081 -8.123419151 8.36E-08 BM735170.V1.3_at 1.433067223 0.18234517 7.859090675 2.38E-07 WBC010C05_V1.3_at 1.441977213 0.189449588 7.611403272 6.36E-07 B1961434.V1.3_at 3.424431972 0.456186048 7.506656526 9.64E-07 WBC009D04_V1.3_at 0.592808107 0.081892899 7.23882188 2.79E-06 B1961434.V1.3_s_at 3.161162105 0.439488349 7.192823458 3.34E-06 BM780886.V1.3_at -0.415531897 0.057815618 -7.187191162 3.42E-06 WBC004E01_V1.3_at 0.784558644 0.110780118 7.082125009 5.18E-06 B1961659.V1.3_at 1.551889116 0.219186785 7.080212956 5.22E-06 WBC008B04_V1.3_at -0.678906889 0.097154867 -6.98788343 7.51 E-06 B1961054.V1.3_at 3.826550139 0.547819858 6.985051894 7.60E-06 BM735449.V1.3_at 1.170277871 0.167733159 6.977021578 7.84E-06 WBC029A01_V1.3_at 0.879852727 0.127554003 6.897884067 1.07E-05 BM781436.V1.3_at -0.314495364 0.045881808 -6.854467519 1.27E-05 BM735054.V1.3_at 1.551493311 0.228178727 6.799465195 1.58E-05 WBC31.V1.3_s_at -0.680666497 0.100518591 -6.771548352 1.76E-05 BM734900.V1.3_at -1.516282343 0.22417215 -6.763919336 1.82E-05 B1961438.V1.3_at -0.440498303 0.065266955 -6.749178129 1.92E-05 B1961550.V1.3_at 1.3425348 0.199300914 6.736219995 2.02E-05 WBC31.gFSP.VI .3_s_at -0.591039401 0.087840965 -6.72851668 2.09E-05 BM734862.V1.3_at -0.437281772 0.065682696 -6.657488225 2.76E-05 WBG041 B04_V1.3_at 2.184025458 0.331137896 6.595516498 3.52E-05 WBC422.gRSP.V1.3_at 2.280789862 0.346757118 6.577485351 3.78E-05 WBC007E09_V1.3_at 0.843052247 0.12836437 6.567649944 3.92E-05 BM735031.V1.3_at 1.059207378 0.161421311 6.561756739 4.01 E-05 WBC013G08_V1.3_at 1.604484661 0.246581348 6.506918213 4.98E-05 BM735096.V1.3_at -0.527142962 0.08133936 -6.48078572 5.51 E-05 GI1305528.V1.3_at 1.698015694 0.262662758 6.464622952 5.87E-05 WBC881.gRSP.V1.3_at -0.462008718 0.071869337 -6.428453908 6.76E-05 WBC44.V1.3_at 0.616616596 0.095944624 6.426796735 6.81 E-05 WBC041 C11_V1.3_at -0.303160563 0.047586732 -6.370695093 8.48E-05 WBC036C09_V1.3_at -0.403578085 0.063531632 -6.352396027 9.10E-05 WBC285.gRSP.V1.3_at -0.519857227 0.082704672 -6.28570571 0.000118084 WBC030G08_V1.3_at 0.657348571 0.104593529 6.284791949 0.000118467 WBC024D07_V1.3_at 0.345066898 0.054910514 6.284168071 0.000118717 WBC031E09_V1.3_at 0.945682519 0.150758028 6.272850147 0.000124039 BM734613.V1.3_at -0.195796173 0.031448406 -6.225948974 0.00014889 WBC012F12_V1.3_at 1.423082668 0.230285511 6.179644819 0.000178261 BM734661.V1.3_at -0.171573177 0.027859225 -6.158576752 0.000193428 WBC022G05_V1.3_at 0.598971114 0.097369199 6.151546063 0.000198726 WBC032G11_V1.3_at 0.74658497 0.122452588 6.096930933 0.000245632 WBC028A02_V1.3_at -0.471494416 0.077361546 -6.094687073 0.0002477 WBC024E03 V1.3 at 0.478892417 0.078794071 6.077772226 0.000264421
Figure imgf000243_0001
BM734607.V1.3_at 1.687765982 0.277888053 6.073546394 0.000268705
Foe1268.V1.3_at -0.658520375 0.109329632 -6.023256108 0.000326329
WBC035E08_V1.3_ .at 0.627315382 0.104346849 6.011828676 0.000340982
BM734719.V1.3_at -0.480084044 0.080066503 -5.9960661 0.000362314
BM781127.V1.3_at -0.411205914 0.068820452 -5.975053959 0.000392606
WBC048H02_V1.3. .at -0.147436743 0.024739757 -5.959506446 0.000416788
B1961469.V1.3_at 0.597662751 0.100424518 5.951362912 0.00042997
WBC021A01_V1.3. .at -0.33752016 0.057261491 -5.894365583 0.00053523
B1961499.V1.3_at -0.204864013 0.034949361 -5.861738376 0.000606722
B1961690.V1.3_at -0.189758849 0.032616546 -5.817870785 0.000717784
WBC016C12_V1.3. .at -0.403364998 0.069604438 -5.79510457 0.000782617
WBC032C03_V1.3. _at -0.27218489 0.047411852 -5.740861829 0.000962987
WBC028D07_V1.3. .at 1.186413699 0.208543617 5.689043457 0.001173814
WBC010B02_V1.3_ .at 0.794652845 0.13993627 5.678676762 0.001220044
B1961567.V1.3 at 0.639519337 0.117658674 5.435377724 0.003046977
TABLE 6
RANKING OF GENES BASED ON T VALUE
. Difference . >SE._ * p Value*
WBC020C09_V1.3_at -1.975434651 0.227309869 -8.690492245 8.93E-09
B1961581.V1.3_at -0.451711505 0.055606081 -8.123419151 8.36E-08
BM780886.V1.3_at -0.415531897 0.057815618 -7.187191162 3.42E-06
WBC008B04_V1.3_at -0.678906889 0.097154867 -6.98788343 7.51 E-06
BM781436.V1.3_at -0.314495364 0.045881808 -6.854467519 1.27E-05
WBC31.V1.3_s_at -0.680666497 0.100518591 -6.771548352 1.76E-05
BM734900.V1.3_at -1.516282343 0.22417215 -6.763919336 1.82E-05
B1961438.V1.3_at -0.440498303 0.065266955 -6.749178129 1.92E-05
WBC31.gFSP.VI .3_s_at -0.591039401 0.087840965 -6.72851668 2.09E-05
BM734862.V1.3_at -0.437281772 0.065682696 -6.657488225 2.76E-05
BM735096.V1.3_at -0.527142962 0.08133936 -6.48078572 5.51 E-05
WBC881.gRSP.V1.3_at -0.462008718 0.071869337 -6.428453908 6.76E-05
WBC041 C11_V1.3_at -0.303160563 0.047586732 -6.370695093 8.48E-05
WBG036C09_V1.3_at -0.403578085 0.063531632 -6.352396027 9.10E-05
WBC285.gRSP.V1.3_at -0.519857227 0.082704672 -6.28570571 0.000118084
BM734613.V1.3_at -0.195796173 0.031448406 -6.225948974 0.00014889
BM734661.V1.3_at -0.171573177 0.027859225 -6.158576752 0.000193428
WBC028A02_V1.3_at -0.471494416 0.077361546 -6.094687073 0.0002477
Foe1268.V1.3_at -0.658520375 0.109329632 -6.023256108 0.000326329
BM734719.V1.3_at -0.480084044 0.080066503 -5.9960661 0.000362314
BM781127.V1.3_at -0.411205914 0.068820452 -5.975053959 0.000392606
WBC048H02_V1.3_at -0.147436743 0.024739757 -5.959506446 0.000416788
WBC021A01_V1.3_at -0.33752016 0.057261491 -5.894365583 0.00053523
B1961499.V1.3_at -0.204864013 0.034949361 -5.861738376 0.000606722
B1961690.V1.3_at -0.189758849 0.032616546 -5.817870785 0.000717784
WBC016C12_V1.3_at -0.403364998 0.069604438 -5.79510457 0.000782617
WBC032C03_V1.3_at -0.27218489 0.047411852 -5.740861829 0.000962987
B1961567.V1.3_at 0.639519337 0.117658674 5.435377724 0.003046977
WBC010B02_V1.3_at 0.794652845 0.13993627 5.678676762 0.001220044
WBC028D07_V1.3_at 1.186413699 0.208543617 5.689043457 0.001173814
B1961469.V1.3_at 0.597662751 0.100424518 5.951362912 0.00042997
WBC035E08_V1.3_at 0.627315382 0.104346849 6.011828676 0.000340982
BM734607.V1.3_at 1.687765982 0.277888053 6.073546394 0.000268705
WBC024E03_V1.3_at 0.478892417 0.078794071 6.077772226 0.000264421
WBC032G11_V1.3_at 0.74658497 0.122452588 6.096930933 0.000245632
WBC022G05_V1.3_at 0.598971114 0.097369199 6.151546063 0.000198726
WBC012F12_V1.3_at 1.423082668 0.230285511 6.179644819 0.000178261
WBC031E09_V1.3_at 0.945682519 0.150758028 6.272850147 0.000124039
WBC024D07_V1.3_at 0.345066898 0.054910514 6.284168071 0.000118717
WBC030G08_V1.3_at 0.657348571 0.104593529 6.284791949 0.000118467
WBC44.V1 ,3_at 0.616616596 0.095944624 6.426796735 6.81E-05
GI1305528.V1.3_at 1.698015694 0.262662758 6.464622952 5.87E-05
WBC013G08_V1.3_at 1.604484661 0.246581348 6.506918213 4.98E-05
BM735031.V1.3_at 1.059207378 0.161421311 6.561756739 4.01E-05
WBC007E09_V1.3_at 0.843052247 0.12836437 6.567649944 3.92E-05
WBC422.gRSP.V1.3_at 2.280789862 0.346757118 6.577485351 3.78E-05
WBC041B04_V1.3_at 2.184025458 0.331137896 6.595516498 3.52E-05
B1961550.V1.3 at 1.3425348 0.199300914 6.736219995 2.02E-05
Figure imgf000245_0001
BM735054.V1.3_at 1.551493311 0.228178727 6.799465195 1.58E-05
WBC029A01_V1.3_at 0.879852727 0.127554003 6.897884067 1.07E-05
BM735449.V1.3_at 1.170277871 0.167733159 6.977021578 7.84E-06
B1961054.V1.3_at 3.826550139 0.547819858 6.985051894 7.60E-06
B1961659.V1.3_at 1.551889116 0.219186785 7.080212956 5.22E-06
WBC004E01_V1.3_at 0.784558644 0.110780118 7.082125009 5.18E-06
B1961434.V1.3_s_at 3.161162105 0.439488349 7.192823458 3.34E-06
WBC009D04_V1 3_at 0.592808107 0.081892899 7.23882188 2.79E-06
B1961434.V1.3_at 3.424431972 0.456186048 7.506656526 9.64E-07
WBC010C05_V1.3_at 1.441977213 0.189449588 7.611403272 6.36E-07
BM735170.V1.3_at 1.433067223 0.18234517 7.859090675 2.38E-07
WBC007A05_V1.3_at 0.785659357 0.094470794 8.31642587 3.90E-08
WBC005G04_V1.3_at 0.894442963 0.099099842 9.02567496 2.40E-09
WBC026C03_V1.3_at 1.150792386 0.126397807 9.10452809 1.76E-09
B1961481.V1.3 at 1.666322507 0.155216771 10.735454 3.42E-12
TABLE 7
EHV-I GROUPI'. MEANS OF CLINICAL & HEMATOLOGICAL PARAMETERS
Figure imgf000246_0001
HR = heart rate, RR = respiratory rate, Temp = rectal temperature, PCV = packed cell volume (blood), TSP = total serum protein, Fib = fibrinogen, WCC —white blood cell count, Neut = neutrophils, Lymphs = lymphocytes.
TABLE 8
Figure imgf000247_0001
TABLE 9
PREDICTED CLASS AND DISCRIMINANT SCORE FOR EACH SAMPLE TAKEN FOR GROUP 2 FOALS
Date Horse ID Day of Trial Pos/Neg Index of Gene
Expression
8 April 2003 360 0 neg -0.09
10 April 2003 360 2 pos 0.43
12 April 2003 360 4 neg -1.55
14 April 2003 360 6 neg -1.73
29 April 2003 360 21 neg -1.45
1 May 2003 360 23 neg -0.91
3 May 2003 360 25 neg -0.78
5 May 2003 360 27 neg -1.52
12 May 2003 360 34 neg -2.28
19 May 2003 360 41 neg -2.74
8 April 2003 362 0 pos 1.69
10 April 2003 362 2 pos 0.96
12 April 2003 362 4 neg -0.56
14 April 2003 362 6 pos 0.51
12 April 2003 362 13 neg -1.45
28 April 2003 362 20 neg -2.41
29 April 2003 362 21 neg -1.31
1 May 2003 362 23 neg -1.08
3 May 2003 362 25 neg -1.97
12 May 2003 362 34 neg -1.28
19 May 2003 362 41 neg -2.33
8 April 2003 364 0 pos 0.45
10 April 2003 364 2 neg -0.08
12 April 2003 364 4 neg -1.03
14 April 2003 364 6 neg -1.31
12 April 2003 364 13 neg -1.02
28 April 2003 364 20 neg -1.5
29 April 2003 364 21 pos 0.03
1 May 2003 364 23 neg -0.32
3 May 2003 364 25 neg -0.74
5 May 2003 364 27 neg -1.56
12 May 2003 364 34 neg -1.35
19 May 2003 ' 364 41 neg -1.51
8 April 2003 366 0 neg -1.68
10 April 2003 366 2 neg -1.42
12 April 2003 366 4 neg -2.09
14 April 2003 366 6 neg -1.68
12 April 2003 366 13 neg -0.75
28 April 2003 366 20 neg -1.97
29 April 2003 366 21 neg -0.76
1 May 2003 366 23 neg -0.92 May 2003 366 25 neg -1.34 May 2003 366 27 neg -1.17 May 2003 366 34 neg -1.41 May 2003 366 41 neg -1.68 April 2003 368 0 pos 1.22 April 2003 368 2 pos 0.95 April 2003 368 4 neg -2.02 April 2003 368 6 neg -0.9 April 2003 368 13 neg -2.08 April 2003 368 20 neg -1.54 April 2003 368 21 neg -1.97 May 2003 368 23 neg -1.34 May 2003 368 25 pos 0.37 May 2003 368 27 neg -0.48 May 2003 368 34 neg -3.54 May 2003 368 41 neg -1.96 April 2003 369 0 neg -0.86 April 2003 369 2 neg -1 April 2003 369 4 pos 1.18 April 2003 369 6 neg -0.61 April 2003 369 13 neg -1.14 April 2003 369 20 neg -1.21 April 2003 369 21 neg -1.19 May 2003 369 23 neg -1.77 May 2003 369 25 neg -1.19 May 2003 369 27 neg -1.99 May 2003 369 34 neg -1.53 9 May 2003 369 41 neg -1.52 April 2003 375 0 neg -2.15 April 2003 375 2 pos 1.97 April 2003 375 4 pos 1.66 April 2003 375 6 pos 0.66 April 2003 375 13 neg -1.11 8 April 2003 375 20 neg -0.6 9 April 2003 375 21 neg -1.1 May 2003 375 23 neg -2.47 May 2003 375 25 neg -2.4 May 2003 375 27 neg -0.67 2 May 2003 375 34 neg -4.03 9 May 2003 375 41 neg -1 TABLE 10
Two GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000250_0001
TABLE 11
THREE GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000251_0001
TABLE 12
FOUR GENES SELECTED
Sensitivity Specificity Success GeneJ If Gene 2 U Gene 3 Gene"4
0.9348 0.8621 0.9067 B1961054 WBC009D04 B1961481 B1961499
0.9565 0.8276 0.9067 WBC009D04 WBC021A01 B1961499 WBC048H02
0.9348 0.8276 0.8933 WBC009D04 WBC422 BM734719 B1961481
0.9130 0.8621 0.8933 B1961469 B1961481 B1961434 WBC009D04
0.9565 0.7931 0.8933 WBC44 WBC016C12 B1961499 BM735096
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 WBC048H02 B1961499 WBC31 WBC041 B04
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 WBC048H02 WBC026C03 WBC005G04 B1961581
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 B1961499 WBC024D07 WBC005G04 WBC048H02
0.9348 0.7931 0.8800 BM735096 WBC010B02 WBC041 B04 WBC024E03
0.9565 0.7586 0.8800 BM735054 WBC013G08 B1961690 BM735096
IS)
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 B1961581 B1961438 GI1305528 WBC020C09
0.9348 0.7931 0.8800 B1961499 BM735054 WBC007A05 BM735096
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 WBC022G05 Gl 1305528 BM735096 BM734862
0.8913 0.8621 0.8800 WBC041C11 WBC048H02 WBC020C09 WBC030G08
0.9348 0.7931 0.8800 WBC041B04 B1961659 WBC31 B1961499
0.9348 0.7931 0.8800 WBC022G05 B1961438 BM780886 B1961499
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 WBC036C09 WBC285 B1961581 WBC041B04
0.8913 0.8621 0.8800 WBC026C03 BM734900 WBC032G11 WBC031E09
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 BM735054 WBC022G05 WBC041C11 WBC048H02
0.9130 0.8276 0.8800 WBC048H02 WBC021A01 BM780886 BM735054
TABLE 13
FIVE GENES SELECTED
to
Figure imgf000253_0001
TABLE 14
Six GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000254_0001
TABLE 15
SEVEN GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000255_0001
TABLE 16
EIGHT GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000256_0001
TABLE 17
NINE GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000257_0001
TABLE 18
TEN GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000258_0001
TABLE 19
TWENTY GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000259_0001
Figure imgf000260_0001
TABLE 20
THIRTY GENES SELECTED
Figure imgf000261_0001
Figure imgf000262_0001
TABLE 21
GENE ONTOLOGY
Figure imgf000263_0001
Figure imgf000264_0001
Figure imgf000265_0001
Figure imgf000266_0001

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method for diagnosing the presence of an herpes virus infection in a test subject, comprising detecting in the test subject aberrant expression of at least one herpes virus infection (HVI) marker gene that is expressed in cells of the immune system and that is selected from the group consisting of: (a) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
2. A method according to claim 1, comprising detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ BD NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
3. A method according to claim 1, comprising detecting aberrant expression of an HVI marker polypeptide selected from the group consisting of: (i) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% (sequence similarity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (ii) a polypeptide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; (iii) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 30% similarity with at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; and (iv) a polypeptide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence and is immuno-interactive with an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno- interactive with a sequence of (i), (ii) or (iii).
4. A method according to claim 1, wherein the aberrant expression is detected by: (1) measuring in a biological sample obtained from the test subject the level or functional activity of an expression product of at least one HVI marker gene and (2) comparing the measured level or functional activity of each expression product to the level or functional activity of a corresponding expression product in a reference sample obtained from one or more normal subjects or from one or more subjects lacking herpes virus infection, wherein a difference in the level or functional activity of the expression product in the biological sample as compared to the level or functional activity of the corresponding expression product in the reference sample is indicative of the presence of herpes virus infection in the test subject.
5. A method according to claim 4, further comprising diagnosing the presence, stage or degree of Herpes Virus Infection in the test subject when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is 10% higher than the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product.
6. A method according to claim 5, wherein the presence of Herpes Virus Infection is determined by detecting an increase in the level or functional activity of at least one HVI marker polynucleotide selected from (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 13, 15, 17, 21, 23, 26, 27, 31, 39, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 55, 59, 67, 69, 71, 75, 76, 79, 81, 85, 87, 91, 98, 99109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 14, 16, 18, 22, 28, 32, 40, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 60, 68, 70, 72, 80, 82, 86, 88, 92, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 14, 16, 18, 22, 28, 32, 40, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 60, 68, 70, 72, 80, 82, 86, 88, 92, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
7. A method according to claim 4, further comprising diagnosing the presence, stage or degree of an herpes virus infection in the test subject when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is 10% lower than the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product.
8. A method according to claim 7, wherein the presence of Herpes Virus Infection is determined by detecting a decrease in the level or functional activity of at least one HVI marker polynucleotide selected from (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 6, 10, 19, 24, 25, 29, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 41, 53, 57, 61, 63, 65, 66, 73, 77, 83, 89, 93, 94, 96, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 11, 20, 30, 36, 42, 54, 58, 62, 64, 74, 78, 90, 95, 97, 103 or 105; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 11, 20, 30, 36, 42, 54, 58, 62, 64, 74, 78, 90, 95, 97, 103 or 105, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
9. A method according to claim 4, further comprising diagnosing the absence of herpes virus infection when the measured level or functional activity of the or each expression product is the same as or similar to the measured level or functional activity of the or each corresponding expression product.
10. A method according to claim 4, wherein the measured level or functional activity of an individual expression product varies from the measured level or functional activity of an individual corresponding expression product by no more than about 5%.
11. A method according to claim 4, comprising measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least about two HVI marker genes.
12. A method according to claim 4, comprising measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least one level one correlation HVI marker gene selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25 or 26, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20 or 22; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20 or 22, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
13. A method according to claim 4, comprising measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least one level two correlation HVI marker gene selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% ( sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61 or 63, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62 or 64, (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62 or 64, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
14. A method according to claim 4, comprising measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least one level three correlation HVI marker gene selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 65, 66, 67, 69,
71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85 or 87, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86 or 88; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 68, 70,
72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86 or 88, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
15. A method according to claim 4, comprising measuring the level or functional activity of individual expression products of at least one level four correlation HVI marker gene selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
16. A method according to claim 4, wherein the biological sample comprises blood.
17. A method according to claim 4, wherein the biological sample comprises peripheral blood. ^
18. A method according to claim 4, wherein the biological sample comprises leukocytes.
19. A method according to claim 4, wherein the expression product is a RNA molecule.
20. A method according to claim 4, wherein the expression product is a polypeptide.
21. A method according to claim 4, wherein the expression product is the same as the corresponding expression product.
22. A method according to claim 4, wherein the expression product is a variant of the corresponding expression product.
23. A method according to claim 4, wherein the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target RNA or a DNA copy of the target RNA whose level is measured using at least one nucleic acid probe that hybridizes under at least low stringency conditions to the target RNA or to the DNA copy, wherein the nucleic acid probe comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of an HVI marker polynucleotide.
24. A method according to claim 23, wherein the measured level or abundance of the target RNA or its DNA copy is normalized to the level or abundance of a reference RNA or a
DNA copy of the reference RNA that is present in the same sample.
25. A method according to claim 23, wherein the nucleic acid probe is immobilized on a solid or semi-solid support.
26. A method according to claim 23, wherein the nucleic acid probe forms part of a spatial array of nucleic acid probes.
27. A method according to claim 23, wherein the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by hybridization.
28. A method according to claim 23, wherein the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by nucleic acid amplification.
29. A method according to claim 23, wherein the level of nucleic acid probe that is bound to the target RNA or to the DNA copy is measured by nuclease protection assay.
30. A method according to claim 23, wherein the probe for detecting the HVI marker polynucleotide comprises a sequence as set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 145-2150.
31. A method according to claim 23, wherein the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target polypeptide whose level is measured using at least one antigen- binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with the target polypeptide.
32. A method according to claim 23, wherein the measured level of the target polypeptide is normalized to the level of a reference polypeptide that is present in the same sample.
33. A method according to claim 23, wherein the antigen-binding molecule is immobilized on a solid or semi-solid support.
34. A method according to claim 23, wherein the antigen-binding molecule forms part of a spatial array of antigen-binding molecule.
35. A method according to claim 23, wherein the level of antigen-binding molecule that is bound to the target polypeptide is measured by immunoassay.
36. A method according to claim 4, wherein the expression product or corresponding expression product is a target polypeptide whose level is measured using at least one substrate for the target polypeptide with which it reacts to produce a reaction product.
37. A method according to claim 36, wherein the measured functional activity of the target polypeptide is normalized to the functional activity of a reference polypeptide that is present in the same sample.
38. A method according to claim 4, wherein a system is used to perform the method, which comprises at least one end station coupled to a base station., wherein the base station is caused (a) to receive subject data from the end station via a communications network, wherein the subject data represents parameter values corresponding to the measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one expression product in the biological sample, and (b) to compare the subject data with predetermined data representing the measured or normalized level or functional activity of at least one corresponding expression product in the reference sample to thereby determine any difference in the level or functional activity of the expression product in the biological sample as compared to the level or functional activity of the corresponding expression product in the reference sample.
39. A method according to claim 38, wherein the base station is further caused to provide a diagnosis for the presence, absence or degree of herpes virus infection.
40. A method according to claim 38, wherein the base station is further caused to transfer an indication of the diagnosis to the end station via the communications network.
41. A method according to claim 1, wherein detection of the aberrant expression is indicative of the presence or risk of herpes virus infection.
42. A method according to claim 1, wherein the test subject is a horse.
43. A method for treating, preventing or inhibiting the development of an herpes virus infection in a subject, the method comprising detecting aberrant expression of at least one HVI marker gene in the subject, and administering to the subject an effective amount of an agent that treats or ameliorates the symptoms or reverses or inhibits the development of the herpes virus infection in the subject, wherein the HVI marker gene is expressed in cells of the immune system and is selected from the group consisting of: (a) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 or a complement thereof; (b) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ED NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a gene having a polynucleotide expression product comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
44. An isolated HVI marker polynucleotide selected from: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a portion of the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of that sequence or complement; (c) a polynucleotide that hybridizes to the sequence of (a) or (b) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a portion of any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26, 33, 34, 37, 38, 65, 66, 75, 76, 83, 84, 93, 98, 99, 100, 101, 106, 107 or 108, or a complement thereof, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous nucleotides of that sequence or complement and hybridizes to a sequence of (a), (b) or (c), or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
45. A nucleic acid construct comprising an BTVI marker polynucleotide according to claim 44, in operable connection with a regulatory element that is operable in a host cell.
46. An isolated host cell containing a nucleic acid construct according to claim 45.
47. A probe comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under at least low stringency conditions to a polynucleotide according to claim 44.
48. A probe according to claim 47, consisting essentially of a nucleic acid sequence , that corresponds or is complementary to at least a portion of a nucleotide sequence encoding the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length.
49. A probe according to claim 47, wherein the probe comprises a nucleotide sequence which is capable of hybridizing to at least a portion of a nucleotide sequence encoding the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92,
95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114 under at least low stringency conditions, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length.
50. A probe according to claim 47, wherein the probe comprise a nucleotide sequence that is capable of hybridizing to at least a portion of any one of SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94,
96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113 under at least low stringency conditions, wherein the portion is at least 15 nucleotides in length.
51. A probe according to claim 47, comprising a sequence as set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 145-2150.
52. A solid or semi-solid support comprising at least one probe according to claim 47 immobilized thereon.
53. Use of one or more HVI marker polynucleotides according to claim 44, or the use of one or more probes according to claim 47, or the use of one or more HVI marker polypeptides selected from the group consisting of: (i) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (ii) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with a polypeptide expression product of an HVI marker gene that comprises a sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (iii) a portion of the polypeptide according to (i) or (ii) wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of that polypeptide; (iv) a polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence that shares at least 30% similarity with at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of the polypeptide according to (i) or (ii); and (iv) a polypeptide comprising a portion of the polypeptide according to (i) or (ii), wherein the portion comprises at least 5 contiguous amino acid residues of the polypeptide according to (i) or (ii) and is immuno-interactive with an antigen-binding molecule that is immuno-interactive with a sequence of (i), (ii) or (iii), or the use of one or more antigen-binding molecules that are immuno-interactive with a said HVI marker polypeptide, in the manufacture of a kit for diagnosing the presence of an herpes virus infection in a subject.
54. A method for diagnosing the presence of an herpes virus infection in a test subject, comprising detecting in the test subject aberrant expression of at least one HVI marker polynucleotide that is expressed in cells of the immune system and that is selected from the group consisting of: (a) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that shares at least 50% sequence identity with the sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 1 , 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 57, 59, 61, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 76, 77, 79, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87, 89, 91, 93, 94, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 111 or 113, or a complement thereof; (b) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence set forth in any one of SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114; (c) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide that shares at least 50% sequence similarity with at least a portion of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 3, 5, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 68, 70, 72, 74, 78, 80, 82, 86, 88, 90, 92, 95, 97, 103, 105, 110, 112 or 114, wherein the portion comprises at least 15 contiguous amino acid residues of that sequence; and (d) a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the sequence of (a), (b), (c) or a complement thereof, under at least low stringency conditions.
PCT/AU2005/001222 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host’s differential gene expression upon infection WO2006015452A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
NZ553225A NZ553225A (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring hostÆs differential gene expression upon infection
EP05771876.9A EP1786934B1 (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host"s differential gene expression upon infection
US11/573,677 US8071305B2 (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host's differential gene expression upon infection
CA2576295A CA2576295C (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host's differential gene expression upon injection
AU2005270667A AU2005270667B2 (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of Herpes Virus infection by monitoring host's differential gene expression upon infection
CN2005800323153A CN101065502B (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host's differential gene expression upon infection

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2004904578A AU2004904578A0 (en) 2004-08-13 Diagnostic agents and uses therefor
AU2004904578 2004-08-13
US60814104P 2004-09-09 2004-09-09
US60/608,141 2004-09-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2006015452A1 true WO2006015452A1 (en) 2006-02-16

Family

ID=35839082

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/AU2005/001222 WO2006015452A1 (en) 2004-08-13 2005-08-15 Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host’s differential gene expression upon infection

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US8071305B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1786934B1 (en)
AU (1) AU2005270667B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2576295C (en)
NZ (1) NZ553225A (en)
WO (1) WO2006015452A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8106165B2 (en) 1997-03-07 2012-01-31 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Antibodies to HNFIP24 polypeptides

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AP2014007886A0 (en) * 2012-02-01 2014-08-31 Dow Agrosciences Llc Synthetic chloroplast transit peptides
JP6715766B2 (en) * 2013-06-21 2020-07-01 ザ ジョンズ ホプキンス ユニバーシティ Virion display array for profiling the function and interaction of human membrane proteins
WO2022066963A1 (en) * 2020-09-25 2022-03-31 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Method for determining a virally-infected subject's risk of developing severe symptoms

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005067649A2 (en) * 2004-01-08 2005-07-28 The Ohio State University Use of databases to create gene expression microarrays

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AU2001290523A1 (en) * 2000-08-01 2002-02-13 Oregon Health & Science University Gene expression profile for KSHV infection and methods for treating same
AU2001294831A1 (en) * 2000-09-29 2002-04-08 University Of Rochester Method of screening for therapeutics for infectious diseases

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005067649A2 (en) * 2004-01-08 2005-07-28 The Ohio State University Use of databases to create gene expression microarrays

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
JONES, J. AND A.M. MARVIN: "Microarray Analysis of Host Cell Gene transcription in Response to Varicella-Zoster Virus Infection of Human T-cells and Fibroblasts in vitro and in SCIDhu Skin Xenografts in vivo", J. VIROLOGY, vol. 77, no. 2, 2003, pages 1268 - 1280, XP008092463 *
NARANATT P.P. ET AL.: "Host Gene Induction and Transcriptional Programming in Kaposi's Sarcoma-Associated Herpesvirus (KSHV/HHV-8)-Infected Endothelial, Fibroblast and B Cells", CANCER RESEARCH, vol. 64, no. 1, 2004, pages 72 - 84, XP008092245 *
See also references of EP1786934A4 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8106165B2 (en) 1997-03-07 2012-01-31 Human Genome Sciences, Inc. Antibodies to HNFIP24 polypeptides

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2576295A1 (en) 2006-02-16
EP1786934B1 (en) 2013-06-26
US8071305B2 (en) 2011-12-06
AU2005270667A1 (en) 2006-02-16
EP1786934A4 (en) 2008-02-27
US20080274988A1 (en) 2008-11-06
NZ553225A (en) 2010-02-26
AU2005270667B2 (en) 2011-08-25
CA2576295C (en) 2014-07-29
EP1786934A1 (en) 2007-05-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9816128B2 (en) Polynucleotide marker genes and their expression, for diagnosis of endotoxemia
US20150322517A1 (en) Agents and methods for diagnosing stress
AU2011334548B2 (en) Diagnostic and/or screening agents and uses therefor
US8071305B2 (en) Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host&#39;s differential gene expression upon infection
Qi et al. Development and application of a TaqMan-based real-time PCR method for the detection of the ASFV MGF505-7R gene
US8889845B2 (en) Surrogate markers for viral infections and other inflammatory responses
EP3359690A1 (en) METHODS AND KITS FOR PREDICTION AND DIAGNOSIS OF HUMAN CYTOMEGALOVIRUS CONGENITAL (hCMV) TRANSMISSION
Hung et al. Viral loads in clinical specimens and SARS manifestations
EP3371324B1 (en) Viral biomarkers and uses therefor
KR102346881B1 (en) A kit for simultaneous diagnosis of coronavirus and influenza virus
US20130040285A1 (en) Saliva Polymerase Chain Reaction Assay for Cytomegalovirus Infection
US8435731B2 (en) Markers for viral infections and other inflammatory responses
CN101065502B (en) Microarray-mediated diagnosis of herpes virus infection by monitoring host&#39;s differential gene expression upon infection
WO2005090593A1 (en) Host markers for diagnosis of equine protozoal myeloencephalitis and sarcocystis neurona infection
RU2706126C1 (en) Diagnostic technique for the combined infection in children with acute respiratory infections
US20090226552A1 (en) Agents and methods for diagnosing osteoarthritis
US20210230710A1 (en) Methods for detecting antiviral-drug resistant virus
JP2024099548A (en) Methods for detecting antiviral drug resistant viruses
JP2024528662A (en) Use of Torque Teno Virus (TTV) as a Marker to Determine the Risk of Complications in Patients Admitted to a Healthcare Facility
JP2024524584A (en) Methods and kits for detecting replicating respiratory viruses
CN116829737A (en) Methods of identifying subjects at increased risk of coronavirus infection and treatment thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KM KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NG NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SM SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005270667

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2576295

Country of ref document: CA

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 553225

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005771876

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2005270667

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20050815

Kind code of ref document: A

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2005270667

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200580032315.3

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2005771876

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 11573677

Country of ref document: US